ProMaster Master Keying

by WH Software Limited
 I ProMaster Master Keying

Table of Contents
Part 1 About 1

Part 2 Copyright notice 3

Part 3 Contacting WH Software Limited 5

Part 4 New installation, just installed - what to do next 7

4.1 Upgrade installation, just installed - what to do next
................................................................................................................................... 8

Part 5 Introduction 9
5.1 Using this guide
................................................................................................................................... 10
5.2 Understanding concepts
................................................................................................................................... 10
5.3 Product editions
................................................................................................................................... 15
5.4 Design module overview
................................................................................................................................... 18

Part 6 Installing 23
6.1 Architecture ...................................................................................................................................
overview 24
6.2 System requirements
................................................................................................................................... 24
6.3 Installing ................................................................................................................................... 26
6.4 File locations
................................................................................................................................... 27
6.5 Description of files
................................................................................................................................... 28
6.6 Licensing and product activation
................................................................................................................................... 29

Part 7 Getting started 31

7.1 Logging into...................................................................................................................................
ProMaster Master Keying 32
7.2 The administrator's first time
................................................................................................................................... 32
7.3 A user's first ...................................................................................................................................
time 32
7.4 Activating ProMaster Master Keying
................................................................................................................................... 32
7.5 Changing your password
................................................................................................................................... 33
7.6 Setting your...................................................................................................................................
preferences 33
7.7 Printer setup................................................................................................................................... 35
7.8 Spelling preferences
................................................................................................................................... 36
7.9 Navigating and usage tips
................................................................................................................................... 36
7.10 Searching for data
................................................................................................................................... 38

Part 8 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 39

8.1 Database upgrades and backups
................................................................................................................................... 40
8.1.1 Database upgrades .......................................................................................................................................................... 40
8.1.2 Backing up your data .......................................................................................................................................................... 40
8.2 Configuring ................................................................................................................................... 44
8.2.1 Users .......................................................................................................................................................... 44
8.2.2 Security groups .......................................................................................................................................................... 45

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Contents II

8.2.3 Security categories .......................................................................................................................................................... 48

8.2.4 Application param eters
.......................................................................................................................................................... 49
8.2.5 Com pany inform ation.......................................................................................................................................................... 49
8.2.6 Com pany logo for reports
.......................................................................................................................................................... 50
8.2.7 Branch addresses .......................................................................................................................................................... 50
8.2.7.1 Importing branch addresses
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 51
8.2.8 Change registration .......................................................................................................................................................... 52
8.2.9 Configuring docum ent..........................................................................................................................................................
storage 52
8.3 General parameters
................................................................................................................................... 53
8.3.1 Keying types .......................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.3.1.1 Importing keying types
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 54
8.3.2 Factories .......................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.3.2.1 Importing factories..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 56
8.3.3 Locks and cylinders .......................................................................................................................................................... 57
8.3.3.1 Entering locks .......................................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.3.2 Entering cylinders .......................................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.3.3 Bulk change locks .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.3.3.4 Copy lock cylinders .......................................................................................................................................................... 60
8.3.3.5 Copy cylinder driver..........................................................................................................................................................
pins 61
8.3.3.6 Replace lock .......................................................................................................................................................... 61
8.3.3.7 Importing locks from..........................................................................................................................................................
a csv file 61
8.3.3.8 Importing lock cylinders
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 63
8.3.3.9 Importing lock pictures
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 64
8.3.3.10 Importing cylinders..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 65
8.3.3.11 Importing cylinder driver
..........................................................................................................................................................
pins from a csv file 66
8.3.3.12 Importing cylinder pictures
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 67
8.3.3.13 Cylinder sub assembly
.......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.3.3.14 Importing cylinder sub
..........................................................................................................................................................
assembly from a csv file 69
8.3.3.15 Importing cylinder sub
..........................................................................................................................................................
assembly images from a csv file 71
8.3.3.16 Importing cylinder sub
..........................................................................................................................................................
assembly video URL from a csv file 72
8.3.4 Hardw are .......................................................................................................................................................... 73
8.3.4.1 Importing hardw are
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 74
8.3.4.2 Importing hardw are
..........................................................................................................................................................
types from a csv file 75
8.3.5 Tem plates .......................................................................................................................................................... 76
8.3.6 Lockshops .......................................................................................................................................................... 77
8.3.6.1 Importing lockshops
..........................................................................................................................................................
from a csv file 77
8.4 Mobile services
................................................................................................................................... 79
8.4.1 Configuring publishing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 80
8.4.2 Configuring devices .......................................................................................................................................................... 84
8.4.2.1 Device jobs .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
8.4.3 Configuring Key Manager
..........................................................................................................................................................
users 85
8.4.3.1 System Info .......................................................................................................................................................... 86
8.5 Design module config
................................................................................................................................... 87
8.5.1 System types .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
8.5.2 Key colours .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
8.5.2.1 Importing key colours
..........................................................................................................................................................
a csv file 90
8.5.3 Key sections and keyw ..........................................................................................................................................................
ays 91
8.5.4 Kaba rotor stators .......................................................................................................................................................... 93
8.5.5 Lists .......................................................................................................................................................... 93
8.5.5.1 Managing Abloy Novel
..........................................................................................................................................................
lists 94
8.5.5.2 Managing Abloy Protec
..........................................................................................................................................................
lists 95
8.5.5.3 Managing Kaba ACE
..........................................................................................................................................................
lists 96
8.5.5.4 Managing Kaba Expert
..........................................................................................................................................................
Plus lists 96
8.5.5.5 Managing Lockw ood
..........................................................................................................................................................
MT5 lists 97
8.6 Exporting data
................................................................................................................................... 97
8.6.1 Exporting param eter data
..........................................................................................................................................................
to a csv file 98

© 2019 WH Software Limited

III ProMaster Master Keying

8.6.2 Exporting design m odule

..........................................................................................................................................................
data 98

Part 9 Using ProMaster Master Keying 99

9.1 Clients ................................................................................................................................... 100
9.1.1 Im port clients from a..........................................................................................................................................................
csv file 100
9.2 Client signatories
................................................................................................................................... 101
9.3 Systems ................................................................................................................................... 102
9.3.1 Creating a system .......................................................................................................................................................... 103
9.3.2 Creating a system from
..........................................................................................................................................................
hierarchy quantities 105
9.3.3 Creating a system from
..........................................................................................................................................................
Excel 107
9.3.4 Modifying a system .......................................................................................................................................................... 109
9.3.5 Im porting a system extension
..........................................................................................................................................................
from Excel 109
9.3.6 Change system status
.......................................................................................................................................................... 110
9.3.7 System snapshot .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
9.3.8 Duplicating a system.......................................................................................................................................................... 111
9.3.9 Deleting a system .......................................................................................................................................................... 111
9.4 Exporting and importing systems
................................................................................................................................... 112
9.4.1 Exporting system s .......................................................................................................................................................... 112
9.4.2 Im porting system s .......................................................................................................................................................... 113
9.4.3 Exporting to Excel .......................................................................................................................................................... 114
9.4.4 Exporting to ProMaster
..........................................................................................................................................................
Key Manager 114
9.5 Signatories................................................................................................................................... 115
9.5.1 Entering signatories .......................................................................................................................................................... 117
9.5.2 Signatory history .......................................................................................................................................................... 117
9.5.3 Job history for signatory
.......................................................................................................................................................... 117
9.5.4 Key authorities .......................................................................................................................................................... 118
9.5.5 Key authorities m atrix
.......................................................................................................................................................... 118
9.5.6 Door authorities .......................................................................................................................................................... 119
9.5.7 Door authorities m atrix
.......................................................................................................................................................... 119
9.5.8 Copying authorities from
..........................................................................................................................................................
another signatory 120
9.5.9 Copy signatories to this
..........................................................................................................................................................
system from another system 121
9.5.10 Copy signatory to other
..........................................................................................................................................................
system s 121
9.6 Documents................................................................................................................................... 122
9.7 Alerts ................................................................................................................................... 123
9.8 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 123
9.8.1 Entering keys .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
9.8.2 Understanding key designations
..........................................................................................................................................................
and hierarchy 126
9.8.3 Door access .......................................................................................................................................................... 126
9.8.4 Authorised signatories
..........................................................................................................................................................
for key 127
9.8.5 Key history .......................................................................................................................................................... 127
9.8.6 Replace key .......................................................................................................................................................... 127
9.8.7 Exporting keys to a csv
..........................................................................................................................................................
file 128
9.8.8 Im porting keys from..........................................................................................................................................................
a csv file 128
9.8.9 Key groups .......................................................................................................................................................... 129
9.8.10 Bulk change keys .......................................................................................................................................................... 130
9.8.11 Sort keys .......................................................................................................................................................... 130
9.8.12 Key hierarchy .......................................................................................................................................................... 131
9.8.13 Set key quantity issued
.......................................................................................................................................................... 132
9.9 Doors ................................................................................................................................... 132
9.9.1 Entering doors .......................................................................................................................................................... 133
9.9.2 Door keying .......................................................................................................................................................... 135

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Contents IV

9.9.3 Authorised signatories

..........................................................................................................................................................
for door 136
9.9.4 Recording door hardw
..........................................................................................................................................................
are 136
9.9.5 Duplicating doors .......................................................................................................................................................... 136
9.9.6 Duplicating a door area
.......................................................................................................................................................... 138
9.9.7 Door history .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
9.9.8 Exporting doors to a ..........................................................................................................................................................
csv file 140
9.9.9 Im porting doors from
..........................................................................................................................................................
a csv file 140
9.9.10 Im porting door renam
..........................................................................................................................................................
ing from a csv file 141
9.9.11 Im porting from ProMaster
..........................................................................................................................................................
Hardw are 142
9.9.12 Door groups .......................................................................................................................................................... 143
9.9.13 Bulk change doors .......................................................................................................................................................... 143
9.9.14 Sort doors .......................................................................................................................................................... 144
9.9.15 Set door quantity issued
.......................................................................................................................................................... 145
9.10 Keying matrix
................................................................................................................................... 145
9.10.1 Im port keying from a..........................................................................................................................................................
csv file 148
9.11 Reporting ................................................................................................................................... 149
9.11.1 Printer options .......................................................................................................................................................... 149
9.11.2 Adm in reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 150
9.11.2.1 Unreturned system ..........................................................................................................................................................
registration forms 150
9.11.2.2 Blank signature registration
..........................................................................................................................................................
form 151
9.11.2.3 System w ithout signatories
.......................................................................................................................................................... 151
9.11.2.4 Signatories w ithout
..........................................................................................................................................................
a signature picture 152
9.11.2.5 Jobs aw aiting coding
..........................................................................................................................................................
or manufacturing 153
9.11.2.6 Job administration..........................................................................................................................................................
summary 153
9.11.2.7 Job key section usage
.......................................................................................................................................................... 154
9.11.2.8 Aged systems .......................................................................................................................................................... 155
9.11.2.9 Key Manager users .......................................................................................................................................................... 156
9.11.2.10 Lock usage .......................................................................................................................................................... 156
9.11.2.11 Custom reports - ..........................................................................................................................................................
general 157
9.11.3 System reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 158
9.11.3.1 Initial system reports
.......................................................................................................................................................... 158
9.11.3.2 System details .......................................................................................................................................................... 158
9.11.3.3 System lock usage .......................................................................................................................................................... 159
9.11.3.4 Order form .......................................................................................................................................................... 160
9.11.3.5 Keys .......................................................................................................................................................... 161
9.11.3.6 Key hierarchy .......................................................................................................................................................... 161
9.11.3.7 Doors .......................................................................................................................................................... 162
9.11.3.8 Keying matrix .......................................................................................................................................................... 163
9.11.3.9 Key history .......................................................................................................................................................... 165
9.11.3.10 Door history .......................................................................................................................................................... 166
9.11.3.11 Signature registration
..........................................................................................................................................................
form 167
9.11.3.12 Signatory key authorities
.......................................................................................................................................................... 168
9.11.3.13 Signatory door authorities
.......................................................................................................................................................... 169
9.11.3.14 Custom reports - ..........................................................................................................................................................
system 170
9.11.3.15 Construction keyed..........................................................................................................................................................
doors 170
9.12 Coding ................................................................................................................................... 171
9.12.1 Coding overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 171
9.12.2 System design .......................................................................................................................................................... 171
9.12.2.1 Promote key section
.......................................................................................................................................................... 176
9.12.2.2 System design notes
.......................................................................................................................................................... 176
9.12.2.3 Construction keying
.......................................................................................................................................................... 177
9.12.3 Top m aster key .......................................................................................................................................................... 178
9.12.4 Design assistant .......................................................................................................................................................... 178
9.12.5 Testing the system design
..........................................................................................................................................................
- coding tree 179
9.12.6 Testing the system design
..........................................................................................................................................................
- coding m atrix 180
9.12.7 Coding screen overview
.......................................................................................................................................................... 180

© 2019 WH Software Limited

V ProMaster Master Keying

9.12.8 Coding using the coding

..........................................................................................................................................................
tree 184
9.12.8.1 Colour rules .......................................................................................................................................................... 186
9.12.9 Coding using the coding
..........................................................................................................................................................
m atrix 186
9.12.10 Coding using the Kaba
..........................................................................................................................................................
coding grid 188
9.12.10.1 Coding grid progression
.......................................................................................................................................................... 190
9.12.11 Code entry .......................................................................................................................................................... 191
9.12.12 Special pinning .......................................................................................................................................................... 191
9.12.13 Deleting the the system
..........................................................................................................................................................
design 192
9.12.14 Coding com plete override
.......................................................................................................................................................... 193
9.12.15 Change key sections.......................................................................................................................................................... 193
9.12.16 Report: Key codes .......................................................................................................................................................... 194
9.12.17 Report: Door pinnings
.......................................................................................................................................................... 195
9.13 Jobs ................................................................................................................................... 196
9.13.1 Entering jobs .......................................................................................................................................................... 197
9.13.2 Order keys from list .......................................................................................................................................................... 202
9.13.3 Order doors from list.......................................................................................................................................................... 202
9.13.4 Im porting a job from ..........................................................................................................................................................
ProMaster Key Manager 203
9.13.5 Edit job invoice num ber
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
9.13.6 Delete job .......................................................................................................................................................... 204
9.13.7 Report: Job pre-release
..........................................................................................................................................................
key confirm ation 204
9.13.8 Report: Job pre-release
..........................................................................................................................................................
door confirm ation 205
9.14 Job manufacturing
................................................................................................................................... 205
9.14.1 Open job for m anufacturing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 206
9.14.2 Settings: Print job sum
..........................................................................................................................................................
m ary 207
9.14.3 Settings: Print key cutting
..........................................................................................................................................................
chart 207
9.14.4 Settings: Print key cutting
..........................................................................................................................................................
chart - test keys 207
9.14.5 Settings: Print key labels
.......................................................................................................................................................... 207
9.14.6 Settings: Print pinning
..........................................................................................................................................................
chart 208
9.14.7 Settings: Print door labels
.......................................................................................................................................................... 209
9.14.8 Settings: On-screen pinning
.......................................................................................................................................................... 209
9.14.9 Settings: Print client ..........................................................................................................................................................
key confirm ation 210
9.14.10 Settings: Print client ..........................................................................................................................................................
door confirm ation 210
9.14.11 Print Shipping Labels.......................................................................................................................................................... 210
9.14.12 Manufacture: Mark keys
.......................................................................................................................................................... 211
9.14.12.1 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca Marker 2000 212
9.14.13 Manufacture: Cut keys .......................................................................................................................................................... 213
9.14.13.1 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca UnoCode 214
9.14.13.2 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca UltraCode 214
9.14.13.3 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca UnoCode 199 214
9.14.13.4 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca Futura 215
9.14.13.5 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca Protech 215
9.14.13.6 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca QuattroCode 215
9.14.13.7 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Keyline Dezmo 215
9.14.13.8 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Abloy LT106 215
9.14.13.9 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
HPC Codemax 216
9.14.13.10 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Ilco EZCode 216
9.14.14 Manufacture: Save job ..........................................................................................................................................................
to XML for key m arking 216
9.14.15 Manufacture: Save job
..........................................................................................................................................................
to XML for key cutting 217
9.14.16 Manufacture: Mark doors
.......................................................................................................................................................... 217
9.14.16.1 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Gravograph 218
9.14.16.2 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Ilco EngraveIt Pro 218
9.14.16.3 Machine options:..........................................................................................................................................................
Silca Marker 2000 218
9.14.17 Manufacture: Doors and ..........................................................................................................................................................
keys on Galaxy m achine 219
9.14.18 Manufacture: On-screen
..........................................................................................................................................................
pinning 220
9.14.19 Manufacture: Save job
..........................................................................................................................................................
to XML for door m arking 221

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Contents VI

9.14.20 Manufacture: Save job

..........................................................................................................................................................
to XML for door assem bly 222
9.14.21 Manufacture: Save job
..........................................................................................................................................................
to XML for parts required 222
9.14.22 Manufacture: Publish..........................................................................................................................................................
to device 223
9.14.23 Machine setup .......................................................................................................................................................... 223
9.14.23.1 Machine setup - Silca
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Unocode, Triax) 224
9.14.23.2 Machine setup - Silca
..........................................................................................................................................................
Futura 224
9.14.23.3 Machine setup - Silca
..........................................................................................................................................................
Marker 2000 224
9.14.23.4 Machine setup - Silca
..........................................................................................................................................................
Protech 225
9.14.23.5 Machine setup - Silca
..........................................................................................................................................................
QuattroCode 226
9.14.23.6 Machine setup - Keyline
..........................................................................................................................................................
(All) 226
9.14.23.7 Machine setup - Abloy
..........................................................................................................................................................
LT106 226
9.14.23.8 Machine setup - Abloy
..........................................................................................................................................................
LT120 226
9.14.23.9 Machine setup - ALC
..........................................................................................................................................................
Galaxy 227
9.14.23.10 Machine setup - CYA
.......................................................................................................................................................... 227
9.14.23.11 Machine setup - Gravograph
.......................................................................................................................................................... 227
9.14.23.12 Machine setup - HPC
..........................................................................................................................................................
Codemax 227
9.14.23.13 Machine setup - Ilco
..........................................................................................................................................................
EngraveIt Pro 228
9.14.23.14 Machine setup - Ilco
..........................................................................................................................................................
EZCode 228
9.14.23.15 Machine setup - ITL
.......................................................................................................................................................... 228
9.14.23.16 Machine setup - JMA
..........................................................................................................................................................
MultiMark 229
9.14.23.17 Machine setup - Maromatic
.......................................................................................................................................................... 229
9.14.23.18 Machine setup - Miracle
.......................................................................................................................................................... 229
9.14.23.19 Machine setup - MulTLock
..........................................................................................................................................................
KC5 229
9.14.23.20 Machine setup - Orion
..........................................................................................................................................................
ECM 200 230
9.14.23.21 Machine setup - Orion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Luna 230
9.14.23.22 Machine setup - Combination
.......................................................................................................................................................... 230
9.14.23.23 Machine setup - Generic
..........................................................................................................................................................
key marker 230
9.14.23.24 Machine setup - Generic
..........................................................................................................................................................
cylinder marker 231
9.14.24 Machine job queue .......................................................................................................................................................... 232
9.15 Exporting data
................................................................................................................................... 232
9.15.1 Exporting system data
..........................................................................................................................................................
to a csv file 232
9.15.2 Exporting system s analysis
..........................................................................................................................................................
data 233
9.16 Design modules
................................................................................................................................... 233
9.16.1 General inform ation .......................................................................................................................................................... 233
9.16.1.1 Common system ..........................................................................................................................................................
type parameters 233
9.16.1.2 Kaba Positional Keying
..........................................................................................................................................................
Chart 234
9.16.2 Abloy Disklock/Novel.......................................................................................................................................................... 235
9.16.2.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 235
9.16.2.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 235
9.16.2.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 235
9.16.2.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 236
9.16.3 Abloy Protec 1/2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 236
9.16.3.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 236
9.16.3.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 236
9.16.3.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 237
9.16.3.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 238
9.16.4 Abloy Standard/Exec/Sentry
.......................................................................................................................................................... 238
9.16.4.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 238
9.16.4.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 238
9.16.4.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 239
9.16.4.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 239
9.16.5 ABUS XY14 .......................................................................................................................................................... 239
9.16.5.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 239
9.16.5.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 239
9.16.5.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 240
9.16.5.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 240
9.16.6 ALC Bilock .......................................................................................................................................................... 240
9.16.6.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 240

© 2019 WH Software Limited

VII ProMaster Master Keying

9.16.6.2 System type setup

.......................................................................................................................................................... 242
9.16.6.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 242
9.16.6.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 243
9.16.7 ALC Galaxy .......................................................................................................................................................... 243
9.16.7.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 243
9.16.7.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 243
9.16.7.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 243
9.16.7.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 244
9.16.8 Assa Abloy KeyUltra .......................................................................................................................................................... 244
9.16.8.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 244
9.16.8.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 244
9.16.8.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 245
9.16.8.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 245
9.16.9 Assa Abloy Perk .......................................................................................................................................................... 245
9.16.9.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 245
9.16.9.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 246
9.16.9.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 246
9.16.9.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 246
9.16.10 Assa Abloy Union .......................................................................................................................................................... 246
9.16.10.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 247
9.16.10.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 247
9.16.10.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 247
9.16.10.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 248
9.16.11 Assa USA .......................................................................................................................................................... 248
9.16.11.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 248
9.16.11.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 248
9.16.11.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system type 249
9.16.11.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 249
9.16.12 Chubb Detainer .......................................................................................................................................................... 249
9.16.12.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 249
9.16.12.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 250
9.16.12.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 250
9.16.12.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 250
9.16.13 EVVA 3KS/4KS .......................................................................................................................................................... 250
9.16.13.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 250
9.16.13.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 253
9.16.13.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 253
9.16.13.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 254
9.16.14 EVVA DPE/DPS/EPS .......................................................................................................................................................... 254
9.16.14.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 254
9.16.14.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 254
9.16.14.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 255
9.16.14.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 255
9.16.15 Inline .......................................................................................................................................................... 255
9.16.15.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 255
9.16.15.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 255
9.16.15.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 256
9.16.15.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 256
9.16.16 Interchangeable Core.......................................................................................................................................................... 256
9.16.16.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 257
9.16.16.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 257
9.16.16.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 258
9.16.16.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 258
9.16.17 Kaba ACE .......................................................................................................................................................... 258
9.16.17.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 258
9.16.17.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 259
9.16.17.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 259
9.16.17.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 260
9.16.18 Kaba experT .......................................................................................................................................................... 261

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Contents VIII

9.16.18.1 Product description

.......................................................................................................................................................... 261
9.16.18.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 262
9.16.18.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 262
9.16.18.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 263
9.16.19 Kaba experT Plus .......................................................................................................................................................... 263
9.16.19.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 263
9.16.19.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 264
9.16.19.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 265
9.16.19.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 265
9.16.20 Kaba Gem ini .......................................................................................................................................................... 266
9.16.20.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 266
9.16.20.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 266
9.16.20.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 266
9.16.20.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 267
9.16.21 Kaba Quattro .......................................................................................................................................................... 267
9.16.21.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 267
9.16.21.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 268
9.16.21.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 269
9.16.21.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 269
9.16.22 Lockw ood MT5/MT5+.......................................................................................................................................................... 270
9.16.22.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 270
9.16.22.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 270
9.16.22.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 271
9.16.22.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 271
9.16.23 Lockw ood Tw in .......................................................................................................................................................... 271
9.16.23.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 271
9.16.23.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 272
9.16.23.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 272
9.16.23.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 273
9.16.24 Medeco Biaxial 10 .......................................................................................................................................................... 273
9.16.24.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 273
9.16.24.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 273
9.16.24.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 274
9.16.24.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 275
9.16.25 Medeco Biaxial 60 .......................................................................................................................................................... 275
9.16.25.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 275
9.16.25.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 275
9.16.25.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 276
9.16.25.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 277
9.16.26 Medeco Original 10 .......................................................................................................................................................... 277
9.16.26.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 277
9.16.26.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 277
9.16.26.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 278
9.16.26.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 278
9.16.27 Medeco Original 60 .......................................................................................................................................................... 278
9.16.27.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 278
9.16.27.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 279
9.16.27.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 280
9.16.27.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 280
9.16.28 MLA Binary Plus .......................................................................................................................................................... 280
9.16.28.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 280
9.16.28.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 280
9.16.28.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 281
9.16.28.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 281
9.16.29 MLA DC1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 281
9.16.29.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 281
9.16.29.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 282
9.16.29.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 282
9.16.29.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 282

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 IX ProMaster Master Keying

9.16.30 Mottura Cham pions .......................................................................................................................................................... 283

9.16.30.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 283
9.16.30.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 283
9.16.30.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 283
9.16.30.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 283
9.16.30.5 Recognition codes.......................................................................................................................................................... 283
9.16.31 Sargent DG2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 284
9.16.31.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 284
9.16.31.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 284
9.16.31.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 284
9.16.31.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 285
9.16.32 Tokoz Pro .......................................................................................................................................................... 285
9.16.32.1 Product description
.......................................................................................................................................................... 285
9.16.32.2 System type setup.......................................................................................................................................................... 285
9.16.32.3 Creating and modifying
..........................................................................................................................................................
the system design 285
9.16.32.4 Coding .......................................................................................................................................................... 285

Part 10 Appendix 287

10.1 Diagnostic functions
................................................................................................................................... 288
10.1.1 Diagnose database connection
.......................................................................................................................................................... 288
10.1.2 Fixing internal num bering
.......................................................................................................................................................... 288
10.2 File formats...................................................................................................................................
used by ProMaster Master Keying 289
10.2.1 CSV file form at definition
.......................................................................................................................................................... 289
10.2.2 Global data file form ats
.......................................................................................................................................................... 290
10.2.2.1 Branch address import
..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 290
10.2.2.2 Client import (CSV)
..........................................................................................................................................................
file format 291
10.2.2.3 Cylinder import (CSV)
..........................................................................................................................................................
file format 292
10.2.2.4 Cylinder driver pin
..........................................................................................................................................................
import (CSV) file format 294
10.2.2.5 Cylinder picture import
..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 294
10.2.2.6 Cylinder sub assembly
..........................................................................................................................................................
import (CSV) file format 295
10.2.2.7 Cylinder sub assembly
..........................................................................................................................................................
picture import (CSV) file format 296
10.2.2.8 Cylinder sub assembly
..........................................................................................................................................................
video URL import (CSV) file format 296
10.2.2.9 Door hardw are type
..........................................................................................................................................................
import (CSV) file format 297
10.2.2.10 Door hardw are import
..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 297
10.2.2.11 Factory import (CSV)
..........................................................................................................................................................
file format 298
10.2.2.12 Key colour import..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 299
10.2.2.13 Keying type import ..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 300
10.2.2.14 Lockshop import ..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 301
10.2.2.15 Lock import (CSV) ..........................................................................................................................................................
file format 302
10.2.2.16 Lock cylinder import
..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 303
10.2.2.17 Lock picture import..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 303
10.2.3 System data file form..........................................................................................................................................................
ats 304
10.2.3.1 Door import (CSV)
..........................................................................................................................................................
file format 304
10.2.3.2 Door renaming import
..........................................................................................................................................................
(CSV) file format 305
10.2.3.3 Key import (CSV)..........................................................................................................................................................
file format 306
10.2.3.4 Keying import (CSV)
..........................................................................................................................................................
file format 307
10.3 Miscellaneous information
................................................................................................................................... 307
10.3.1 Excel tem plate definition
.......................................................................................................................................................... 308
10.3.2 Im age editor .......................................................................................................................................................... 308
10.3.3 Take photo .......................................................................................................................................................... 310
10.3.4 Preview ing reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 310
10.3.5 Sending reports by em
..........................................................................................................................................................
ail 310
10.3.6 Forgotten adm in passw
..........................................................................................................................................................
ord 311
10.3.7 Unlocking the console
.......................................................................................................................................................... 311
10.3.8 Data locks .......................................................................................................................................................... 311
10.3.9 Custom reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 311
10.3.10 Keyline m achine search
.......................................................................................................................................................... 313

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Contents X

10.3.11 Keyline m achine disgnostics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 314

Part 11 Version numbers 315

Part 12 Summary of changes in updates 321

© 2019 WH Software Limited

About

Part

1
 2 ProMaster Master Keying

1 About
Welcome to ProMaster Master Keying version 8 and thank you for choosing ProMaster Master Keying.
ProMaster Master Keying is a master-keying design and maintenance program for professionals. With this
comprehensive instructional documentation, you will find creating your master-key systems a quick and simple
task.
We are confident you will find it an easy and enjoyable program to use. Any suggestions/comments for
improvements in future versions are welcome, and may be addressed via email to [email protected]

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Copyright notice

Part

2
 4 ProMaster Master Keying

2 Copyright notice
Copyright © 2019 WH Software Limited
All rights reserved.
Licensed material - program property of WH Software Limited. Law strictly prohibits unauthorised use,
duplication or distribution.
ProMaster Master Keying™ is a trademark of WH Software Limited.
Disclaimer
WH Software Limited provides this software and accompanying user guide ("publication"), as is, without
warranties, express, implied or statutory. This is in respect to its contents and includes, without limitations,
any implied warranties of application for a particular purpose, all of which are expressly disclaimed. Neither
WH Software Limited, nor any of its agents, consultants, distributors or dealers shall in any event be liable for
any indirect, incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of this publication. WH Software
Limited may make improvements and/or changes in the product or program, as described in this user guide,
at any time and without notice.
Although WH Software Limited has used its best efforts to eliminate inaccuracies from this user guide, it could
contain technical inaccuracies and typographical errors. Changes made from time to time to the information
contained in this user guide will be incorporated in later editions of this user guide.
Product manufacturers do not authorise the information contained in ProMaster Master Keying. Manufacturer
names are used for identification purposes only.
License
Full license agreement: The ProMaster Master Keying installation program includes the full license
agreement, which you must read and agree to in order to continue the installation. After installation,
the license agreement may be read by clicking the menu Help then License on the main application
window.

WH Software Limited
P.O. Box 300-655
Albany
Auckland 0752
New Zealand

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Contacting WH Software Limited

Part

3
 6 ProMaster Master Keying

3 Contacting WH Software Limited

Mailing address: WH Software Limited

P.O. Box 300-655
Albany
Auckland 0752
New Zealand
Website: WH Software Limited maintains an Internet site on the worldwide web.
The URL of this site is: http://www.whsoftware.com
This site has product information and product updates for download.
As with any Internet site, it changes frequently, so visit it often.
Email: For sales and pre-sales related questions send email to [email protected]
For technical questions send email to [email protected]

© 2019 WH Software Limited

New installation, just installed - what to do next

Part

4
 8 ProMaster Master Keying

4 New installation, just installed - what to do next

If you have just installed ProMaster Master Keying and you have not upgraded from a previous version
(e.g. version 4, 5, 7) this is the topic that tells you what to configure next.
1. Log in as admin. You will know the password, you created it during the installation process.
2. Enter your registration information.
3. Enter your company details. See Company information 49 .

4. Create at least 1 user. See Users 44 .

5. Log out and log in as the user you created in step 4.

6. Perform the product activation. See Activating ProMaster Master Keying 32 .

7. Create your key sections and keyways. See Key sections and keyways 91 .

8. If you are using a system that requires manufacturer lists, import them. See Lists 93 .

9. Create your system types. See System types 87 .

10. Enter or import locks. See Locks and cylinders 57 .

That is the minimum required to get up and running. It is strongly recommended that you spend some time
reading the help to learn about other tasks.

4.1 Upgrade installation, just installed - what to do next

If you have just installed ProMaster Master Keying and you did upgraded from a previous version (e.g.
version 4, 5, 7) this is the topic that tells you what to configure next.
1. Log in as admin. You will know the password, you created it during the installation process.
2. Enter your registration information.
3. Go to users and security groups and get that stuff configured as you want. Many tasks previously
performed by the admin user are now performed by normal users who must be assigned the appropriate
permissions. See Users 44 and Security groups 45.
4. Log out and log in as a normal user.
5. Perform the product activation. See Activating ProMaster Master Keying 32 .

6. Visit ALL your key sections and keyways and for each one, in each design module, open it, fix anything that
is missing and save it. Largely the upgrade process does whit can to make the data right but there is some
old data that users have not entered correctly and if you have any such data you must fix it. See Key
sections and keyways 91 .
7. Check your system types and add any missing information. See System types 87 .

8. Read the log file that was created by the upgrade, and fix the errors that it has found in your data (e.g.
Key colours, locks, signatories)
The log file is C:\Users\<WindowsUserName>\AppData\Local\WH Software\PM8\Log\PM8DBCfg.log
That is the minimum required to get up and running.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Introduction

Part

5
 10 ProMaster Master Keying

5 Introduction

5.1 Using this guide

This user guide covers the use of ProMaster Master Keying.
This guide is for anyone who installs, uses or administers ProMaster Master Keying.
Assumptions

The assumption is made that:

· All computers involved meet the system requirements

· The installer and users are familiar with and confident using Microsoft Windows

· The installer has administrator access on the computers where the installation is to be performed

· The users understand master keying concepts. This guide teaches you about the software, but does not
train you in the principles of master-keying, the characteristics of various lock systems or good master-
keying practice.

5.2 Understanding concepts

This topic is a reference for a number of concepts and terminologies used in ProMaster Master Keying,
gathered into one place for reference. References are made to the topics that relate to each item here.
Concepts related to installation
Server computer
The server computer is where everything is installed. The parts needed by the server, the parts needed by
the client, and the database.

If you are operating on a single computer then your computer plays the roll of the server and client.
See System requirements 24 for hardware requirements.
Database
The database is the most important file used by ProMaster Master Keying. In fact there are 2 database files.
Generally they are called PM8.fdb and PM8DocStor.fdb.
If you lost everything, but still had these two files then you are in a happy place. Ok, you may need some help
reinstalling and reconfiguring ProMaster Master Keying, but that is all easy stuff.
In the topic Backing up your data 40 we give plenty of advice about backing up. Please take this seriously.
Client computer
If you are in multi-computer environment, one computer (Hopefully one with good quality hardware, UPS,
backup solutions and fast SSD storage) is the server (see above).
Every computer where a user sits to operate ProMaster Master Keying is a client computer or workstation.
See System requirements 24 for hardware requirements, and Architecture overview 24 for more about the
architecture.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Introduction 11

Concepts related to administration and configuration

Design module

ProMaster Master Keying supports a wide range of locking products. These are supported through the
technical part of ProMaster Master Keying called design modules. Each design module supports one or more
locking products and implements the rules accordingly.
See Design module overview 18 for a high level overview of the design modules.
System type

System types define a set of rules. At their core they define the design module, but there are numerous other
settings that are very important also.
Each system you create for your clients belongs to a system type, and that defines the design module, lock
system (if the design module gives a choice), key cutting data (again, if the design module gives a choice).
So what about the question "Why do I need more than 1 system type for a design module?". If you use a
product where the design module defines all the rules, which is more common for high end locking products,
then the answer may be that for that design you need only one system type. Now consider if the system type
is for inline keys - you need at least one design module per depth and space card. Additional system types for
a single set of parameters are also useful for segmenting your systems by market.
See System types 87 .

Key colours
Key colours are the coloured bits on the head of the key. Most design module offer a range of colours (they
are under your control) and the colours are assigned to keys when the coding is performed.
See Key colours 89 .

Key sections and keyways

Key section is the shape of the grooves on the key.
Keyway is the shape of the grooves in the cylinder.
A few design modules do not need key sections and keyways (e.g. Kaba Expert Plus). The lock products
implemented by some design modules need a single key section and keyway in each key section family (E.g.
Abloy Novel). Others need families of key sections and keyways defined (E.g. Inline, Interchangeable core).
This is all under your control and should be created accurately from the information provided by your lock
supplier.
See Key sections and keyways 91 .

Lists
Lists are a mechanism to control the quality of systems by controlling the TMK. Several design modules use
lists, and if you are a user of one of those design modules you will receive your list data from the
manufacturer.
93
See Lists .
Keying types
Keying types are a value attached to each system. Their largest non-technical function is simply an annotation
on the structure of the system. The most important technical function provided by the keying type is to specify
if the system is construction keyed or not.
See Keying types 53 .

Factories

© 2019 WH Software Limited

12 ProMaster Master Keying

Factory is a fancy word for "Where you make the stuff". If you have multiple manufacturing locations, then
having a factory for each allows you to work-flow your jobs.

See Factories 55 .

Locks and cylinders

Cylinders are the lockable product into which the key is inserted.
Locks are the hardware that mounts on a door and holds 1 or 2 cylinders. Locks are configured to make the
association between lock, cylinder and system type.

A door has either 1 lock or 1 cylinder associated with it.

Many users are not interested in locks and will use only cylinders.
See Locks and cylinders 57

Hardware
Hardware refers to additional door hardware that may be recorded. It has nothing to do with the lock or
cylinder and is simply a way of recording other items on the door.
See Hardware 73

Users
Users are created in ProMaster Master Keying to control security and record who performed particular tasks
such as creating jobs.
Everyone who uses ProMaster Master Keying must be configured as a user. You may create as many users
as you want, but the total number of users who may be using ProMaster Master Keying concurrently is
controlled by the license.
See Users 44 , Security groups 45

Concepts related to building master keys systems

Client
The client is the owner of the system. Each system has one client. A client may have many systems.
Sometimes the client and system are essentially the same, while in larger environments the client is a
company, university or government department that has many systems.
100
See Clients
System
The system is the wrapper around keys, doors, signatories, coding and jobs.
Each system belongs to a client, and implements a single lock system defined by the associated system type.
102
See Systems
Signatory
Each system may have signatories defined and those signatories are then used on jobs to record who
authorised the order. The way signatories are checked depends on the level of signatory security defined by
the system.
115
See Signatories
Key
Keys are keys. Each key has a key number which uniquely defines it. Each key is assigned to operate doors.
Each key may be ordered on jobs. When a key is ordered on a job those "instances" of the key are called key
issues.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Introduction 13

123
See Keys
Key issues

Keys are entered and given a key number and assigned to doors. Then the keys are coded (the process of
assigning the technical data to them). When you want to manufacture the key, a job is created, and the job is
for 1 or more copies of the key. Each copy is numbered sequentially. Those copies of the key that you
manufacture are called key issues.
Door
Doors are doors most of the time. A door may represent a real physical door, or it may be a "virtual" door
representing a locking product such as a padlock.
Each door has an associated locking product (lock or cylinder) and is assigned to operate by 1 or more keys.
Normally you would order only 1 of each door, but in the case where a door represents a padlock it is likely to
be ordered multiple times.
132
See Doors
Keying
Keying is the relationship between keys and doors. Keying can be seen and altered from the point of view of
a door, or from the point of view of a key, or globally in the keying matrix.
145
See Keying matrix
Coding
Coding is the process where the technical design for the keys is created and the key codes are assigned to
each key.
The assignment of key codes to keys results in the technical construction of the lock product being calculated,
and that door lock assembly is referred to "door pinning" or simply "pinning".
171
See Coding
Jobs
The job is where you record the keys and doors that are required to be manufactured. The job represents a
unit of work on the system for the client. Once a job is entered and coding is complete, the job is
manufactured.
196
See Jobs
Job manufacturing
Job manufacturing is the process of taking the job, on which keys and lock product are ordered, and turning it
into physical product. Manufacturing produces all the necessary paperwork, labels, sends data to key cutting
machines, sends data to marking machines etc.
205
See Job manufacturing
Concepts related to terminology
System number
The system number is the system identifier. Sometimes the system number is dictated by lock
manufacturers, other times it is under your control. The system number is a unique value in your database.
Key number
The key number is the key identifier. The key number is unique within each system.
Door number

© 2019 WH Software Limited

14 ProMaster Master Keying

The door number is the door identifier. The door number is unique within each system.
Door stamping

The door stamping is the information that is marked on the cylinder. Some people create stamping the same
as the door number. Others create the stamping sequentially (1, 2, 3...). Others, and particularly using DHI
numbering, create the stamping as the key number of the lowest level key that operates the door.
TMK
TMK is the Top Master Key for the system. It is the main key code from which all other key codes are derived.

Rules
Rules are the parameters that govern the key codes permitted when coding the system. When you start
coding a system, the default values for the rules are copied from the system type associated with the system,
and from there you may adjust the values if required.
SOP
SOP, or sequence of progression, is the order that positions on the TMK are progressed to create other key
codes. It is used primarily when using the coding matrix.
Designation
Designation is the purpose that each chamber in the lock will be used for. The designation is used to build the
data for the coding tree. Examples of designation are "grand master key", "master key' and "change key".
Depth step
Depth step is the distance between derived codes in any position on the key. Some lock systems allow a
depth step of 1, where others have a minimum depth step of 2 or more.
Code progression
A code progression is the rule that takes the TMK, and defines a SOP, designation, depth step (and some
other values depending on the design module) to generate a tree or matrix of codes.
Standard progression
One of 2 types of code progression, this is the simple type that used depths steps and generates all possible
codes in any specified positions on the key.
Custom progression
A custom progression differs from a standard progression in that you specify the depth values to be used for
each position on the key. This is more complex but opens the door to more flexible coding for complex
systems.
Coding tree
One of 3 ways of coding systems, this is where the code progression is present as a tree of codes. The
coding tree is where codes are assigned and door pinning is calculated.
Coding matrix
The second of 3 ways of coding systems, this is where the code progression is present as a matrix of codes.
The coding matrix is where codes are assigned and door pinning is calculated.
Coding grid
The last of 3 ways of coding systems applies to Kaba dimple systems and this is where the coding is
performed according to the Kaba grid style progression. A code progression is not used by the coding grid.
The coding grid is where codes are assigned and door pinning is calculated.
Key code

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Introduction 15

This is the value for the cuts that are assigned to the key.
Pinning

This is the calculated assembly for door locking product.

5.3 Product editions

There are 3 editions of ProMaster Master Keying available. The features available in each product vary, but at
their core they are substantially similar. All editions use the same architecture.
ProMaster Master Keying Basic

This edition is single user only, and a limited range of design modules are supported. It is ideal for users who
need comprehensive master keying capabilities for inline key products and do not need more than one user.
ProMaster Master Keying Premium
This is the main-steam product edition. Any number of concurrent user licenses may be purchased and
almost all design modules are available.
ProMaster Master Keying Manufacturer
This product edition has additional features for manufacturers. Customers requiring bespoke feature
development must be using this product edition as any such feature is not added to the other editions.
Any number of concurrent user licenses may be purchased and all design modules are available.
Support options for this edition are more comprehensive.
Design modules by edition
This table shows the design modules that may be licensed for each edition. See Design module overview 18

for a description of each design module.

Design module Basic edition Premium edition Manufacturer edition

Abloy Disklock/Novel - Yes Yes
Abloy Protec 1/2 - Yes Yes
Abloy Standard/Exec/Sentry - Yes Yes
ABUS XY14 - Yes Yes
ALC Bilock - Yes Yes
ALC Galaxy - Yes Yes
Assa Abloy Key Ultra - Yes Yes
Assa Abloy Perk - Yes Yes
Assa Abloy Union - Yes Yes
Assa USA - Yes Yes
Chubb Detainer - - Yes
EVVA 3KS/4KS - Yes Yes
EVVA DPE/DPS/EPS - Yes Yes
Inline Yes Yes Yes
Interchangeable Core Yes Yes Yes
Kaba ACE - - Yes
Kaba experT - Yes Yes

© 2019 WH Software Limited

16 ProMaster Master Keying

Kaba experT Plus - Yes Yes

Kaba Gemini - Yes Yes
Kaba Quattro - Yes Yes
Lockwood MT5/MT5+ - Yes Yes
Lockwood Twin Yes Yes Yes
Medeco Biaxial 10 - Yes Yes
Medeco Biaxial 60 - Yes Yes
Medeco Original 10 - Yes Yes
Medeco Original 60 - Yes Yes
MLA Binary Plus Yes Yes Yes
MLA DC1 Yes Yes Yes
Mottura Champions - - Yes
Sargent DG2 - Yes Yes
Tokoz Pro - Yes Yes

Machine support by edition

This table shows the manufacturing machines that are available in each edition. See Design module
overview 18 for information on machines supported by each design module.
Key marking

Machine Basic edition Premium edition Manufacturer edition

Gravograph Yes Yes Yes
Ilco Engrave-It Pro Yes Yes Yes
JMA Multi-Mark Yes Yes Yes
Silca Marker 2000 Yes Yes Yes
Generic key marker - Yes Yes

Cylinder marking

Machine Basic edition Premium edition Manufacturer edition

Gravograph Yes Yes Yes
Ilco Engrave-It Pro Yes Yes Yes
Silca Marker 2000 Yes Yes Yes
Generic cylinder marker - - Yes

Key cutting

Machine Basic edition Premium edition Manufacturer edition

Abloy LT106 - Yes Yes
Abloy LT120 - Yes Yes
ALC Galaxy - Yes Yes
CYA - - Yes
HPC Codemax Yes Yes Yes
Ilco EZ Code Yes Yes Yes
ITL 9000 Yes Yes Yes
Kaba CNC - - Yes

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Introduction 17

Keyline Dezmo Yes Yes Yes

Keyline Ninja Yes Yes Yes
Keyline Ninja Laser Yes Yes Yes
Keyline Ninja Total Yes Yes Yes
Keyline Ninja Vortex - Yes Yes
Keyline Sigma Pro - Yes Yes
Keyline Versa - Yes Yes
Maromatic - - Yes
Miracle Yes Yes Yes
Mul-T-Lock KC5 - Yes Yes
Orion ECM200 Yes Yes Yes
Orion Luna - Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode V1 Yes Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode V2 Yes Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode 199 Yes Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode 299 Yes Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode 399 Yes Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode 399 Evo Yes Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode 399 Plus Yes Yes Yes
Silca UnoCode Pro Yes Yes Yes
Silca UltraCode Yes Yes Yes
Silca Triax e-Code - Yes Yes
Silca Triax Quattro - Yes Yes
Silca Triax Pro - Yes Yes
Silca Futura Yes Yes Yes
Silca QuattroCode - Yes Yes
Silca Protech - Yes Yes

Cylinder manufacturing

Machine Basic edition Premium edition Manufacturer edition

ALC Galaxy - Yes Yes

Features by edition
This table is a brief overview of feature availability that differs between editions. Some features are licensed
separately.

Feature Basic edition Premium edition Manufacturer edition

Export to ProMaster Master Yes Yes Yes
Keying 8
Import from to ProMaster Yes Yes Yes
Master Keying 8
Export to ProMaster Master - Yes, provided system is Yes, provided system is
Keying 7 PM7 compatible PM7 compatible
Import from to ProMaster Yes Yes Yes
Master Keying 7

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 18 ProMaster Master Keying

End user report designer - Yes Yes

*separately licensed
End user label designer Yes Yes Yes
Optimised test keys - Yes Yes
*separately licensed
Key issue blind stamping - Yes Yes
*separately licensed
Manufacturer specific features - - Yes
*separately licensed
XML manufacturing exports - Yes Yes
System type manufacturing - - Yes
integration parameters
Job "coding" status available - Yes Yes

5.4 Design module overview

This section gives an overview of each design module including lock system supported, authorisation
requirements for purchased and key cutting machines supported.
Machines are expected to have the latest on-board software from the machine manufacturer. Capabilities on
some machines for some design modules may require authorisation from the machine manufacturer and this
must be facilitated by the lock manufacturer and machine manufacturer.
No representation is made about the suitability of each machine for cutting any particular type of key.
No representation is made about the performance or duty cycle or suitability of any machine for
manufacturing master key systems.

Brief design module descriptions

Design module: Abloy Disklock/Novel

Description Abloy Disklock Pro and Novel, various key lengths/discs

Lock systems Abloy Disklock Pro, Abloy Novel
Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase. Novel lock system requires main
permutation list from lock manufacturer.
Key cutting machines Abloy LT106, Abloy LT120, Keyline Sigma Pro, Silca UnoCode 399, 399 Evo, 399
Plus, Pro, Silca Protech

Design module: Abloy Protec 1/2

Description Abloy Protec 1 and 2, various key lengths/discs

Lock systems Abloy Protec 1 and Abloy Protec 2
Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase. Requires main permutation list
from lock manufacturer.
Key cutting machines Abloy LT106, Abloy LT120, Keyline Sigma Pro, Silca UnoCode 399, 399 Evo, 399
Plus, Pro, Silca Protech

Design module: Abloy Standard/Exec/Sentry

Description Abloy Classic, Profile, Exec, Sentry, various key lengths/discs

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Introduction 19

Lock systems Abloy Classic, Profile, Exec Left/Right, Sentry Left/Right

Key cutting machines Abloy LT106, Silca Protech (on lock systems supported by the machine)

Design module: ABUS XY14

Description ABUS XY14

Lock systems XY14, X14, Y14. Mixed systems.
Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Versa, Silca UnoCode 299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro,
Silca Protech

Design module: ALC Bilock

Description Australian Lock Company Bilock

Lock systems Bilock, Bilock Exclusive.
Key cutting machines Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Protech

Design module: ALC Galaxy

Description Australian Lock Company Galaxy

Lock systems Galaxy Platinum
Key cutting machines Galaxy (keys and code bars)

Design module: Assa Abloy KeyUltra

Description Assa Abloy UK Key Ultra

Key cutting machines Silca UnoCode 299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro

Design module: Assa Abloy Perk

Description Assa Abloy UK Perk (also available under other names)

Key cutting machines -

Design module: Assa Abloy Union

Description Assa Abloy UK Union extension (dimple cut inside flat cut)
Key cutting machines Silca UnoCode 299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Triax eCode, Triax Quattro,
Triax Pro

Design module: Assa USA

Description ASSA USA locking products

Lock systems Conventional, ASSA LFIC, ASSA Yale LFIC, ASSA Corbin Russwin LFIC, ASSA
Sargent LFIC, ASSA Schlage LFIC, ASSA CAM, ASSA SFIC, Cliq
Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Ninja, Ninja Laser, Ninja Total, Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 199,
299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Futura, Silca Protech, HPC CodeMax, ITL.

Design module: Chubb Detainer

Description Assa Abloy UK Chubb Detainer

Lock systems Chubb 3G110 Original and new
Key cutting machines -

Design module: EVVA 3KS/4KS

© 2019 WH Software Limited

20 ProMaster Master Keying

Description EVVA 3KS/4KS

Lock systems EVVA 3KS, 3KS+, 4KS
Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase.
Key cutting machines Keyline Versa, Ninja Vortex, Ninja Total, Silca Triax eCode, Triax Quattro, Triax
Pro, Silca Protech
Note: 4KS not available on Silca Triax eCode

Design module: EVVA DPE/DPS/EPS

Description EVVA DPE

Lock systems EVVA DPS (Australia), EPS (Australia)
Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase.
Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Ninja, Ninja Laser, Ninja Total, Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 199,
299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Futura, Silca Protech, HPC CodeMax, Orion
ECM200, Ilco EZCode, Maromatic

Design module: Inline

Description Inline keys from 4 to 7 cuts

Lock systems Standard, Assa Abloy UK B8/B10, Assa Abloy UK Union CounterR, Assa Abloy UK
CLCS, Assa Abloy Australia Gen6T
Various depth and space cards supported - enquire for more details.
Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Ninja, Ninja Laser, Ninja Total, Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 199,
299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Futura, Silca Protech, HPC CodeMax, Orion
ECM200, Ilco EZCode, Maromatic, ITL, Miracle, CYA. Some machines depend on
on-board data and therefore not all cards are supported on all machines.

Design module: Interchangeable Core

Description Various North American interchangeable core systems

Lock systems Best A2, Best A3, Best A4, Ilco2610, Sargent 6300, Corbin Ruswin System 70,
Sargent DG1, Schlage long key, Yale long key, Kwikset, Kaba Peaks 140 A2, Kaba
Peaks 140 A4, Kaba Peaks 150 A2, Kaba Peaks 150 A4
Various depth and space cards supported - enquire for more details.
Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Ninja, Ninja Laser, Ninja Total, Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 199,
299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Futura, Silca Protech, HPC CodeMax, Orion
ECM200, Ilco EZCode, Maromatic, ITL, Miracle. Some machines depend on on-
board data and therefore not all cards are supported on all machines.

Design module: Kaba ACE

Description Kaba ACE

Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase.
Key cutting machines Silca Protech

Design module: Kaba experT

Description Kaba Expert

Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase.
Key cutting machines Keyline Versa, Keyline Ninja Vortex, Ninja Total, Silca Triax eCode, Triax Quattro,
Triax Pro, Silca QuattroCode, Silca Protech, Kaba CNC, Orion Luna

Design module: Kaba experT Plus

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Introduction 21

Description Kaba Expert Plus

Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase. Requires main permutation list
from lock manufacturer.
Key cutting machines Keyline Versa, Keyline Ninja Vortex, Ninja Total, Silca Triax eCode, Triax Quattro,
Triax Pro, Silca QuattroCode, Silca Protech, Kaba CNC

Design module: Kaba Gemini

Description Kaba Gemini (Australia)

Key cutting machines Keyline Versa, Keyline Ninja Vortex, Ninja Total, Silca Triax eCode, Triax Quattro,
Triax Pro, Silca QuattroCode, Silca Protech, Kaba CNC

Design module: Kaba Quattro

Description Kaba Quattro (Australia)

Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase.
Key cutting machines Keyline Versa, Keyline Ninja Vortex, Ninja Total, Silca Triax eCode, Triax Quattro,
Triax Pro, Silca QuattroCode, Silca Protech, Kaba CNC, Orion Luna

Design module: Lockwood MT5/MT5+

Description Lockwood MT5

Lock systems MT5, MT5+, mixed systems
Authorisation Manufacturer authorisation required for purchase. Requires main permutation list
from lock manufacturer.
Key cutting machines Keyline Versa, Keyline Ninja Vortex, Ninja Total, Silca Triax eCode, Triax Quattro,
Triax Pro, Silca QuattroCode (MT5 only), Silca Protech, Mul-T-Lock KC5

Design module: Lockwood Twin

Description Lockwood Twin

Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Ninja, Ninja Laser, Ninja Total, Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 199,
299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Futura, Silca Protech, HPC CodeMax, Orion
ECM200, Ilco EZCode, Maromatic, ITL

Design module: Medeco Biaxial 10

Description Medeco Biaxial 10 series architectural locks

Lock systems Standard, M3, M4
Key cutting machines ITL, CodeMax

Design module: Medeco Biaxial 60

Description Medeco Biaxial 60 series cam locks

Key cutting machines ITL, CodeMax

Design module: Medeco Original 10

Description Medeco Original 10 series architectural locks

Key cutting machines ITL, CodeMax

Design module: Medeco Original 60

Description Medeco Original 60 series cam locks

© 2019 WH Software Limited

22 ProMaster Master Keying

Key cutting machines ITL, CodeMax

Design module: MLA Binary Plus

Description MLA Binary Plus

Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Ninja, Ninja Laser, Ninja Total, Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 199,
299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Futura, Silca Protech, HPC CodeMax, Orion
ECM200, Ilco EZCode, Maromatic, ITL, Miracle

Design module: Mottura Champions

Description Mottura Champions

Lock systems C10, C28, C9, C30, C31, C38, C39, C43, C49, CM7, CP3, CP4, CP8
Key cutting machines -

Design module: MLA DC1

Description MLA DC1

Key cutting machines Keyline Dezmo, Keyline Ninja, Ninja Laser, Ninja Total, Silca UnoCode V1, V2, 199,
299, 399, 399 Evo, 399 Plus, Pro, Silca Futura, Silca Protech, HPC CodeMax, Orion
ECM200, Ilco EZCode, Maromatic, ITL, Miracle

Design module: Sargent DG2

Description Sargent DG2/DG3

Key cutting machines ITL, CodeMax

Design module: Tokoz Pro

Description Tokoz Pro

Lock systems Tokoz Pro
Key cutting machines -

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Installing

Part

6
 24 ProMaster Master Keying

6 Installing
This section describes the architecture of ProMaster Master Keying, and the installation options available. It
describes the installation process and components that are installed onto your computer.

6.1 Architecture overview

ProMaster Master Keying is a client-server application, with the back-end using a Firebird database and the
Firebird database engine. Communication between the client processes and the server are performed using
TCP/IP.
One machine is designated as the server, and this machine hosts the database and the Firebird database
engine. All clients (both other computers running ProMaster Master Keying and also ProMaster Master Keying
running on the server) communicate with the Firebird database engine via the TCP/IP networking protocol.
No direct communication with the database file is performed, so client machines do not need (and should not
have) physical file access to the database.
The server must always be available so that the workstations are able to access your ProMaster Master
Keying database. The server must be protected from unplanned restarts and power outages.
You should install ProMaster Master Keying on the server before you install ProMaster Master Keying on the
workstations.
The ProMaster Master Keying program communicates with its processes running on your server on TCP port
30636 and TCP port 30637
A common installation mistake is to assume that for ProMaster Master Keying to operate, the database
on the server must be made accessible to the client machines by using a Windows Share. This is not
correct. Do not create a Windows Share to make the database file accessible to the client
machines. All communication is performed using the TCP/IP networking protocol to the Firebird
database engine. The Firebird database engine, which resides on the server where the database is
located performs all file operations on the database.

6.2 System requirements

ProMaster Master Keying hardware requirements
The product is installed on a single network server (which may for small installations be used also as a
workstation) and a portion of the product can be installed on workstation computers for each user. All parts
of the program and also the program database are located on the network server, and a portion of the
program is located on each workstation.
The minimum server computer hardware requirements are:

Requirement Minimum Preferred minimum

Windows version Windows 7 Windows 2012/2012 R2
Windows 8/8.1 Windows 2016
Windows 10 Windows 2019
Windows 2012/2012 R2 Servers should use a server operating
Windows 2016 system
Windows 2019
CPU Core i5, 2 cores minimum Core i7 or XEON
RAM (available) 4GB
Hard disk drive space 4GB According to the size of your database and
sufficient space to leave 14 days backup on

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Installing 25

the server. For large database you will

need more space to maintain a healthy
database and also to store backups.

For large organisations this may be 200 GB

or more.
Mouse or other pointing device
Display 1680 x 1050
24 bit colour

The minimum workstation computer hardware requirements are:

Requirement Minimum Preferred minimum

Windows version Windows 7 Windows 10
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 10
CPU Core i5, 2 cores minimum Core i7
RAM (available) 2GB 4GB
Hard disk drive space 400MB
Mouse or other pointing device
Display 1680 x 1050 1920 x 1200
24 bit colour 32 bit colour
2 monitors is good for complex coding.
Printer Windows supported printer
is required for reports
Label printer Windows supported printer
label printer with a minimum
100mm label width is
required for labels

On versions of Windows prior to Windows 10, to achieve correct presentation you must use 100% font
size in your display settings. On Windows 10 the font size may be set larger (125% or 150% for
example) and ProMaster Master Keying will display correctly. On Windows 10 you may benefit from
changing the compatibility settings for "High DPI scaling override" to "System (Enhanced)".
Notes about hardware requirements
· Ensure the most recent service pack for your operating system is installed.

· System requirements are minimum requirements and good performance depends on ensuring your
hardware and networking reflect your usage style and resources required by other running applications.
Networking protocol requirements
ProMaster Master Keying requires that the TCP/IP networking protocol be installed and functioning correctly.
Normally this is done as part of installing Windows. If you do not have TCP/IP installed and correctly
configured then you should install it before proceeding with the installation. See your Windows
documentation or systems support person for help installing TCP/IP.
If you are on a PC without a network connection (i.e. No LAN and no WIFI) then you will need to
ensure that TCP/IP is available despite not having a network connection. This is because the database
connection uses TCP/IP.

On Windows 10, this is how you install a loop-back adaptor, however you must seek professional
advice before making any such change as it is not something that WH Software Limited can help you
with.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 26 ProMaster Master Keying

(a) Run "Device Manager"

(b) Select the computer node at the top
(c) From the "Action" menu choose "Add legacy hardware"
(d) Click Next
(e) Choose "Install the hardware that I manually select", Click Next
(f) Choose “Network adaptors”, Click Next
(g) On the left list, choose "Microsoft"
(h) On the right list, choose "Microsoft KM-Test Loopback Adaptor", Click Next, Next, Finish
Firewall software

Firewall software is increasingly popular to help protect from malicious computer attacks. If you are running
any type of firewall software you must ensure that it allows ProMaster Master Keying to communicate on
TCP port 30636 and port 30637.

If ProMaster Master Keying is unable to communicate with its database (on the network server), try disabling
your firewall software to identify the source of the problem.

6.3 Installing
Before you begin
· Make sure your computer meet the minimum requirements

· Make sure you have your ProMaster Master Keying registration information

· Make sure you understand what type of installation you want to perform

· Make sure you have administrator or equivalent access to each computer

When installing ProMaster Master Keying, always install the server first.
Starting ProMaster Master Keying setup

· Start your computer and log in.

· Run the setup program PM8Setup.exe

· Follow the instructions that appear.

Upgrading from ProMaster Master Keying 7, 5, 4

During the setup you are asked if you are performing a new installation or if you are upgrading from
ProMaster Master Keying 7, 5 or 4.
Later in the installation, the ProMaster Master Keying Database Creator is launched.
For an upgrade it requires you to select the database file(s) from your previous version that will be upgraded.
The old database files are not modified. If you select a database, it is copied before it is read. If you select a
database upgrade, it is restored to a temporary file before it is read. After a temporary copy of the database
file to upgrade is made, that temporary copy may be modified, then the data is read from it and pumped into
a new ProMaster Master Keying database. On completion the temporary files are removed.
Make sure you are not running tight on disk space - this needs about 3 times more space than that
used by the old database(s).
Be aware that the upgrade process will take a long time for large database so plan around this.
New data, new user permissions
After the upgrade has completed, read the log and make a note of everything that needs to be fixed. There
will be some changes that you must make yourself. These are not difficult but must be done.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Installing 27

· User permissions are created on groups, not individual users. The best way is to not create security groups
for each user (this is a choice during the upgrade) but to do it yourself after upgrade. Regardless of your
choice, there are many new permissions in PM8 that do not map to permissions in previous versions
because tasks previously performed by the "admin" user are now performed by users according to their
permissions.
· Depending on the design module, and the age of the key section in the old database, you may need to visit
all key section families and verify that they are not missing information. Typically this needs attention when
there were old tree-style key section families.
· Renamed colours, locks etc. Older versions would allow data that is not permitted in version 8. For
example, you may have "Red" and "RED". During the import these will become "Red" and RED_1" and
logged in the results. This is because such fields are now "case insensitive, accent insensitive, unique".
The bad data needs to be merged fixed (according to the type of data), so for example with RED_1 you
would right click on it, choose to replace it with another colour and then pick "Red". Do these changes
carefully so you don't stuff up all your systems. Other data may get renamed in the same manner because
it contains leading or trailing spaces which are now removed.
Upgrading from ProMaster Master Keying 3, 2
There is no automatic process to upgrade from ProMaster Master Keying 3 or 2.
This is a lengthy multi-step process and requires assistance from WH Software Limited.

6.4 File locations

The folder locations used by ProMaster Master Keying depend on a number of factors including:
· The type of installation that you performed.

· Any choices you made to change the default installation locations.

· The Windows operating system (32 bit or 64 bit) that you are running.

This topic describes the default locations.

For purposes of this illustration the following assumptions are made:
· The standard Windows locations are being used and that you are running an English language version of
Windows.
· The login name of our user in this example is joebloggs.

For information on the files installed to each location see the topic Description Of Files Installed.

Purpose of location Installation types Folder location

Main location of application All C:\Program Files (x86)\WH Software\PM8 (and various
sub folders)
Shared settings, settings All C:\ProgramData\WH Software\PM8
used by background
processes, logs created by
system and background
processes
User specific settings, user All C:\Users\joebloggs\AppData\Local\WH Software\PM8
data cache, logs created by
user processes, user
dictionaries
Database Server C:\ProgramData\WH Software\PM8\Data
Database engine Server C:\Program Files (x86)\WH Software\PM8\FB3

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 28 ProMaster Master Keying

Database client connectivity Workstation C:\Program Files (x86)\WH Software\PM8\FB3

6.5 Description of files

During the installation process, various files are installed on your computer. The following explanation
describes the most important files and in doing so assumes that the default locations were used during the
installation. See the topic File locations 27 for an overview of folder locations and differences between folder
location on various versions of Windows.

Location: C:\Program Files (x86)\WH Software\PM8\Bin

File Description
PM8.exe The main application file for ProMaster Master Keying
PM8Back.exe Database backup program
PM8Upg.exe Application upgrade helper

Location C:\ProgramData\WH Software\PM8\Data

File Description
PM8.fdb ProMaster Master Keying database

Location: C:\ProgramData\WH Software\PM8

File Description Notes

PM8.ini Application settings shared by all users and This is where the database
application settings for background processes connections are configured. Other
(PM8Back) than configuring database
connections, there should be no need
to edit this file manually.
Log\PM8Back.log Log file created when a database backup is Server only.
run in "auto" mode.

Location: C:\Users\joebloggs\AppData\Local\WH Software\PM8

File Description Notes

PM8.ini Application settings specific to this user All settings are configurable in PM8 so
this file should not be edited
manually.
Log\PM8.log Log file created when this user performs a This operation should only be
database upgrade. performed on the server, so the only
place this file should be created is on
your server.
Log\PM8Back.log Log file created when this user runs a This operation should only be
database backup. performed on the central server, so
the only place this file should be
created is on your server.
Spell\Custom.adu Custom spelling settings
Spell\SuggestionLearn.
adl
Spell\Autocorrect.adl

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Installing 29

6.6 Licensing and product activation

License enforcement
ProMaster Master Keying maintains a record of the number of users connected. ProMaster Master Keying is
licensed on a per-user basis. If you are unable to log into ProMaster Master Keying because you are
attempting to use more connections than you have licenses, please contact your reseller to purchase
additional licenses.
Product activation

ProMaster Master Keying requires Product activation before it becomes fully functional. Product activation
is an anti-piracy technology designed to verify that the product has been legitimately licensed and thwart the
spread of software piracy.
Activation is completed either directly via the Internet or by a telephone call to a customer service
representative.
Activation on your server: Your ProMaster Master Keying installation is activated on and locked into your
server. The first user to log into ProMaster Master Keying other than the admin user must perform the
activation.
Activation can be achieved in one of the following ways:
· Over the internet direct to the WH Software Limited activation server

· Via your web browser to the ProMaster Master Keying web site activation page

· By telephone to your reseller or to a ProMaster Master Keying representative

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Getting started

Part

7
 32 ProMaster Master Keying

7 Getting started

7.1 Logging into ProMaster Master Keying

To perform any tasks in ProMaster Master Keying, you must first log in by providing your login name and
password. The environment option is available only for users who connect to more that one ProMaster
Master Keying installation (it is normal to have only one choice for the environment)

7.2 The administrator's first time

After installing ProMaster Master Keying, the first time you log in you must use the admin login.
The admin password is what you set it during installation.

The first thing you must enter is your ProMaster Master Keying registration information. This information is
provided by your ProMaster Master Keying reseller when you make your purchase. The details must be
entered exactly as they are shown on your registration sheet or the registration will not be accepted. It is
long and complex, so copy and paste it into ProMaster Master Keying rather than attempting to type it!
Proceed to configure ProMaster Master Keying by visiting these areas of the product:
· Company information 49

· Company logo for reports 50

· Application parameters 49

· Users 44

These are the "basics" for getting the product up and running. Other configurations are necessary for your
data.

7.3 A user's first time

The first user who logs into ProMaster Master Keying will be required to activate the product. See Activating
ProMaster Master Keying 32

See Setting your preferences 33 for help configuring ProMaster Master Keying to behave the way you work.
35
See Printer setup to decide where your reports will be sent.

7.4 Activating ProMaster Master Keying

If your computer is internet connected, always choose the option to perform the activation automatically as
this will allow you to perform the activation without waiting for assistance. If you are not internet connected,
choose the manual option and call WH Software Limited while you are in front of your computer.
If the automatic activation is successful, you will be able to use ProMaster Master Keying immediately.
For a manual activation, the WH Software Limited customer service representative will ask you for the
information presented by ProMaster Master Keying and on verification will read to you an activation code to
enter into ProMaster Master Keying.
The best option is to do the activation automatically. Manual (telephone) activation should be used only
when automatic activation is not available.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Getting started 33

7.5 Changing your password

If your user account is configured to integrate with Windows or Active Directory security then passwords are
not controlled by ProMaster Master Keying and this topic is not applicable to you.
At any time after logging in, the user may change their password.
Getting started
· You must be logged in.

· From the Setup and Admin menu, choose Change password.

Making a change

You must enter your old password then enter your new password twice.

7.6 Setting your preferences

Various characteristics ProMaster Master Keying of may be configured to the liking of the user.
Getting started
· You must be logged in.

· From the Setup and Admin menu, choose Preferences.

An explanation of the preferences

Display lock and cylinder images
Normally lock and cylinder images will be displayed. If you are operating on a slow network you may turn off
the display of images to improve performance.
Auto find
Various areas in ProMaster Master Keying allow you to search for information. When each of these search
windows is opened, whether or not all information is shown is controlled by each of the auto find options. On
some search windows, particularly those where only a few items are displayed, having auto find on is useful,
but when there are many items to be displayed, such as for doors, is is better to leave auto find off and
perform a search using criteria to identify the items you want to see.
Find warnings
On some areas in ProMaster Master Keying, a find without any search criteria to limit the number of items
returned may take some time and return so many items that is is not useful. On those search windows, you
are prompted to confirm that you intended to return all information. The warning message may be
suppressed by turning off the corresponding warning.
System info
When a system is open, ProMaster Master Keying shows a summary of the system. Through these options
you can control what information is shown.
Email
Three options are provided for how email messages will be sent.
Depending on what email application you are using and how it is configured you may determine that one
option is better than the others.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

34 ProMaster Master Keying

The MAPI option sends email using your windows default MAPI mail client. To use this you must have a mail
application must be installed correctly and configured as the MAPI client.

The Outlook option automates Outlook to send the email. You must have the 32bit version of Outlook
installed.
The SMTP option sends the mail message direct to a mail server and several settings are required - see
below.
Normally when Outlook is used, an add-in called "Outlook Security Manager" is used to make Outlook more
cooperative. You can disable use of the Outlook Security Manager if it is problematic.

Email - SMTP settings

You may need to check with your mail administrator for the settings, and as there is a variety of mail servers
in use, each with different characteristics, you may need to experiment a bit to get it right.

Option Description
SMTP server The name or IP address of your mail server.
Port The port on your mail server that receives the email.
SMTP login name If your mail server uses login based authentication, enter your mail login
name.
SMTP password If your mail server uses login based authentication, enter your mail login
password.
Encryption Choose if you use an unencrypted mail connection and how the
encryption works.
Sender's name The name of the person to appear as the sender.
Sender's email The email address of the person to appear as the sender. Some mail
servers require the sender email to be the same as the SMTP login name
if SMTP login name is used.
CC email to If you put an email address in this field, it will be added as a CC recipient
to each email message. This is useful for including yourself as a
recipient.
Read receipt email If you put an email address in this field, the email message will be
flagged as requesting a read receipt and using this email address (usually
your own) as the receipt recipient.
Send email as HTML instead of Chooses if the email message is delivered in HTML format or plain text.
plain text Unless you have issues sending HTML email, it is a better option.
Send test message Sends a test message using the current settings. Useful for testing
before saving.

Email - SMTP settings - notes about Office 365

If you are using Office 365 as your mail provider, you will need to have it configured to provide the SMTP
capability, and there are a number of settings you will need to get correct.
If you choose not to use encryption, Office 365 will need to be configured to use your external IP address as
an authorised sender. In this case, the port is likely to be 25. This is not the preferred way to send to Office
365.
If you use encryption, the SMTP server is smtp.office365.com, the port is 587 and the encryption is StartTLS.
This is the normal way to do it for Office 365.
Regardless of what you put in the sender's name and email address, Office 365 may override this with the
name associated with the "SMTP login name".

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Getting started 35

A work of warning about Office 365 SMTP. It is slow sending. Very slow. When very large messages
take a long time to send, or sometimes fail, this is outside of our control. It has been slowed down
deliberately by Microsoft. That said, unless your messages are huge you may never notice a problem
Door entry
The various door entry options determine if values are copied from the previous door when adding a new
door, and also which values are copied.
Key entry
The various key entry options determine if values are copied from the previous key when adding a new key,
and also which values are copied.
Report stretching
For each type of information on reports, a pre-determined width is allocated. This gives the best balance
between the various pieces of information shown. If the information cannot fit in the allocated space, in most
places it will automatically stretch down the report. You may use these options to determine for each type of
data if it will be allowed to stretch on the reports. If stretching is disabled for a type of data and it is not able
to fit then it will be truncated on the report. Generally some types of data (e.g. System number, Door
number, Lock part code) should always be allowed to stretch as truncating them makes little sense, while
other types would be ok to truncate.
Default factory for new jobs
If the application parameter "Allow user preferences for factory to use on new jobs" is on, the will be 2
options available that alter the behaviour when creating jobs.
If a default factory is set for a user and the default factory set by the system type is blank, or the preference
"Always use this selection as the default factory..." is checked, the factory selected here is used as the factory
when creating a job.

7.7 Printer setup

ProMaster Master Keying remembers the printers you select and each time you print it automatically selects
the correct printer.
By default these options are local to this computer (in a networked environment all computers need to have
these settings configured).
For each printer you can also select the paper tray from which the paper will be drawn and whether to print
on both sides.
Getting started
· You must be logged in.

· From the Setup and Admin menu, choose Printers.

Changing printers
There are printer for non-manufacturing related reports, and several for manufacturing related reports.
Almost all non-manufacturing reports are sent to the "Standard reports" printer.
Reports must be configured for each factory. Factory reports are sent to the "Factory reports" printer.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 36 ProMaster Master Keying

There are separate configurations for each label printer used by a factory (thus allowing each to have a
different label size permanently loaded)

For each printer, select it then click Edit, then choose the printer you want.
Restricting printer access
There are some Application parameters 49 that control the configuration of users.

Parameter Description
Allow empty printer setup to print to default printer Normally this option is on, meaning that if the report
destination is not configured then ProMaster Master
Keying will sent it to your default printer.
Users may select the printer for factory reports If you turn this option off, users will be unable to
configure the factory printers and a user with
permissions to edit users will need to perform the
configuration (See Users 44 )
This would not normally be done, but may be useful if
you want to force a user to print to the correct printer
for factory reports and never print to another printer
by mistake.
Where are printer configurations stored Normally printer settings are stored on the local
machine. If you change this to be the "in the
database" option then user settings are the same
regardless of which computer the user logs in from,
but the printers configured must be available where
ever the user logs in.

7.8 Spelling preferences

ProMaster Master Keying includes a comprehensive spell checked with several dictionaries.
Getting started

· You must be logged in.

From the Setup and Admin menu, choose Spelling preferences.

Changing preferences
The options are self describing and will be familiar to Microsoft Office users. The second tab, Language, is
where you choose the standard dictionary (E.g. English British) and where you may specify additional
dictionaries including other languages, medical terms and technical terms.

7.9 Navigating and usage tips

Throughout this guide the assumption is made that you are confident using Windows, selecting menu items,
clicking buttons, tabbing between controls etc.
For the sake of simplicity, this guide uses concise ways to refer to various actions. Because there are many
ways to use Windows, the user is expected to perform many of these tasks in the way that they feel most
confident.
Here are some examples:
Navigating menus

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Getting started 37

If this document says, Choose the menu option System then select Open, you could do this in any of the
following ways:

· Click your mouse on the menu System then when the drop down menu appears click your mouse on the
menu Open
Or
· Using your keyboard press Alt-S for the System menu then O for the Open menu.

Or

· Press Ctrl-O because that is the short cut key to perform the Open action.

Navigating windows
Moving around
The Tab key on your keyboard moves forward between fields.
Buttons
Click a button means; Either click the button with your mouse, or Tab to the button so it is the active control
and press the Enter key on your keyboard, or Tab to the button so it is the active control and press the
Space Key on your keyboard, or if there is a hot key for the button you may press that key combination.
Now that's a whole lot of different ways to use that button, but the real point here being that while the
documentation refers to clicking a button, often the better way is to use the keyboard, especially if it is only a
couple of key presses away from where you are. You certainly would not want to read the previous paragraph
over and over again!
Check boxes
Checks boxes, may be referred to as flags or options throughout this document. They are called this because
they are either on (they contain a tick or cross) or off (empty box). Tabbing onto them and using your Space
Key, or clicking on them with your mouse changes check boxes.
Drop down lists or combo boxes
Combo boxes, or drop down lists give you a list of choice for that field. A value may be selected using your
mouse, or by tabbing onto the field and using your keyboard. The key combination Alt-Down Arrow makes the
list drop down. Often the fastest way to make a selection is to tab onto the combo box and press the first
letter of the selection.
Default button
You may notice that many windows have one button that looks a little different to all other buttons. It may be
a different colour or it may have a dark border around it. This button is called the Default button. The default
button is operated by the Enter key on your keyboard from wherever you are on the window, provided that
the current control does not have a use for the Enter key.
On some of the more complex windows with multiple buttons, you will notice that as you tab from one
control to another the default button may change. The reason for this is to allow the Enter key to
perform to most common action.
An example of this behaviour is all search windows.
As you tab between the criteria fields at the top of the window, the Find button is the default button. Pressing
Enter actions the Find button.
After you action the Find button, and the results are displayed, you are positioned on the list so you can make
your selection using the arrow keys on your keyboard. When you are on the list, the Find button is no longer
the default button, but instead the OK button (or some other button) is now the default button.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 38 ProMaster Master Keying

This means that when you are on the list, pressing the Enter key will action the OK button and effectively
choose that action on the highlighted item.

Cancel button
With few exceptions, when a window has a Cancel button, the Escape key on your keyboard will operate
that button.
Learning to navigate and make selections with your keyboard rather than your mouse will dramatically
improve the speed with which you operate.
Convert case

Various data entry fields support the key press Shift-F3 that cycles case between lower-case, upper-case and
title-case. This works on the whole entry if nothing is selected, or just the selected text if you have made a
selection.

7.10 Searching for data

All search screens in ProMaster Master Keying have a number search parameters at the top.
Searches are performed by entering any search information you have and clicking Find (Or pressing Enter as
the Find button is the default button when you are entering the search parameters.)
Search field modifier
After many search fields there is a modifier to control how the search is performed. It is indicated by a small
graphic after the search field and the options on any particular search field may be cycled through by clicking
on the image. The option for each field is enabled when the field contains something to search for, and your
setting for each search modifier is remembered for future searches.

Here are the 4 search modifiers and a description:

Search starting. The search on the field matches data that starts with the value you entered.

Search containing. The search on the field matches data that contains with the value you entered, but
not necessarily at the start.

Search exact match. The search on the field matches data that exactly matches the value you
entered.

Search all values. The search on the field must contain each of the words you entered. The words
must all exist in the matched value, but may appear in any order. This search is most often used in address
searches where it is enhanced to search for all the words you enter in all of the associated address fields.
Notes
· All search parameters you enter must be met for any item of data to be considered a match, so enter
enough information to refine your search, but not so much that you exclude items you want to see.
· After you perform the search, you are placed on the list of results where you can move up and down with
the arrow keys then perform any action allowed on the selected item.
· See Setting your preferences 33 for information about auto find and find warnings.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Administering ProMaster Master Keying

Part

8
 40 ProMaster Master Keying

8 Administering ProMaster Master Keying

This section covers many topics related to administering ProMaster Master Keying, but not using it for
producing or manufacturing master key systems. Some of the items described are specific to the admin
user, but many items are applicable to users with appropriate permissions to perform the tasks. The topics
are separated from those in Using ProMaster Master Keying 100, which relate to master key systems.

8.1 Database upgrades and backups

8.1.1 Database upgrades
Periodically, updates are made available for ProMaster Master Keying. These updates add new functionality
and rectify anomalies.

Updates are always in the form of a setup program (PM8Update.exe) that installs a new version of the
ProMaster Master Keying program and any necessary support files.
Updates must be installed only on the server. During the update process other users must not be using
ProMaster Master Keying. When workstations log into ProMaster Master Keying subsequent to the update they
will be upgraded automatically.
When the update is installed, ProMaster Master Keying is run automatically and you are taken to the
Database Upgrade Wizard. The tasks shown in the Database Upgrade Wizard vary depending on the
version you have installed and the previous version that was in use.
You need to know the Admin password to apply database updates.
The database upgrade window may also be accessed from the Tools menu when you are not logged in. This
is necessary only if for some reason the update does not complete during its installation.
Both the installation of the update onto your server, and subsequent updates that are propagated to
your workstations require administrator access to run as they write new versions of the program files
on to your system.

8.1.2 Backing up your data

Regular backups are important. It is also very important that backups are transferred to separate media and
then stored in a secure location away from your computer systems.
Rule: If you don't backup it up, you have to be happy to lose it.
Do not copy the database
Because the ProMaster Master Keying database may be used at any time by a ProMaster Master Keying user,
you should never copy or backup the ProMaster Master Keying database directly unless you can be 100%
certain that it will not be used while you are copying it.
The backup program provided with ProMaster Master Keying is more smart than a simple file copy. A backup
created with ProMaster Master Keying backup program may be produced while others are using ProMaster
Master Keying.
Extending on this, do not backup the database file (the FDB file and any associated files) directly with a third
party backup solution. Only ever use ProMaster Master Keying Backup to produce backups, then you may
freely backup the resultant files using a third party backup solution.
The ProMaster Master Keying backup program does another task that is vitally important to the health of the
database while the backup is running. It is responsible for "garbage collection" in the database which
eliminates old unnecessary data and therefore controls database performance and bloat. It is responsible
also for recalculating index quality which is vital for maintained performance.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 41

WARNING: Live backups made with ShadowProtect or similar when the database is in use are of
limited use. The reason why is that they make a point in time snapshot of the database, but do not
capture a read-consistent view of the data. If a backup made with ShadowProtect or similar is
restored, there is a very good chance that it will be corrupt, and look to the database engine very much
like someone pulled the power cord out of the wall. Consider this to be a expensive exercise to repair
the database. ALWAYS run the ProMaster Master Keying backup program. The backup files produced
by the ProMaster Master Keying backup can be captured safely by ShadowProtect etc.
Producing Backups
To produce a backup:

· Click the Backup... button.

· Select the Database to backup (most likely you have only the database called Default)

· Alter the destination Folder if you wish. You may choose to have the backup copied to a second folder. The
backup folder must be a local drive on the server. The second folder is accessed by the backup program
rather than the database engine, and may be located on a network share.
· Click the Save settings and run backup button.

The file that the backup creates has a FBK file extension. Should then need arise, the backup program can be
used to restore this file to reconstruct your database.
In the normal operation of ProMaster Master Keying, the option Perform database maintenance during
the backup is an important part of maintaining a healthy and efficient database. The only times you should
do a backup with this option turned off is if you plan to discard the original database and immediately restore
your backup, or if you need the backup to be performed as fast as possible. This option, while important, does
add a small amount of time to the backup process.
The Backup also the associated document database option identifies the database used for storing
ProMaster Master Keying documents and runs a separate backup for that database after the primary database
backup is finished.
Backups can be configured to automatically zip the FBK file into a ZIP file. This is achieved by turning on the
Compress the backup flag. Zipping a backup reduces the amount of disk storage required for the backup,
but does use more disk space and time during the backup process. Be aware that there is a maximum file size
for zip files. Failure to do this may result in an unusable zip file. Unless disk space is is critically low, it is not
recommended to use this option as it makes backups significantly slower and the backup file must be
extracted in the event that it is to be restored.
The Output additional progress and diagnostic messages option produces messages about the various
stages of backup. Many messages are produced and the backup will therefore run measurably slower. There
is no need to use this option unless instructed to by ProMaster Master Keying support staff.
Copy the backup to somewhere else
Backup files (either those with a FBK file extension or the zipped backups with a ZIP file extension) should be
copied off your computer onto separate media. Backups should then be stored according to good business and
computing practice to safeguard your data investment.
The cost of producing permanent backups is extremely small compared to the cost of re-entering data.
Restoring Databases
The process of restoring a backup to produce a working database will not overwrite an existing database. If it
is your intention to replace your database by restoring a backup you must first locate your existing database
and rename it.
To restore a backup:
· Click the Restore... button.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

42 ProMaster Master Keying

· Choose what you are restoring (main database, document database or both)

· Click the Select... button, and select the backup file (the FBK file) for database, document database or
both. If you zipped the backup, you must first extract the backup files from the zip archive (using WinZip or
similar).
· Select the destination Database to restore (most likely you have only the environment called Default)

· Click the Save settings and run restore button.

The Output additional progress and diagnostic messages option produces messages about the various
stages of restore. Many messages are produced and the restore will therefore run measurably slower. There
is no need to use this option unless instructed to by ProMaster Master Keying support staff.
Configure Auto Backup
In the ideal world you would create daily backups.
ProMaster Master Keying Backup can be configured to:
· Backup multiple databases.

· Backup to one location and produce a copy of the backup at another location (e.g. another computer).

· Delete backups older than a given number of days (default 14).

To configure automatic backups:

· Click the Setttings... button.

· Tick the Database environment(s) to be backed up.

· Click the Select Folder... button to choose the destination folder for the backups. This must be on a local
disk.
· If you wish, check the option After the backup is created, copy it to the folder below and click the
corresponding Select Folder... button to choose the destination folder copy the backup to. Be aware that
the backup process must have access to this location, so there is no point in choosing a remote folder that
you can see when logged in as a user unless the scheduled backup process is also able to access that
folder.

· Set the options. See the notes earlier about backup options.

· There is one additional option for the auto backup - Recalculate index selectivity. This option should be
left on as it is responsible for maintaining database optimisation. It adds a small amount of time to the
backup.
· Choose how long you want to keep backups. There are separate settings for the backup folder and the
"copy to" folder. It is highly recommended that you keep a reasonable number of backups, perhaps 14
days. If you don't have enough disk space, get more.
Email
If you want an email notification after the scheduled backup has run, use the settings on the Email tab.
You may need to check with your mail administrator for the settings, and as there is a variety of mail servers
in use, each with different characteristics, you may need to experiment a bit to get it right.

Option Description
Server The name or IP address of your mail server.
Port The port on your mail server that receives the email.
Login name If your mail server uses login based authentication, enter your mail login
name.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 43

Password If your mail server uses login based authentication, enter your mail login
password.
Encryption Choose if you use an unencrypted mail connection and how the
encryption works.
Sender's name The name of the person to appear as the sender.
Sender's email The email address of the person to appear as the sender. Some mail
servers require the sender email to be the same as the SMTP login name
if SMTP login name is used.
Sent to Put in the email recipients, one per line.
Test Sends a test message using the current settings. Useful for testing
before saving.

Email - notes about Office 365

If you are using Office 365 as your mail provider, you will need to have it configured to provide the SMTP
capability, and there are a number of settings you will need to get correct.
If you choose not to use encryption, Office 365 will need to be configured to use your external IP address as
an authorised sender. In this case, the port is likely to be 25. This is not the preferred way to send to Office
365.
If you use encryption, the SMTP server is smtp.office365.com, the port is 587 and the encryption is StartTLS.
This is the normal way to do it for Office 365.
Regardless of what you put in the sender's name and email address, Office 365 may override this with the
name associated with the "Login name".
Run
If you want to run a program after the backup completes, turn on the "Run" option and select the program to
run.
The name of the file created from the backup (fbk or zip) is passed to the program as the first parameter and
if a document database backup was created then that file name (fbk or zip) is passed to the program as the
second parameter.
Schedule

· If you want to configure Windows Scheduled Tasks to start your backup each night, click the button
Schedule Auto Backup...
· If you want to add the scheduled task yourself, the command to run is shown in the yellow area at the
bottom of the settings.
· Finally, click Save to save your settings for Auto Backups.

Configuring Windows Scheduled Tasks

If you wish, you may access Windows Scheduled Tasks via your Start button and schedule the program
PM8Back.exe to run at a time of your bidding. If you do that, be sure to start PM8Back.exe with the
command line parameter -auto
Or, take the easy way. When you click on the button Schedule Auto Backup..., ProMaster Master Keying
Backup allows you to schedule the backup in your Windows Scheduled Tasks. To do this:
· Enter the Windows login of the user who will perform the backup. Usually on a domain this will be in the
form of MYDOMAIN\Administrator.
· Enter the time each day that the backup is to run. This should be started at a time such that it will have
completed before your off-site backup solution kicks in and backups the backup files produced by ProMaster
Master Keying Backup.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 44 ProMaster Master Keying

· Turn on the flag to enable the backup.

· Click OK to save the schedule.

· You will be prompted for the password for the Windows user account. The password is verified against the
computer or domain and on success the schedule is saved.
If you wish to configure Windows Scheduled Tasks manually, consult your Windows documentation or
Computer Consultant for information on how to configure your version of Windows for this task.
Your computer must remain on for Windows to be able to schedule tasks.
Here's a simple rule: No power = No backup.

Just like with a backup file that you create interactively, the backups produced when your schedule software
starts the ProMaster Master Keying Backup program should be copied to external media for safe keeping.
SCHEDULED TASK USER ACCOUNT
It is strongly recommended that you create a Windows user specifically for running the backup and use
that user for no other purpose. The user will need to have permissions to log on to run a batch job,
and will need permissions to the folders where the backup files are produced (including delete
permissions so old backups can be removed). If you do this, make sure the account password is
secure and never expires. It is all too common for users to configure scheduled tasks with an account,
such as their own login then at some time in the future change their password. After that the backups
will not run as scheduled task no longer has permissions to run.
Security
For security reasons, the ProMaster Master Keying Backup program will not allow you to backup a database
located on another computer. i.e. The backup must be performed on the server where the database is
located.

Always test your scheduled backup by opening your Windows Scheduled Tasks and choosing to run the
task immediately and verify that the backup files are produced. Check the task options to ensure that
they make sense and that the task will run even if a user is not logged in.

8.2 Configuring
8.2.1 Users
For each person who uses ProMaster Master Keying you should create a user account.
Each person then has their own login name and password, and ProMaster Master Keying tracks information
about who performed changes and restricts individual user access to functionality based on the access rights
that you have defined.
Initially the admin user must configure user accounts, but you may (although not necessarily should!)
give a user the ability to configure user accounts.
You may create as many user accounts as you wish. ProMaster Master Keying restricts the number of
concurrent users allowed by your license, but not the overall number of users that you define.
Any user that has performed activities is not able to be removed (but can be made inactive).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Users

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your users.

· If you have defined the Application parameter 49

"Where are printer configurations stored" to be "Store
per-user in the database" then you can right click on a user to define the printer to be used for factory

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 45

reports. Generally printers are left under the control of the user and the application parameter for this
should be changed only if you want to tighten control over the print location for factory reports.

An explanation of the options

Enter the user's first names and last name. These appear in various place and are fundamental to tracking
activity on a user-by-user basis.
· Enter a unique login name for the user. How you chose the login will depend on the size of your
organisation, but here are some examples: jb, joeb, joe.b, bloggs.j
· If you want the user to be authenticated against your Windows domain, enter the Windows Logon to which
this ProMaster Master Keying logon corresponds.
If you do not enter a Windows Logon then ProMaster Master Keying manages its own logon security.
If you enter a Windows Logon for the user, then when you log onto ProMaster Master Keying the
password you enter is authenticated with your Windows Security Provider as a match to the Windows
Logon name. The format for the Windows Logon allows all the normal Windows syntaxes (e.g.
JoeBloggs, MYDOMAIN\JoeBloggs, JoeBloggs@MYDOMAIN, [email protected] etc). Because
the Windows Logon is authenticated with your Windows Security Provider then any password policies
you have in place will apply to the user.
· The after hours phone and email are optional.

· When you create a user, the Active flag should be on. You can disable a user at any time by editing that
user and removing the Active flag.
Security
Each user belongs to a security group. Security groups control the activities that a user can perform. See
Security groups 45 and Security categories 48 for more information.
Branch
You may define branch addresses and associate an address with a user. See Branch addresses 50 for more
information.

8.2.2 Security groups

Security groups control the permissions, or what is allowed for each user. Each user belongs to a single
security group. While it is possible to create separate security groups for each user, it is more manageable to
create security groups around classes of user and use each security group for any applicable users.
The security group All is pre-defined and not editable. It has all permissions, so be sure to use it
carefully!
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Security groups

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your security groups.

An explanation of the options

· Select the permissions that the members of the security group are allowed.

Permissions are grouped by program area (Setup, Client etc).

Description of permissions

© 2019 WH Software Limited

46 ProMaster Master Keying

Note that in some situations, ProMaster Master Keying checks more than one permission and often in
conjunction with application parameters and license options. Some tasks may be permitted by more
than one permission (Edit a client on the currently open system checks "Setup clients" or "Edit the
client on the open system") and others may require a combination of permissions (Change the TMK on
a system requires "Coding" and "Access restricted coding features")

Permission Description
Group: Setup
Setup company and associated data Allows setup of company information, branch addresses, company
logo on reports
Setup users and user security Allows setup of users, security groups, security categories.
Setup general administrative settings Allows setup of factories, lockshops, keying types
Setup application parameters Allows application parameters to be altered.
Setup templates Allows the user to design templates for importing and exporting to
Excel.
Allows configuration of templates such as registration form
instructions.
Setup locks and cylinders Allows setup of locks and cylinders and door hardware.
Setup marker models Allows configuration of the relationship between marking models
and key sections when manufacturing on the Silca Marker 2000.
Setup system types Allows setup of system types.
Setup design parameters (Key Allows setup of key sections, key head colours.
sections, keyways, key head colours)
Import and maintain lists for restricted Allows lists to be imported and maintained if you have an applicable
design modules design module registered.
Export parameter data (CSV) Allows various types of data to be exported including locks, door
hardware, key colours, keying types, lockshops (manufacturers
only), clients, factories, branch addresses
Group: Client
Setup clients Allows clients to be created, altered etc.
Allows system signatories to be converted to a client signatory.

Group: System
Open systems Allows systems to be opened. Required for pretty much everyone
unless the user is for admin purposes or used only for "Manufacture
job".
Open high security systems Required for the user to open systems marked as high security.
Normally most users would have this permission and most systems
would be marked as high security. Low security systems and
users should be used for low-end master keys systems only.
Without this permission, any systems created by a user are
marked as low security.
User must have "Open systems" also to be able to open systems.
Open unsecured systems as well as Allows unsecured systems to be opened as well as those with a
those secured by security categories security category. Without this permission all systems that the
user creates/edits must have a security category assigned.
Open systems based on its design Allows key section and key code to be used when searching for a
system.
Allows the option "Only systems with pending jobs and that require
coding" when searching for a system.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 47

Create systems Allows systems to be created.

Also allows many of the system exiting functions (keys, doors,
keying etc).
Allows system to be created from Excel.
Allows system duplicate.
Modify systems Allows systems to be modified.
Also allows many of the system editing functions (keys, doors,
keying, snapshot etc).
Allows alerts to be acknowledged.
Set automatically when you turn on "Create systems" or "Import
systems"
Edit the client on the open system Allows the client for the currently open system to be altered.
Allows system signatories to be converted to a client signatory.
Edit signatories Allows signatories to be added and altered.
Allows signatory to key/door authorities to be altered.
Allows client signatories to be added and altered if the user has
client permissions.
Delete systems Allows system to be deleted.
Export systems Allows systems to be exported (To other users or to Excel)
Import systems Allows systems to be imported. (From other users or from Excel)
Rename a system when importing it When importing a system, if the system number is used by an
existing system, this permission allows the user to rename the
existing system and also convert the existing system to a
snapshot.
Omit the lock from a door Allows the user to create doors without a cylinder or lock.
Export system information to CSV files Allows system export of doors, keys, keying to CSV.
Print system reports Print all types of system reports.
Change system security Allows the user to set security categories on a system.
Change system special features Allows a door number to be altered after the door is manufactured.
Allows key and door issue quantities to be altered.
Group: Coding
Coding Allows access to coding.
Allows key code and door pinning reports for checking coding.
Allows pinning notes to be seen and edited on doors.
Allows pinning notes to be imported when importing doors from a
CSV file.
Allows doors to be assigned to a key when it is being replaced
(normally keying is copied to the new key and removed from the
replaced key).
Delete the system coding design unless Allows the user to delete the system design when there are no jobs
jobs exist (other than jobs in the "entering" status).
Delete the system coding design Allows the user to delete the system design regardless of whether
including when jobs exist there are jobs or not.
Change the key code for cut keys Enables the ability in coding to alter the code on a key that has
been used by a job. Note that with this permission, the user must
turn on the feature each time required in the coding screens.
Access restricted coding features (e.g. Allows the user to change the TMK for a system after the design
change TMK code) has been created.
Allows the user to use the "Change a constant position" to alter all
keys in a system on applicable design modules.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 48 ProMaster Master Keying

Allows the user to use the "Change key sections" to alter all keys
in a system on applicable design modules.
Allows the system type to be altered (to a compatible one only)
after the system design has been created.
Access advanced coding features (e.g. Allows the user to create progressions in the coding tree that
create overlapping progressions) "overlap". Without this permission each chamber in the lock is
used for a single purpose.
Group: Job
Create and edit jobs Allows jobs to be created or edited.
Allows jobs to be imported from ProMaster Key Manager.
Order obsolete product Allows the user to order a lock product that is obsolete (marked as
inactive).
Manufacture jobs Allows the option to open jobs for manufacturing (can be used in a
factory where other permissions are not granted).
Allows jobs to be manufactured from the jobs screen.
Allows configuration of machines for manufacturing.
Change a job after it is released Allows the user to change the status of a job from "Manufacturing"
to "Entering" so changes may be made to the job.
Allows the user to change the status of a job from "Complete" to
"Manufacturing" if permitted by the Application parameters 49 .
Allows the invoice number to be edited on a job when it is
"Manufacturing" or "Complete"
Also allows the print status of a job to be toggled when the job is in
"Manufacturing".
Allows a key or door to be removed after it is ordered and
manufactured.
Group: Admin
Export data Allows systems analysis export
Allows export of the list when searching for systems.
Print admin reports Print all types of admin reports.
Design labels (everyone) and reports Allows the user to design label layouts for manufacturing output to
(requires custom reporting license) label printers.
If ProMaster Master Keying is licensed for the end user report
writer, it also gives the user permissions to design reports.
Group: Publishing
Configure publishing Allows ProMaster Master Keying to be configured as a publisher,
thereby allowing devices to be configured.
Configure publishing devices Allows devices to be created ready to receive jobs. If you have
configured publishing to be restricted by factory or system type
then this allows those device configurations also.
Publish jobs to devices Allows jobs to be sent to devices from the job manufacturing
screen.

8.2.3 Security categories

Security categories control access to particular systems by tying systems to security groups. If a system is
linked to one or more security category, to be able to access the system the user must belong to a security
group that is linked to at least one of those security categories.
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 49

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Security categories

Making a change

· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your users.

An explanation of the options

· For your security category, choose the security groups that belong to the category.

The systems associated with the security category are shown but not editable. The relationship between a
system and security category is controlled by the system.

8.2.4 Application parameters

Application Parameters define some program behavioural characteristics that are set by the admin user
and are common to all users.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Application parameters

· Expand or collapse branches of the tree by clicking on the [+] or [-] buttons beside the folders.

· Double Click on the item that you want to change, make your change and click OK.

· When you have finished making changes, click Save to make them permanent.

Notes
· Items set to their default value are indicated by the empty page icon.

· Items that have been altered are indicated by the lined page icon.

· An item you have changed and is not yet saved is indicated with a disk icon.

· To reset an item to the default value, highlight the item and press Shift+Ctrl+Alt+Delete.

· Changes are not seen by other users until they log out then log in again.

· Right click on an item to see a menu of other functionality.

· Users of earlier versions of ProMaster Master Keying will notice that there are significantly fewer options
than in the past. This is because wherever possible the parameters have been move to more accessible
and more applicable locations such as System Types, User Preferences etc.
Unless you know the application parameter you require, it is usually beneficial to search for some text
in the parameter you are looking for. Use Ctrl-F to Find and F3 to Find next.

8.2.5 Company information

Company information is displayed on the header or reports.
The company name is entered and fixed by your registration information, but you may enter address
information and phone numbers.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Company information

Editing company information

· Enter a address, contact name, email, telephone and fax numbers.

· Click OK to save.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 50 ProMaster Master Keying

8.2.6 Company logo for reports

You may include a small graphic in the top left corner of reports, or replace the entire company portion of
report headers with a full width logo.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Company logo for reports

· Choose the Standard Image tab for small graphic in the top left corner of reports or the Full Width
Image tab for the logo that replaces the replace the entire company portion of report headers.
Changing the logo

· Click Load logo to select your graphic file.

· If you have a logo load and you no longer want to use it, clear it by clicking Remove logo.

· Click OK to save.

Notes
· The logo must be a png file. If you have a graphic in another format, you must first convert it (using a
graphics editing application) to a png file.
· The small logo is rendered on the reports in a 25mm x 25mm square.

· The full width logo is rendered on the report 190mm wide for portrait reports and 277mm wide for
landscape reports.
· Because the small logo is rendered in a square, you must ensure that your graphic is square (I.e. the height
and width dimensions must be the same)
· The absolute number of pixels in your graphics file will determine the quality of the rendered image.
Consider about 300 dpi to be satisfactory quality in which case the graphics file needs to be about 240
pixels high and 240 pixels wide.
· Change the Application parameters 49
Report header style under Reports to specify no logo, small log
or full width logo.
Making your graphics file excessively large will not result in a noticeable quality improvement, but will
have an adverse impact on performance, particularly in printing speed and the size of any PDF files
produced.

8.2.7 Branch addresses

Branch addresses may be associated with users and controls the information that appears on report headers
when that user is logged in.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Branch addresses

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your addresses.

After adding an address you likely will assign it to a user. See Users 44 .

An explanation of the options

· The description is for identification purposes - it does not appear on printouts.

· Other address fields are used on report headers for linked users instead of the main company address.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 51

8.2.7.1 Importing branch addresses from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with branch information you can import this data.
290
Read the topic Branch address import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The name field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the branch address is new
(and therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Branch addresses

Importing data

To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 52 ProMaster Master Keying

A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.2.8 Change registration

Your registration information contains the license details for design modules, features, users etc.
Registration information is changed when you purchase additional features or users, and also when you
renew support and maintenance.
Getting started

· You must be logged in as the admin user

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Change registration

· The Current registration tab shows details of the registration currently being used by the database.

· Paste your new registration into the Enter registration tab.

· After pasting your new registration, the Preview tab is available to see the contents of the new license.

· Click OK to save.

If your ProMaster Master Keying is registered and activated, the Fetch latest registration button is
available and will retrieve the latest registration from the WH Software Limited activation site. This is
useful when support and maintenance is renewed or design modules or users added.

8.2.9 Configuring document storage

When ProMaster Master Keying is installed, it creates 2 databases. The first (PM8.fdb) is all of your data
122
except for documents. The second (PM8DocStor.fdb) stores all documents (See Documents )
The reason why the data is split in this way is that the document storage can become huge, and is way less
important than the other data, and by splitting the database the logistics of backups, optimisation etc can be
better managed.

Or put another way, the data is split into 2 databases because that is the best way to store it.
It is possible to change the way documents are stored, but it is best to seek technical advice before
doing this.

Really, there is no good reason for ever doing any of this - the ProMaster Master Keying installation
already did the best thing!

DON'T MAKE ANY CHANGE BECAUSE YOU FEEL LIKE HAVING A PLAY WITH IT. SEEK GUIDANCE FROM
WH Software Limited FIRST.
Getting started
· You must be logged in as the admin user

· From the Tools menu, select Configure DocStor database

An explanation of the options

Option Description
Repair DocStor connection alias The connection alias for the DocStor is stored inside the main
database. It must follow the naming convention as such:
Main database = PM8

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 53

DocStor database = PM8DocStor'

I.e. The docStor connection must be the name of the main
connection followed by 'DocStor'. This must be configured in
databases.conf and must be correct inside the main database.
This checking is enforced to stop mistakes that result in documents
being lost.
Create a DocStor database if it does This option is used to create the document database (usually called
not already exist PM8DocStor.fdb). The database engine must be configured with the
appropriate information to know where to create the database, and
this generally requires technical assistance. If the database already
exists, this option will not overwrite it.
Move all internal documents to the All documents stored in the main database are copied to the
external DocStor database document database and then removed from the main database.
If the document database does not exist, this option will report an
error and not proceed.
Note: The main database will not reduce in size (although the space
previously used by the documents will be reused). A database
backup and restore is required to shrink the database.
Move all external documents from the This is the opposite of the option above.
DocStor database to the internal All documents stored in the document database are copied to the
storage and remove the reference to main database and then removed from the document database.
the DocStor database The actual database file for the document database
(PM8DocStor.fdb) is not removed from your computer, but it is no
longer referenced.

The second and third options can take some considerable time (perhaps hours) to run if your database
is large. You must plan downtime to perform these tasks.
· After making a selection, click the OK button to proceed.

Never run this process while other users are using ProMaster Master Keying. Run this process only
after you have discussed it with WH Software Limited support staff.

8.3 General parameters

8.3.1 Keying types
Keying types serve three purposes. They:
· Provide a way for you to classify a system according to how it is keyed. This is important for organisations
who see master-key systems in terms of Master-Keyed, Grand Master Keyed, Keyed Alike, Keyed To Differ
etc.
· Control if a system is construction keyed or not (applicable only to design modules that support lost ball
construction keying)
· Control whether or not a TMK will be checked to locate duplicates when you are creating a system design.

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Keying types

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your keying types.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 54 ProMaster Master Keying

An explanation of the options

· Each code may appear only once

· Each keying type description may appear only once.

· Choose if the keying type is for construction keyed systems. Do not change this setting after creating
systems using the keying type.
The application parameter Default keying type for new systems is used to pre-select a keying
type when you create a system. For users who do not require keying types (other than for creating
construction keyed systems), this application parameter should be set.

8.3.1.1 Importing keying types from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with keying type information you can import this data.
300
Read the topic Keying type import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The ref field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the keying type is new (and
therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Keying types

Importing data

To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 55

· Click Next

Data analysis

A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.

If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.

· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.2 Factories
Factories model the practical scenario of manufacturing jobs in more than one location. If you make all your
jobs on the bench at your only shop, then the default factory called Workshop is all you will need.
If however you run two shops, and you may manufacture product for master key systems at either location,
then right away you can get a benefit in defining a second factory to represent the second shop. In this
scenario you may wish to rename Workshop to the actual name of your first shop.
Another example where defining additional factories will benefit is if you have a mobile unit who will
manufacture and install a job. Set the mobile guy up as a factory, being sure to include his mobile email
address when entering the factory. Now, when you enter a job in ProMaster Master Keying, select the mobile
guy as the factory. Now you now have a record against the job saying where the job was manufactured.

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Factories

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your factories.

Other functionality
Click the Options button then Export csv to export the data to a csv file. See Exporting parameter data to a
csv file 98.
Click the Options button then Import csv to import data from a csv file. See Importing factories from a csv
file 56
An explanation of the options
· Internally ProMaster Master Keying knows if it a factory you created or if it is imported from another user
when importing a system file.
· Each factory name may appear only once (Although if you import systems from another ProMaster Master
Keying user they may have a factory with the same name).
· If a factory is marked as inactive it may not be selected for a new job.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 56 ProMaster Master Keying

8.3.2.1 Importing factories from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with factory information you can import this data.
298
Read the topic Factory import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The name field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the factory is new (and
therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Factories

Importing data

To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 57

A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3 Locks and cylinders

Locks and cylinders are combined into a central search screen, which in turn accesses the lock or cylinder by
the corresponding screen.
Cylinders are the keyed component for the door, whereas locks are the locking mechanism operated by a
cylinder. Whether you use only cylinders or locks and cylinders depends on how you operate.

Each lock may have cylinders specified for each system type (See System types 87 ) for external, internal, or
double usage (In many cases it will be only an external cylinder specified).
Cylinders have a different set of properties that relate to how it operates (E.g. Core type, part type, driver
pins, axes).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders

Making a change
· Use the Add cylinder, Add lock, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your locks and cylinders.

· See Entering locks 58 for information on locks.

· See Entering cylinders 58 for information on cylinders.
Other functionality

Right click a lock or cylinder and choose Duplicate to add another item with the fields (except part code)
copied from the selected item.
Right click a lock and choose Copy cylinders from this lock to other locks to do as it says. See Copy lock
cylinders 60 .
Right click a cylinder and choose Copy driver pins from this cylinder to other cylinders to do as it says.
See Copy cylinder driver pins 61 .
Right click a cylinder and choose Cylinder sub assembly to edit sub assembly information for the cylinder.
See Cylinder sub assembly 68 .
Right click a lock or cylinder and choose Remove this lock or cylinder and replace it with another lock
or cylinder. See Replace lock 61 .
Right click a lock or cylinder and choose Usage report to see where a lock or cylinder is used. See Lock
156
usage .
Click the Options button then Bulk change to allow easy changes to all the locks and cylinders returned by
your search. See Bulk change locks 59 .
Click the Options button then Export csv to export the data to a csv file. See Exporting parameter data to a
csv file 98.
Click the Options button then one of the 6 Import csv options to import data from a csv file. See Importing
locks from a csv file 61 , Importing cylinders from a csv file 65 and other surrounding topics.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 58 ProMaster Master Keying

8.3.3.1 Entering locks

This topic describes locks. See also Entering cylinders 58 .

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders

· Click Add lock to add a new lock.

Explanation of data fields

Data field Description

Part code The part code for the lock. Required and must be unique.
Description A description of the lock. Required.
Item number Used as an alternative search field, primarily in manufacturing
environments where the part code is a common name that refers to a
longer item number.
Brand The brand of this product. The selection may be made from the drop
down list of brands used on other products. Required.
Finish A brief description of the finish. E.g. NP, SCP etc.
On the job parts list, this lock If turned on, it indicates that this is a lock with a cylinder supplier, so
part code includes cylinders when generating parts lists and lock usage reports the association
between the lock and cylinders is not used. Normally this would not be
used.
All details for this lock are A flag that allows you to to indicate if they have full details about this lock
complete or not.
Image The lock image can be loaded from a file, linked to the image used by
another lock or scanned. Basic editing capabilities are provided. See also
308
Image editor .
Cylinders The Cylinders tab holds information about the relationship between this
lock and cylinders that may be used with the lock.
The cylinders are shown for each of your system types. Select the part
codes for the external, internal or double cylinders for each system type
as appropriate.
See Copy lock cylinders 60 to learn about configuring one lock's cylinders
then copying that to other locks.
See also Importing lock cylinders from a csv file 63 as is may be easier to
generate the relationship data externally and then import it.

8.3.3.2 Entering cylinders

58
This topic describes cylinders. See also Entering locks .
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders

· Click Add cylinder to add a new cylinder.

Explanation of data fields

Data field Description

Part code The part code for the cylinder. Required and must be unique.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 59

Description A description of the cylinder. Required.

Item number Used as an alternative search field, primarily in manufacturing
environments where the part code is a common name that refers to a
longer item number.
Brand The brand of this product. The selection may be made from the drop
down list of brands used on other products. Required.
Finish A brief description of the finish. E.g. NP, SCP etc.
Style The cylinder style. E.g. Euro, Rim. This field is used in manufacturing for
sorting cylinders.
Core type Normally this is set to "Standard or none". If the cylinder is a removable
core cylinder for one of the types listed in the drop down list, choose the
correct one.
This field is used by a few design modules, and when applicable is
essential to calculating the correct cylinder pinning.
Note: The 4 "Kaba Peaks" core types are for use with the Interchangeable
Core design module for the Kaba Peaks locks systems.
Part type Select "Cylinder" for single keyway cylinders or "Double cylinder" for
cylinders with 2 keyways (E.g. double sided Euro profile cylinder)
All details for this cylinder are A flag that allows you to to indicate if they have full details about this
complete cylinder or not.
Driver pins A number of pin tumbler based design modules use the driver pins to
decide which driver pin to use for each stack height (bottom pin + master
pins).
If your cylinder is used by this type of locking system, specify the name of
the counter pin for each stack height.
Leave any non-applicable stack heights empty.
Some design modules will use this information for some locks systems
and for other lock systems the rules are incorporated into the calculation.
If a design module uses this information and it is not available, then
pinning charts, on screen pinning and some other areas will not show
counter pins.

See also Copy cylinder driver pins 61

Which axes does the cylinder use Normally this is unimportant. For example, an inline cylinder has a single
axis, that axis is always used and there are no options.
For Abus XY14, Axis a and Axis 2 must be set correctly as this determines
if pinning is calculated as X14, Y14 or XY14.
Image The lock image can be loaded from a file, linked to the image used by
another lock or scanned. Basic editing capabilities are provided. See also
308
Image editor .

8.3.3.3 Bulk change locks

Bulk change is a process where you can make the same change to a few or even many items in a single
operation. It is particularly useful for achieving consistency in brand names, finishes etc.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 60 ProMaster Master Keying

· Search for a lock or cylinders. Bulk change acts on the locks and cylinders returned by your search.

· Click Options then choose Bulk change.

General
· Within this window, the change select is applied only to the items that are checked.

· You can check and uncheck items individually or right click and use the various selection options.

· You can make as many different changes in this window as you want before saving.

· Changes are stored in memory and saved only when you click OK, so if you stuff it up then you can cancel
and start again.
· Any item that has been changed displays a graphic next to the check-box.

· If you want each value that has been changed, right click the list and choose Show changed values.
Then a flag graphic is shown next to all changed values.
Making a change
The bulk change process is:
· Use the data type list to select the type of change you want.

· The options for that change are shown. Enter the new information for your change.

· Ensure that the correct items are selected, selecting or deselecting them as necessary.

· Click Apply change.

You may repeat those 4 steps as many times as you need.

When you have finished, click OK to save the changes.

8.3.3.4 Copy lock cylinders

Instead of selecting cylinders for each lock which would be a huge job, you can get one lock right then copy
the cylinders to other locks.
Getting started

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a lock.

· Right click on a lock and choose Copy cylinders from this lock to other locks.

Using the wizard

· The lock is shown. You can click Details to check it before proceeding then click Next.

· On the Destination locks page, choose the locks to which the cylinders will be copied. Click Select to
search for locks to add to the list, or if you have a document that contains part codes (1 per line) you can
copy the part codes to the clipboard and load them into the destination locks list by clicking Paste from
clipboard.
· After selecting the destination locks, click Next, review the task and click Finish to apply the changes.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 61

8.3.3.5 Copy cylinder driver pins

Instead of entering driver pins on each cylinder which would be a huge job, you can get one cylinder right
then copy the driver pins to other cylinder.

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a cylinder.

· Right click on a cylinder and choose Copy driver pins from this cylinder to other cylinders.

Using the wizard

· The cylinder is shown. You can click Details to check it before proceeding then click Next.

· On the Destination cylinders page, choose the cylinders to which the driver pins will be copied. Click
Select to search for cylinders to add to the list, or if you have a document that contains part codes (1 per
line) you can copy the part codes to the clipboard and load them into the destination cylinders list by clicking
Paste from clipboard.
· After selecting the destination cylinders, click Next, review the task and click Finish to apply the changes.

8.3.3.6 Replace lock

This process allows you to remove a lock or cylinder that is used by doors and replace all occurrences or it
with a different product.
Typically this would be done if you have the same item entered twice with slightly different part codes and you
wish to remove the incorrect one.
This operation can change a lot of data. Use extreme caution.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a lock or cylinder that you want to remove.

· Right click on a item and choose Remove this lock or cylinder and replace it with another lock or
cylinder.
Making a change
· Click Select to choose the replacement item

· You must enter the specified text before proceeding.

· Click OK to replace the item.

There is no undo. When you type the confirmation text and click OK, the old lock or cylinder is gone
and all doors using it are affected.

8.3.3.7 Importing locks from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with lock information you can import this data. See also Importing cylinders from a csv
file 65 .
302
Read the topic Lock import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The part code field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the lock is new (and
therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).

© 2019 WH Software Limited

62 ProMaster Master Keying

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import locks csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.

· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 63

8.3.3.8 Importing lock cylinders from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with lock cylinder information you can import this data.
303
Read the topic Lock cylinder import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The combination of part code + position + part type fields in the import is matched to existing
values to determine if the relationship is new (and therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore
will be updated to the new information).
The part code must exist as a lock.
The cylinder part code must exist as a cylinder or double cylinder.
The value for part type determines which relationship is set, and the value for part type must
correspond to the part type of the cylinder part code. E.g. The part type may not be "D" when the
cylinder part type is "Cylinder", Etc.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import lock cylinders csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 64 ProMaster Master Keying

If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.

· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3.9 Importing lock pictures from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with lock picture information you can import this data.
303
Read the topic Lock picture import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The folder from where the pictures are loaded is the folder that contains the CSV file you are importing
and then a sub folder CylinderPicture (I.e. The same folder used for cylinder pictures)
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import lock pictures csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 65

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.

If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3.10 Importing cylinders from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with cylinder information you can import this data. See also Importing locks from a csv
file 61 .
292
Read the topic Cylinder import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The part code field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the cylinder is new (and
therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import cylinders csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 66 ProMaster Master Keying

heading and first piece of data is shown.

Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.

If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3.11 Importing cylinder driver pins from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with cylinder driver pin information you can import this data.
294
Read the topic Cylinder driver pin import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents
allowed.
The combination of part code + stack height fields in the import is matched to existing values to
determine if the driver pin is new (and therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be
updated to the new information).
The part code must exist as a cylinder or double cylinder.
There is no harm done by importing driver pin data for cylinders where it is meaningless, but if you are
creating data externally for import then generally care should be taken to exclude meaningless data.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import cylinder driver pins csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 67

correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.

The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.

You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3.12 Importing cylinder pictures from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with cylinder picture information you can import this data.
294
Read the topic Cylinder picture import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The folder from where the pictures are loaded is the folder that contains the CSV file you are importing
and then a sub folder CylinderPicture
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import cylinder pictures csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 68 ProMaster Master Keying

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.

· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3.13 Cylinder sub assembly

Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your ProMaster Master Keying license.
Cylinder sub assembly allows each cylinder to have any number of sub components, an image and a video
URL. The information is included in pinning charts, parts required and on-screen pinning.
For any cylinder, the sub assembly information is specific to a System type 87 . If a cylinder is used by
more than one system type then information is required for each system type.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a cylinder.

· Right click on a cylinder and choose Cylinder sub assembly.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 69

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your cylinder sub assembly information.

· When you click Add, you will then be asked to choose the system type you want, and then taken to the
editor for adding components.
Other functionality
Right click a sub assembly line for a system type and choose Duplicate to add the same information to
another system type.

Click the Options button then Item types to set up your categories (Core, Housing Etc.). This should be
done before setting up sub assembly information for a cylinder.
The list will be small, and once done it is unlikely that you need to alter it as it is used for all cylinders
and all system types.
Click the Options button then Export csv to export the data to a csv file. See Exporting parameter data to a
csv file 98.
Click the Options button then Import cylinder sub assembly csv to import the sub assembly parts from a
csv file. See Importing cylinder sub assembly from a csv file 69 .
Click the Options button then Import images csv to import the sub assembly images from a csv file. See
Importing cylinder sub assembly images from a csv file 71 .
Click the Options button then Import video URLs csv to import the sub assembly video links from a csv file.
See Importing cylinder sub assembly video URL from a csv file 72 .
The cylinder sub assembly editor
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to assign the components required.

· Each component may appear only once.

· For each component you specify the part code, quantity, and optionally a location (where it is in your
factory)
· You may load an image in the same manner as for lock and cylinder images.

· A video URL is provided and if used is available when using on-screen pinning.

· Notes may be recorded.

Setting up sub assembly components for a large number of cylinders is a cumbersome process. It is
recommended that you set up one or two for play purposes, then when you want to do the bulk of it, start by
exporting the information, then create the CSV files externally based on the exported files, then when you are
ready, use the import functions to bring it back into ProMaster Master Keying

8.3.3.14 Importing cylinder sub assembly from a csv file

Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your ProMaster Master Keying license.
If you have a CSV file with cylinder sub assembly information you can import this data.
Setting up cylinder sub assembly information is time consuming, and it would be rather crazy to enter the
data in to ProMaster Master Keying manually, so the import is the best way.
295
Read the topic Cylinder sub assembly import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents
allowed.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

70 ProMaster Master Keying

The combination of part code + system type + component type fields in the import is matched
to existing values to determine if the information is new (and therefore will be added) or existing (and
therefore will be updated to the new information).
The part code must exist as a cylinder or double cylinder.
The system type must exist.
The component type must exist.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a cylinder.

· Right click on a cylinder and choose Cylinder sub assembly.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import cylinder sub assembly
csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The option "Delete items that exist but are not in the import file" removes any cylinder sub assembly entries in
your database that are not in the import file.
If you turn this option on (E.g. to remove entries that exist in error), it is highly recommended that you
export existing cylinder sub assembly data before you proceed with this import so you can reimport
that data if you delete data by mistake.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 71

those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3.15 Importing cylinder sub assembly images from a csv file

Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your ProMaster Master Keying license.
If you have a CSV file with cylinder sub assembly image information you can import this data.
296
Read the topic Cylinder sub assembly picture import (CSV) file format for more information on the file
contents allowed.
The combination of part code + system type fields in the import is matched to existing cylinder sub
assembly values.
The part code must exist as a cylinder or double cylinder.
The system type must exist.
The folder from where the pictures are loaded is the folder that contains the CSV file you are importing
and then a sub folder CylinderSubAssemblyPicture
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a cylinder.

· Right click on a cylinder and choose Cylinder sub assembly.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import images csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 72 ProMaster Master Keying

You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.

Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis

A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.

If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.3.16 Importing cylinder sub assembly video URL from a csv file
Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your ProMaster Master Keying license.
If you have a CSV file with cylinder sub assembly video URL information you can import this data.
296
Read the topic Cylinder sub assembly video URL import (CSV) file format for more information on the file
contents allowed.
The combination of part code + system type fields in the import is matched to existing cylinder sub
assembly values.
The part code must exist as a cylinder or double cylinder.
The system type must exist.
The folder from where the pictures are loaded is the folder that contains the CSV file you are importing
and then a sub folder CylinderSubAssemblyPicture
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a cylinder.

· Right click on a cylinder and choose Cylinder sub assembly.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options a button then choose Import video URLs csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 73

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.

Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.4 Hardware
Hardware is for recording any items on the door other than the locking product. Recording of hardware is for
informational purposes only and does not impact master keying or jobs.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Hardware

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your hardware.

· Click Add group to add a hardware group (a group part code that encompasses several other parts). See
the topic "Hardware groups" lower in this topic.
Other functionality
You may right click a hardware item and choose Duplicate from the pop-up menu to add hardware with the
fields (except part code) copied from the selected item.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 74 ProMaster Master Keying

Click the Options button then Hardware types to open the editor for hardware types. Hardware types are
a classification of hardware items, such as "Closer", "Handle" and "Kick plate". You will need to add hardware
types before adding any hardware items.
Click the Options button then Exporting to a csv file to export the data to a csv file. See Exporting
parameter data to a csv file 98 .
Click the Options button then Import from a csv file to import data from a csv file. See Importing
hardware from a csv file 74
Explanation of data fields

Part code, description, brand and type are required.

Item number is provided to allow a manufacturer part number to be recorded.
Hardware groups
Groups are used when adding hardware to doors to allow multiple items to be added in a single selection.
The items in the group are each saved against the door. I.e. The group is expanded onto the door, but the
group is then not associated with the door.
When you add a group, you must provide a part code and description and add at least one item to the group.
Really, for a group to make sense it should have two or more items.
You can alter the quantity of each item in the group. When items are added to the group the quantity is set
as one, so be sure to change it if you want more.

8.3.4.1 Importing hardware from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with hardware information you can import this data.
297
Read the topic Door hardware import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The part code field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the hardware is new
(and therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Hardware.

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 75

existing items, or both.

· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.

Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.4.2 Importing hardware types from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with hardware type information you can import this data.
297
Read the topic Door hardware type import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents
allowed.
The description field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the hardware type is
new (and therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Hardware, then click on the Options button and choose
Hardware types to get to the "Door Hardware Types" window.
Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 76 ProMaster Master Keying

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.

It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish

A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.3.5 Templates
Templates are rich text entries that are used in various places. For example when you print a Signature
167
registration form you can pick the template containing instructions to the client.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Templates

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your templates.

Explanation of data fields

Data field Description

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 77

Type The type of template. The options here depend on your product registration.
E.g. Signature registration, order form
Usage What the template is used for. Currently the only option is "Template" but
there may be other options if required in the future.
Description A description that you call the template. Must be unique.

In the text area, enter the body of your template.

Notes

The templates, according to their type, may be selected in the place where they are required and the user
selection is remembered for next time it is required. Some users may require multiple templates such as two
different signature registration instructions, although for most people a single template for each type is
sufficient.

8.3.6 Lockshops
Manufacturer edition only.
Lockshops are for manufacturers to store the name and details of locksmiths who may then me designated as
the key cutting agent for a system or to record that the system was sent to a locksmith.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Lockshops

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your lockshops

Other functionality
Click the Options button then Export csv to export the data to a csv file. See Exporting parameter data to a
csv file 98.
Click the Options button then Import csv to import data from a csv file. See Importing lockshops from a csv
file 77
Explanation of data fields
The lockshop name must be unique.

Data field Description

Code A place for you to enter a code that aligns with other computer systems.
This lockshop is a key cutting Allows the lockshop to used on systems as the "key cutting agent".
agent
System may be exported to this Allows the lockshop to used on systems as "exported to lockshop"
lockshop

8.3.6.1 Importing lockshops from a csv file

Manufacturer edition only.
If you have a CSV file with lockshop information you can import this data.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

78 ProMaster Master Keying

301
Read the topic Lockshop import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The name field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the lockshop is new (and
therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Lockshops

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.

A simple wizard steps you through the import process.

Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.

Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 79

8.4 Mobile services

General
ProMaster Master Keying Mobile services allow you to publish a job to our publishing server, and then retrieve
that job on a device (Android or iOS). For example, you may send a job to a mobile locksmith to re-key some
cylinders on the client site.

The publishing server is used also for sending system updates to ProMaster Key Manager 8.
The publishing server is hosted and available to users of ProMaster Master Keying as a no-cost service that is
available while ProMaster Master Keying support and maintenance is current.
The number of devices available is determined by your license, and is set at 3 devices per user license. For
example if your ProMaster Master Keying license permits 5 users then you will be permitted 15 devices.
Architecture
The publishing service is implemented as a web HTTPS service. ProMaster Master Keying communicates with
the publishing server from each workstation, so to use the service the workstation must have internet access
to the publishing server permitted.
Jobs on mobile devices
Devices run the ProMaster mobile app for Android or iOS and also communicate with the publishing server
using HTTPS.

Devices are configured and associated with your ProMaster Master Keying using a handshake process during
which a pairing code must be entered on the phone and the pairing code is used to retrieve and decrypt an
encryption key specific to the device.
For all subsequent communications to the device (i.e. Sending jobs), the data transmitted is encrypted to the
individual encryption key of the device.
The encryption keys for the device are passed through the publishing server, but are themselves encrypted
and unable to be decrypted other than by the device retrieving the encryption key with the pairing code.
The only system information stored in plain text on the publishing server for each job is the system number,
number of keys in the job and number of doors in the job. This information is used only in the case of
technical problems that require us to aid you.
Put another way, the system description, address, client name, job details, key names, key sections, cut data,
door names, keying, pinning etc are all stored encrypted to an encryption key specific to the device to which
the job was published.
Furthermore, if you generate a new encryption key and pairing code for a device (See Configuring devices 84
), the device will be unable to communicate with the server to retrieve job data until the new pairing code is
entered and even then, existing jobs will be unreadable to the device because the encryption has changed,
and in this case if you want a device to see a job you must re-publish the job to that device.
ProMaster Key Manager 8 ("KM8")
KM8 users may get system updates via the publishing server instead of receiving the updates from you by
email.
KM8 users are configured and associated with your ProMaster Master Keying using a handshake process
during which a pairing code must be entered into KM8 and the pairing code is used to retrieve and decrypt an
encryption key specific to the KM8 installation.
For all subsequent communications to the KM8 (i.e. Sending systems), the data transmitted is encrypted to
the individual encryption key of the KM8 user.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 80 ProMaster Master Keying

The encryption keys for the KM8 user are passed through the publishing server, but are themselves encrypted
and unable to be decrypted other than by the KM8 user retrieving the encryption key with the pairing code.

The only system information stored in plain text on the publishing server for each system is the system
number, number of keys in the system and number of doors in the system. This information is used only in
the case of technical problems that require us to aid you.
Put another way, the system description, address, client name, job details, key names, door names, keying
etc are all stored encrypted to an encryption key specific to the KM8 user to which the system was published.
Furthermore, if you generate a new encryption key and pairing code for a KM8 user, the KM8 user will be
unable to communicate with the server to retrieve system data until the new pairing code is entered and even
then, existing systems will be unreadable to the KM8 user because the encryption has changed, and in this
case if you want a KM8 user to see a system you must re-publish the system to that KM8 user.
User permissions
There are 5 publishing permissions that you may apply to users.
Configure publishing: This permission allows the publishing service to be configured. See Configuring
publishing 80 .
Configure publishing devices: This permission allows devices to be configured. See Configuring
devices 84 .
Publish jobs to devices: This permissions allows jobs to be sent to the publishing service. See
Manufacture: Publish to device 223 .
Configure publishing for key manager users: This permission allows devices to be configured. See
Configuring Key Manager users 85 .
Publish systems to Key Manager users: This permissions allows systems to be sent to the publishing
114
service in Key Manager format. See Exporting to ProMaster Key Manager .
Support and maintenance
The publishing server is available to users of ProMaster Master Keying as a no-cost service that is available
while ProMaster Master Keying support and maintenance is current.
When your support and maintenance expires, publishing services are no longer available until support and
maintenance is renewed and the new registration information applied to ProMaster Master Keying.
Technical information
The URL of the publishing server is pmpublish01.whsoftware.com
Data is transmitted using HTTPS and operates on the standard port 443.

8.4.1 Configuring publishing

To start using mobile services you must first configure publishing. To perform this process your computer
must have internet access.
Configuring publishing, and indeed all mobile services, is available only when your registration support and
maintenance is current.
52
When a new registration is entered (See Change registration ), you will be prompted to update the
publishing information.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 81

If the registration information in your ProMaster Master Keying database is not the same as that on the
publishing server then publishing is disabled until you perform Configure publishing again.

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Mobile services then Configure publishing

Configuration status
The configuration status reports the current status of the publishing configuration for your database.
Some examples are:

Message Description
OK Publishing is configured and may be used.
Not configured Publishing has not been configured. To use publishing you must perform
the configure publishing process.
Reconfiguration required The registration information last sent to the publishing server is different
to your registration. To use publishing you must perform the configure
publishing process.
Maintenance and support expired Support and maintenance for your ProMaster Master Keying license has
expired, and publishing services are unavailable until support and
maintenance is renewed.
To use publishing you renew support and maintenance, apply your new
registration code to ProMaster Master Keying and then perform the
configure publishing process.

Publishing status
The publishing status reports the current status of the publishing configuration on the publishing server.
Some examples are:

Message Description
OK Publishing is configured and may be used.
Maintenance and support expired Support and maintenance for your ProMaster Master Keying license has
expired, and publishing services are unavailable until support and
maintenance is renewed.
To use publishing you renew support and maintenance, apply your new
registration code to ProMaster Master Keying and then perform the
configure publishing process.
Publishing service not contactable The publishing service could not be contacted. Most likely this means that
your computer does not have internet access or that your firewall or
security services are prohibiting access to the publishing server.
It is possible, but rare that this may result from the publishing server
being unavailable due to maintenance requirements.
Publishing service remote failure Communication with the publishing server failed. This is not an expected
condition and you should seek support.
Publishing service remote There has been an unexpected condition where your publishing data is not
registration mismatch. Seek consistent with that on the publishing server and this needs support
support. intervention to be resolved.
Not registered with publishing Publishing has not been registered on the publish server. To use
service publishing you must perform the configure publishing process.
Publishing service remote The registration information last sent to the publishing server is different
registration requires updating to your registration. To use publishing you must perform the configure
publishing process.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

82 ProMaster Master Keying

Publishing is disallowed The publishing server has disallowed your access. This may result from
tampering or unreasonable use or abuse of the publishing service.

Explanation of data fields

Publishing settings

Option Description
Allow publishing service to be This must be on for publishing to be available. If you turn this option off
used then publishing will not be available in ProMaster Master Keying.

Devices and Jobs - Device settings

Option Description
Restrict which devices are When this option is on, the devices available for publishing a job (See
available for job publishing by the Manufacture: Publish to device 223 ) are restricted to those devices
job factory permitted for the factory (See Configuring devices 84 ) used on the job.
This can be useful if you want to configure a factory for a mobile person
and specify that factory on the job, then with your device-factory
relationships configured you can make only the appropriate device
available.
Restrict which devices are When this option is on, the devices available for publishing a job (See
223
available for job publishing by the Manufacture: Publish to device ) are restricted to those devices
system type permitted for the system type (See Configuring devices 84 ) used on the
job. This can be useful restrict which devices are available by system
type.

Devices and Jobs - Device encryption key

These settings are about the pairing code generated for authorising a device to receive published data.

Option Description
Duration in minutes After you configure a device, a 12 character pairing code is displayed and
this code must be entered into the device. This setting determines the
default amount of time for which the pairing code is valid.
Allow the duration to be altered Normally, this should not be required and the pairing code should be
when configuring a device entered immediately. In the event that you need more flexibility in the
time from generating the pairing code to when it may no longer be used,
you may turn this option on and alter the next two settings.
Duration minimum The minimum duration that may be set for the life of a pairing code.
Duration maximum The maximum duration that may be set for the life of a pairing code.

Devices and Jobs - Job life on server

These settings determine the length of time that a published job is available on the publishing server for
download to the device.

Option Description
Job life in minutes The default value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
publishing server from publishing time.
Job life minimum The minimum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
publishing server from publishing time.
Job life maximum The maximum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
publishing server from publishing time.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 83

Allow the server job life to be If you want each device to have different values for the three previous
configured separately for each settings, turn this option on and configure the job life settings for each
device device.

Devices and Jobs - Job life on device

These settings determine the length of time that a published job is available on the device.
The job life on the device should be the same or greater than the job life on the server or the life of the job
on the device will ultimately be determined by the job life on the server.

Option Description
Job life in minutes The default value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
device from publishing time.
Job life minimum The minimum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
device from publishing time.
Job life maximum The maximum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
device from publishing time.
Allow the server job life to be If you want each device to have different values for the three previous
configured separately for each settings, turn this option on and configure the job life settings for each
device device.

Key Manager - Device encryption key

These settings are about the pairing code generated for authorising a Key Manager user to receive published
data.

Option Description
Duration in minutes After you configure a Key Manager user, a 12 character pairing code is
displayed and this code must be entered into the Key Manager. This
setting determines the default amount of time for which the pairing code
is valid.
Allow the duration to be altered Normally, this should not be required and the pairing code should be
when configuring a Key Manager entered immediately. In the event that you need more flexibility in the
time from generating the pairing code to when it may no longer be used,
you may turn this option on and alter the next two settings.
Duration minimum The minimum duration that may be set for the life of a pairing code.
Duration maximum The maximum duration that may be set for the life of a pairing code.

Key Manager - System life on the server

These settings determine the length of time that a published system is available on the publishing server for
download to the Key Manager.

Option Description
System life The default value for how long the system is available on the publishing
server from publishing time.
Allow the server system life to be If you want to alter how long the system may exist on the publishing
altered when sending a system server each time you send a system, you may turn this option on and alter
to Key Manager the next two settings.
System life minimum The minimum value for how long the system is available on the publishing
server from publishing time.
System life maximum The maximum value for how long the system is available on the publishing
server from publishing time.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 84 ProMaster Master Keying

8.4.2 Configuring devices

Device configuration is about registering your mobile devices in your ProMaster Master Keying database and
with the publishing service. To perform this process your computer must have internet access.
Configuring devices is available only when your registration support and maintenance is current.
The number of mobile devices permitted is controlled by your ProMaster Master Keying license. The number
of devices permitted is 3 device per concurrent user license.
Devices must install the ProMaster Mobile app from the Apple or Android app store.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Mobile services then Configure devices

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your user devices.

When adding a device, a 12 digit pairing code is shown when the device is saved and must be entered on the
device.
When editing an existing device, you may make it inactive.
When editing an existing device, you may choose Make new encryption and pairing code for this
device. A new 12 digit pairing code is shown when the device is saved and must be entered on the device.
Until the device re-registered, it will be unable to retrieve jobs.
Other functionality
Right click a device and choose Factories to choose which factories may send jobs to the device if this
restriction is enabled in the publishing settings.
Right click a device and choose System types to choose which system types may be sent to the device if this
restriction is enabled in the publishing settings.
Right click a device and choose Device info to retrieve information about the device from the publishing
server, including when it was last seen and when the device retrieved the encryption key.
Right click a device and choose Job Info to retrieve a list of jobs that have been sent to the device. Jobs up
to 1 year old are shown. See Device jobs 85 .
The last time a device was seen by the publishing server refreshes automatically when a device is accessed
however you options Refresh last seen time and Refresh all last seen times to force a data update.
An explanation of the options
Use the description field to record who the device is used by. This information must be unique and is shown
on the device also.
Device encryption
These settings are about the pairing code generated for authorising a device to receive published data.

Option Description
For how many minutes will the This value determines how long the device has to retrieve the encryption
key be able to be retrieved by the key by entering the 12 character pairing code.
device The default value and the permitted range are set by the publishing
settings.

Job life on server

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 85

These settings determine the length of time that a published job is available on the publishing server for
download to the device.

If permitted by the publishing settings, the values for the device may be entered and then will be used in place
of the global settings.

Option Description
Override the global settings for If you want the device to have different values for the global settings (See
the server job life when sending Configuring publishing 80 ), turn this option on and configure the job life
jobs to this device settings.
Job life in minutes The default value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
publishing server from publishing time.
Job life minimum The minimum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
publishing server from publishing time.
Job life maximum The maximum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
publishing server from publishing time.

Job life on device

These settings determine the length of time that a published job is available on the device.
If permitted by the publishing settings, the values for the device may be entered and then will be used in place
of the global settings

Option Description
Override the global settings for If you want the device to have different values for the global settings (See
the device job life when sending Configuring publishing 80 ), turn this option on and configure the job life
jobs to this device settings.
Job life in minutes The default value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
device from publishing time.
Job life minimum The minimum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
device from publishing time.
Job life maximum The maximum value, in minutes, for how long the job is available on the
device from publishing time.

8.4.2.1 Device jobs

The list of jobs sent to a device and details about the job including expiry dates and device download date.
If the job has been sent more than once, the latest details are shown.

8.4.3 Configuring Key Manager users

Key Manager user configuration is about registering a Key Manger user in your ProMaster Master Keying
database and with the publishing service. To perform this process your computer must have internet access.
Configuring Key Manger users is available only when your registration support and maintenance is current.
Getting started
· Open a system for the client whose Key Manger you want o configure

· From the System menu, select Mobile services then Configure Key Manager publishing

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your Key Manager users.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 86 ProMaster Master Keying

When adding a Key Manager user, a 12 digit pairing code is shown when the Key Manager Publishing is saved
and must be entered on the client's Key Manager.

When editing an existing Key Manager Publishing, you may make it inactive.
When editing an existing Key Manager Publishing, you may choose Make new encryption and pairing
code for this Key Manager publishing. A new 12 digit pairing code is shown when the Key Manager
publishing is saved and must be entered on the client's Key Manager. Until the Key Manger re-registered, it
will be unable to retrieve systems.
Normally each client will have a single Key Manger Publishing and unless you change the name then it
will be called "Default".
If your client has multiple Key Manager installations and some systems are sent to each location,
create a Key Manager Publishing for each Key Manager installation and permit the appropriate systems
for each Key Manager Publishing.
Other functionality
Right click a Key Manager Publishing and choose System to choose which system may be sent to the Key
Manager.
Right click a Key Manager Publishing and choose Key Manager Publishing info to retrieve information about
the Key Manager Publishing from the publishing server, including when it was last seen and when the Key
Manager retrieved the encryption key.
Right click a device and choose System Info to retrieve a list of systems that have been sent to the Key
Manager. See System Info 86.
The last time a Key Manager was seen by the publishing server refreshes automatically when a Key Manager
Publishing is accessed however you options Refresh last seen time and Refresh all last seen times to
force a data update.
An explanation of the options
Use the description field is used to name the Key Manager pairing when a client has multiple Key Manager
installations. This information must be unique and is shown on the Key Manager also.
Device encryption
These settings are about the pairing code generated for authorising a Key Manager to receive published data.

Option Description
For how many minutes will the This value determines how long the Key Manager has to retrieve the
key be able to be retrieved by the encryption key by entering the 12 character pairing code.
Key Manager The default value and the permitted range are set by the publishing
settings.

8.4.3.1 System Info

The list of systems sent to a Key Manager and details about the system including expiry dates and Key
Manager download date.
If the system has been sent more than once, the latest details are shown.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 87

8.5 Design module config

8.5.1 System types
System types are really important, so pay attention.
System types are a core concept in ProMaster Master Keying and define:
· The design module that is used to support the locking system.

· Parameters for the systems that belong to the system type, such as locking system, number of cuts, depth
and space data and defaults that are used when creating new systems.
· The manner in which systems are numbered for the system type.

· The relationship between locks and cylinders for the system type.

· Defaults for manufacturing (factory and days required).

ProMaster Master Keying does not automatically create system types because almost always there are
choices that you must make.
You may create as many system types as you like, and is particularly useful for design modules that support a
diverse range of products to create system types for each product and for each use the functionality
(described below) to restrict each system type to only the applicable key sections.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select System types

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your system types.

Adding a system type

When you add a system type, you must select:
· The design module

· The lock system (on some design modules)

· The card for depths and spaces.

Once a system type is created, the design module, lock system and card cannot be changed. If you
then use the system type, and code a system on the wrong lock system or card, the only way to
correct this is to remove the system coding and change the system to a correct system type. The
choice of card (on applicable design modules) determines the depth symbols available.
Explanation of data fields

Data field Description

System type name The name of the system type. Each name must be unique.
It is a good idea to pick a meaningful system type name. So, instead of
calling a system type "Inline", which really tells you nothing, how about
something like "Sargent 6 Pin" (assuming it uses card 589 and has 6
cuts).
Active If you make the system type inactive, it will not be available for new
systems.
Starting characters Used to generate system numbers. The starting characters for the new
system number. E.G. ABC
Note: Some manufacturers will instruct you on system numbering
conventions for their locking systems

© 2019 WH Software Limited

88 ProMaster Master Keying

Pad length to Used to generate system numbers. Used in conjunction with the field
above. For example if this value is 6, then the system numbers generated
will be ABC001, ABC002 etc.
Cylinder position A lock (let's call it an XYZ) may be fitted to a door, but depending on the
locking system one of several cylinders may be fitted. Each lock has 100
slots where the cylinder part codes for a system type are associated with
the lock parts. So, our XYZ lock may use slot 1 for Sargent 6 Pin, slot 2 for
EVVA DPE, slot 5 for Kaba Expert.
This value is used when creating locks and defining the relationship
between locks and cylinders. See Entering locks 58
· The actual slot number you use for a system type is not important,
provided you do not alter it after you begin defining the relationship
between locks and cylinders.
· Make a selection from the drop down list for the lock cylinder ranking.
The list shows you where each slot is already used to assist you in
avoiding duplications.
· If you only ever record cylinders against your doors, and you never use,
record, supply or otherwise think about a lock that may have a cylinder
installed in it, then the lock cylinder rank has not meaning to you.
Default days for job When a job is made, the job due date is set automatically based on the
current date and the "Default days for job" defined by the system type.
· Enter your expected lead time in this field.
· Unless you work with known or significant lead times, you may choose
to set this to 1.
Default factory You may specify a default factory for this system type that will be used
automatically when creating jobs. This is particularly useful if you
manufacture one type of locking system at one location and another type
of locking system at another location.
Key sections Some design modules allow you to restrict the key section families that
are available to each system type at the time when you create a system
design.
· To restrict the profiles available, check the key section families that are
allowed.
· If none are checked then all will be available.
Advanced parameters Premium and Manufacturer edition only.
Various parameters that control which data is mandatory when jobs are
released to manufacturing.
Test key method Premium and Manufacturer edition only, and only if test key functionality is
included in your license.
Determines what type of test keys will be generated when a job is
released to manufacturing. Unless special circumstances exist, "Method
1" is the correct choice if you want the test key calculation to be
performed and "None" if you do not want it.
Integration Manufacturer edition only.
Some parameters that can be used defined for integrating with
manufacturing processed.

System type defaults

On the right side of the system type screen are parameters specific to the design module, lock system and
card.
See the design module specific information in the System type setup topic under the specific design
233
module here: Design modules

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 89

8.5.2 Key colours

Many locking systems support coloured key heads. Some lock systems support more than one colour per key
head.
ProMaster Master Keying lets you define colours for each design module that uses colours. For each colour
you must also define a short name for the colour. For example, for the colour "Fluro Yellow" you may define
a short name "FlY".
When multiple colours exist on a key head, the short names are used to save space. Say you had a key
with three colours: Fluro Yellow + Light Green + Black. That's rather verbose, so using the short names
you define, ProMaster Master Keying will show the colour something like this: Fly-LtG-Blk

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Key colours

· Select the design module you want to alter. The list of design modules contains all design modules you
have available in your license that use key colours.
Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your colours.

· Enter your colour and short colour. Short colours are required for design modules that have multi-colour
keys. Try to keep the colours short and short colours very short - if you make them too long they will be
truncated on screen and on printouts.
Other functionality
Click the Options button then Export csv to export the data to a csv file. See Exporting design module
data 98 .
An explanation of the options
· Within each design module, each colour may appear only once

Each time a colour is used, it is referenced to the colours you define here. So, if you make a colour
called Yellow, then use that colour on some keys, then later decide to be smart by changing the colour
to Red, what you have done is alter every key that uses the colour. So to put it another way, then you
click Edit to alter a colour, do so with the intention of fixing a spelling mistake or if applicable the short
colour, but not to completely change a colour.
Fixing duplicate colours
You may do a lovely job of setting up your colours, then one day you import a system from another user who
has defined the colours differently. ProMaster Master Keying does not have any magic linguistic powers, so it
creates any colours required by the import rather than applying rules to detect misspelt colours. Now for
example you have Yello and Yellow, and you really don't want the misspelt Yello. Here's what you do:
· Select the colour that is the erroneous duplicate.

· Right click on it and select "Remove this colour and replace it with another colour"

· Select the correctly spelt colour from the list provided.

· Enter the confirmation requested, pausing to ensure you have selected the correct colour for the
replacement.
· Click OK to apply the change. Everywhere that the replaced colour is used is changed to the replacement
colour, then the replaced colour is removed.
This affects every key in the design module using the replaced colour. If you do something stupid like
replacing "red" with "yellow" there is no going back.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 90 ProMaster Master Keying

8.5.2.1 Importing key colours a csv file

If you have a CSV file with key colour information you can import this data.
299
Read the topic Key colour import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
Getting started

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Key colours

· Select the design module you want to alter. The list of design modules contains all design modules you
have available in your license that use key colours.
Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 91

· Click Next

Ready to finish

A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

8.5.3 Key sections and keyways

Key sections and keyways are used by most design modules are exclusive to each design module.
It is extremely important to configure your key section families correctly, and don't mess with them after
unless you are sure of what you are doing.
For clarity: The key section is the shape of the warding on a key. I.e. It is like taking a cross-section through
the key blank. The keyway is the hole in the cylinder core that the key goes into and refers to the warding on
that hole.
By far the biggest problem we see in ProMaster Master Keying is incorrectly configured key section
families. The reasons why are varied, but the importance of getting it right is paramount. Get it right
before you start using the key sections.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Key sections and keyways

· Select the design module you want to alter. The list of design modules contains all design modules you
have available in your license that use key sections.
· For design modules that use rotor stators, see the topic Kaba rotor stators 93 .

Other functionality

You may right click key section and choose Replace key section family from the pop-up menu to remove
the selected keys section family and change all systems that use it to another family. See further down this
topic for details.
You may right click key section and choose Systems on this key section from the pop-up menu to see a list
of systems that use the key section family.
You may right click key section and choose Print key section family from the pop-up menu to produce a
matrix report off the key sections and keyways in the family.
Click the Options button then Print to produce a report of key section families returned in the search.
Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your key section families.

· When you add a key section family, the behaviour differs between design modules.

· For modules that always or almost always don't use key section families, you are first asked for a key
section and then a key section and keyway are created with that name, and often that is the only
information required.
· For design modules where it is more normal to have multiple key sections or keyways in a family, you are
presented with the "New key section-keyway family" screen. This is a "quick start" option - anything you do
here can be altered in the full editor so don't panic.
Each time a key section is used, it is referenced to the key sections you define here. If you make a
change to a key section family, it affects all the systems using those key sections.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

92 ProMaster Master Keying

Exercise the utmost care when making changes as the change may affect many systems and some
changes are not reversible.

New key section-keyway family

This is the quick start for adding a key section family.
The top key section on this screen is the key section that forms the root of the family.
You must enter the top key section and one keyway as a minimum, and indeed for a single key section and
keyway this is all you will do.

If there are other key sections and keyways, add them on the corresponding lists, one per line.
After you click OK you will be placed in the editor.
Key sections and keyways editor
The editor is a moderately complex screen where you can add, remove and edit key sections and keyways,
sort key sections, sort keyways, and change which keys sections fit each keyway.
Any key sections and keyways that are not assigned are indicated with a warning graphic.
Right click on the editor where the key section and keyway intersect for a pop-up menu with more options.
When you "find" for a key section or keyway the matching items are indicated with an arrow graphic.
The root key section is always first, but all other key sections and all keyways may be rearranged using the
sort options.
The family description is optional, but can be useful for clarification if you have key section families belonging
to a variety of lock systems.
When you save a key section family, it marked as complete if all key sections are assigned to a keyway and
all keyways are assigned a key section. If the family is incomplete, fix it.
Users of previous versions of ProMaster Master Keying should note that all functions are integrated into
the editor instead of using popup task windows as in the previous versions.
Replace key section family
This option is used to replace an entire key section family with another, and make the changes to all systems
using the replaced key section family.
To give an example of replacing a key section family, imagine this scenario:
Let's say you had a key section called ABC with profile DEF beneath it.
Now you import a system from another ProMaster Master-Keying user and because their key sections are
wrongly named, the system import has created let's say ABC1 with DEF1 beneath it.
What we want to do is change all occurrences of ABC1 to ABC, and change all occurrences of DEF1 to DEF.
Here's how:
· Select key section family ABC1, right click, select Replace key section family

· The Replace Key Section Family window opens. Click Select replacement key section family then
select the key section family that is to replace ABC1, in this example ABC.
· The key sections from the replacement family are loaded.

· Now you define the relationship between the old (replaced) key sections and the new (replacement) key
sections.
Use the two lists and the Assign replacement key section button to create a mapping from each replaced
key section to the appropriate replacement key section.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 93

Read the warning. Don't stuff it up.

If the key sections that you are working with are anything but trivial, click the Print button for a preview, print
the report, then examine it carefully for mistakes.
· You must enter the specified text before proceeding.

· When you are ready to proceed, click OK.

Now, key and each system using each of the old key sections will have its references changed to that of the
new key sections. This may take a little time. Each system that is changed will be marked to indicate that it
needs its coding checked. Finally, the replaced key sections, which are no longer in use, will be removed.

Interchangeable Core
In some design modules (E.g. Medeco Original 10, Medeco Biaxial 10, Interchangeable Core) the key section
properties include an option for the core removal type.
Most key sections will be "Standard" but for families that have other key sections for core removal purposes
(E.g. Yale long key, Schlage long key) you must set the core removal type correctly on those key sections.
See also the properties in the cylinder setup for defining the cylinder core removal method.

8.5.4 Kaba rotor stators

Much like key sections and keyways are defined for most design modules, for Kaba ACE, Kaba Expert, Kaba
Expert Plus, Kaba Gemini and Kaba Quattro there are rotor stators.
These are shipped with ProMaster Master Keying so there should no need to ever alter them. The
availability of rotor stators is defined by the locking product - there will not be any added, hence no
reason to make changes.
Getting started

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Key sections and keyways

· Select the design module you want from the ones listed above.

The corresponding Rotors screen opens.

8.5.5 Lists
Lists are the mechanism by which lock manufacturers may control the top master key for their locking
products to ensure geographic separation and avoid system interchangeability.
They control the way ProMaster Master Keying creates the TMK for your system and which positions on the
code may be progressed to generate permutations.
Lists are used primarily in high end lock systems that are positioned to the customer as having unique or
restricted key codes.
WH Software Limited does not supply the list data. List data is always supplied and maintained by your
lock manufacturer.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 94 ProMaster Master Keying

8.5.5.1 Managing Abloy Novel lists

Getting started

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Lists then Import and maintain Abloy Novel lists.

If you have permissions to setup lists, then you will be able to access this screen from the list selection when
creating the design for a system.
Managing lists
The "Manage Lists" window shows lists available to you.
The graphic indicates the list level (I.e. how many positions are under your control).

On the list value, "X" positions are under your control and other positions are fixed.
Each list is for the key section shown adjacent to the list.
Lists are created by the manufacturer as split-able (or not) and reuse-able (or not).
Split-able lists, provided they are not used, may be split into a number of smaller lists. If the list has been
split, it becomes unavailable for systems, and the sub-lists beneath it are available.
Reuse-able lists may be used for multiple systems.
Importing lists
· Click the Import button then select the file supplied by the lock manufacturer.

The lists in the file are imported and shown.

91
Note: The key sections required by the list must already exist. See Key sections and keyways
Splitting and joining lists
Splitting a list is the process whereby you take a list and make it into a number of smaller lists. Joining is the
opposite of splitting. Large lists allow systems with many keys whereas splitting a large list into smaller lists
small lists allow more systems but with fewer keys each.
· To split a list, highlight the list you want split then click the Split from left or Split from right button.

· To join a list, highlight the split list that you want to join and click the Join button.

A list may be split and re-split until it consists of single codes.

It is recommended that you consider the likely use of each list when you receive it, and perform just
enough splitting to achieve a useful mix of system sizes.
Rules regarding splitting and joining lists:
o A list may not be split if it has been used.

o A list may not be joined if any of the split portions have been used.

o A list may not be joined if any of the split portions have been split.

Emailing the list usage

The Email button allows you to send a report of all your lists, their splits and their usage to the lock
manufacturer. You may be asked for this information by the lock manufacturer.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 95

8.5.5.2 Managing Abloy Protec lists

Getting started

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Lists then Import and maintain Abloy Protec lists.

If you have permissions to setup lists, then you will be able to access this screen from the list selection when
creating the design for a system.
Managing lists
The "Manage Lists" window shows lists available to you.
The graphic indicates the list level (I.e. how many positions are under your control).

On the list value, "X" positions are under your control and other positions are fixed.
Each list is for the key section shown adjacent to the list.
Lists are created by the manufacturer as split-able (or not) and reuse-able (or not).
Split-able lists, provided they are not used, may be split into a number of smaller lists. If the list has been
split, it becomes unavailable for systems, and the sub-lists beneath it are available.
Reuse-able lists may be used for multiple systems.
Importing lists
· Click the Import button then select the file supplied by the lock manufacturer.

The lists in the file are imported and shown.

91
Note: The key sections required by the list must already exist. See Key sections and keyways
Splitting and joining lists
Splitting a list is the process whereby you take a list and make it into a number of smaller lists. Joining is the
opposite of splitting. Large lists allow systems with many keys whereas splitting a large list into smaller lists
small lists allow more systems but with fewer keys each.
· To split a list, highlight the list you want split then click the Split from left or Split from right button.

· To join a list, highlight the split list that you want to join and click the Join button.

A list may be split and re-split until it consists of single codes.

It is recommended that you consider the likely use of each list when you receive it, and perform just
enough splitting to achieve a useful mix of system sizes.
Rules regarding splitting and joining lists:
o A list may not be split if it has been used.

o A list may not be joined if any of the split portions have been used.

o A list may not be joined if any of the split portions have been split.

Emailing the list usage

The Email button allows you to send a report of all your lists, their splits and their usage to the lock
manufacturer. You may be asked for this information by the lock manufacturer.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 96 ProMaster Master Keying

8.5.5.3 Managing Kaba ACE lists

Getting started

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Lists then Import and maintain Kaba ACE lists.

If you have permissions to setup lists, then you will be able to access this screen from the list selection when
creating the design for a system.
Each list may be used only once.
Make a selection of the type of lists you want to see (Serial perms, Base perms LEFT, Base perms RIGHT).
Managing lists

The "Manage Lists" window shows lists available to you.

The capacity (number of positions that may be progressed) are shown for Left only, Right only and total (Left
+ Right).
The number of rotor stators allowed is shown.
If the list is for serial permutation the Kaba system number is shown.
Importing lists
· Click the Import button then select the file supplied by the lock manufacturer.

The lists in the file are imported and shown.

Emailing the list usage
The Email button allows you to send a report of all your lists, their splits and their usage to the lock
manufacturer. You may be asked for this information by the lock manufacturer.
Serial perms
Like Base perms, serial perms also show if the entry has been used.
If a serial perm has been used on a system as the TMK (i.e. A system using a serial perm but with a single
key) then that system number is shown.

If a serial perm has been used on a system that has been created as a KD System, then the Used by
system value is shown as "KD System"
If a serial perm has been allocated to a KD system, and then subsequently removed (either the key was
removed or the system coding was deleted), the serial perm is not released to be re-used. This would not
happen under normal circumstances, but may happen during the creating and deletion of test systems. In this
scenario it is necessary to recover the serial perm values. To do this, chose "Serial perms" at the top of the
window, then right-click on the list of serial perms and choose the option Recover serial perms that were
allocated to keys and the keys no longer exist.
The recovery process should not be performed whilst other people are performing coding on Kaba ACE
KD systems.

8.5.5.4 Managing Kaba Expert Plus lists

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Lists then Import and maintain Kaba Expert Plus lists.

If you have permissions to setup lists, then you will be able to access this screen from the list selection when
creating the design for a system.
Each list may be used only once.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Administering ProMaster Master Keying 97

Managing lists
The "Manage Lists" window shows lists available to you.

The capacity (number of positions that may be progressed) are shown for Left only, Right only and total (Left
+ Right).
The number of rotor stators allowed is shown.
If the list is for serial permutation the Kaba system number is shown.
Importing lists

· Click the Import button then select the file supplied by the lock manufacturer.

The lists in the file are imported and shown.

Emailing the list usage
The Email button allows you to send a report of all your lists, their splits and their usage to the lock
manufacturer. You may be asked for this information by the lock manufacturer.

8.5.5.5 Managing Lockwood MT5 lists

Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Lists then Import and maintain Lockwood MT5 lists.

If you have permissions to setup lists, then you will be able to access this screen from the list selection when
creating the design for a system.
Each list may be used multiple times.
Managing lists
The "Manage Lists" window shows lists available to you.

On the list value, "X" positions are under your control and other positions are fixed.
Each list is for the key section shown adjacent to the list.
Importing lists
· Click the Import button then select the file supplied by the lock manufacturer.

The lists in the file are imported and shown.

91
Note: The key sections required by the list must already exist. See Key sections and keyways
Emailing the list usage
The Email button allows you to send a report of all your lists, their splits and their usage to the lock
manufacturer. You may be asked for this information by the lock manufacturer.

8.6 Exporting data

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 98 ProMaster Master Keying

8.6.1 Exporting parameter data to a csv file

Various types of data that ProMaster Master Keying uses may be exported and imported via csv files.

In addition to the export from the file menu described here, within most of the search screens for each type of
data there is an menu option "Export csv" on the options button that invokes this export with the types of data
refined to those related to the screen from where you chose to export data.
Getting started
· From the File menu, select Export then Export parameter data (CSV).

A simple wizard steps you through the process of choosing where the data will be written, choosing which
data to export and choosing export options.

Multiple types of data may be exported at the same time. Each type of data is written to a separate file,
named according to the type of data.
When choosing the range of data to export, you may right click on the list for selection options. The types of
data are defined in logical groups allowing you to select or deselect the whole group in a single operation.
Notes
When exporting lock or cylinder images, CSV files are produced and the data files for the images and
documents are written to sub folders beneath the export location.
Clearly any notes that are stored in rich text format are not suitable for exporting to a CSV file and these data
fields will not be included in the export.

8.6.2 Exporting design module data

Some design module specific data that ProMaster Master Keying uses may be exported and imported via csv
files.
From the place where you want to export the data (e.g. Key colours), choose the menu option "Export csv" on
the options button to invokes this export.
A simple wizard steps you through the process of choosing where the data will be written, choosing which
data to export and choosing export options.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Using ProMaster Master Keying

Part

9
 100 ProMaster Master Keying

9 Using ProMaster Master Keying

This section covers all information about managing systems.

9.1 Clients
Each system belongs to a client. A client may have more than one system.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Clients

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your clients.

Other functionality
You may right click a client and choose Client signatories from the pop-up menu to maintain client-level
101
signatories. See Client signatories .
Click the Options button then Export csv to export the data to a csv file. See Exporting parameter data to a
csv file 98.
Click the Options button then Import csv to import data from a csv file. See Import clients from a csv
file 100
An explanation of the options
When adding a client or editing an existing client, the only mandatory data field is the client name. However
is is good practice to record as much information as accurately as possible.

The notes tab provides a space for you to record miscellaneous information about the client.
The systems tab shows the systems that are associated with the client.
Notes
If you have a system open and permissions to edit the client (see Security groups 45 ) then the client for the
current system will be editable from the System menu then Client.

9.1.1 Import clients from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with client information you can import this data.
291
Read the topic Client import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The name field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the client is new (and
therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Clients

Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 101

· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.

The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

9.2 Client signatories

Client signatories are much the same as system signatories (see Signatories 115) but they are associated with
the client and linked to each system. When a client signatory is linked to a system it is editable only as a
client signatory and appears read-only when looking at system signatories.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Clients

· Search for a client.

· Right click on a client and choose Client signatories.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 102 ProMaster Master Keying

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your client signatories for the selected client.

Explanation of data fields

The signatory name is unique within each client.

Data field Description

Mandatory signatory The signatory must appear on each job
Expiry date The date after which that the signatory is no longer allowed to authorise
orders.
Add this signatory to new All signatories with this option checked will be added to the system when
systems you add a new system for the client. This is particularly useful for
institutions that have dozens or even hundreds of master-key systems and
are rolling out new master-key systems with their building program.
Signature A place to store an image of the signatory's signature.
Photo A place to store a photo of the signatory.
Notes A place for you to record miscellaneous information about the signatory.
Notes
Inside ProMaster Master Keying, the client signatory is linked to the corresponding signatories on each system.
When you make a change tot he client signatory (e.g. change phone number or signature), it affects all the
associated systems.
If you have a system open and permissions to edit the client (see Security groups 45 ) then the client
signatories for the current system will be editable from the System menu then Client signatories.

9.3 Systems
Before any work may be done on a system, you must first open it.
If the system is open by another user you will be denied access to it.
Getting started

· From the System menu, select Open system

Searching for systems

ProMaster Master Keying offers a broad range of search criteria from which you may enter as little or as
much information as you require, then click the Find button to show systems that match your criteria.
Most search values are self explanatory, so only the slightly tricky ones are mentioned here.

Option Description
Status Normally only Active systems are returned. Change this value if you
want to find closed systems or system snapshots.
Show only systems with pending This option is useful for work flowing your coding staff. It allows you to
jobs that require coding find systems that are not completely coded, but have a job that is in the
data entry state (if you have not turned on the "Coding" status in the
application parameter "Send jobs to coding when released if coding is
required") or are in the coding required state.
System type Allows you to specify the system type of the system you are searching
for. Also enables searching by key section. Additionally you may select
from the list a design module instead of a system type, thereby
searching all system types for that design module.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 103

Key number The system must have a key with the exact Key number that you enter,
or if you have enabled Key stamping in your application parameters then
the key number you enter must match either the key number or the key
stamping of a key within the system.
System key section You may select the System key section for systems that will be located.
You must first select the System type.
Key key section The system must have a key with the selected key section, and if the key
number was entered then it must match the same key as the key number.
Code Allows you to specify a Key code for the search.
Look in change keys also Normally the key search excludes change keys (I.e. Masters, selective,
control keys etc only). Turn this option on to search in change keys also.

In performing a search, ProMaster Master Keying returns systems that match all criteria, so while
entering more information may narrow your search, it is also possible that you may refine the search
so much that nothing matches.
System security
If you do not have security rights to Open high security systems, then only low security systems will be
shown.
If you do not have security rights to Open systems based on its design, then some search criteria will be
unavailable.
When you open the system, any assigned Security categories are validated against your security category
rights, and if you do not have the necessary permissions then you will be unable to open the system.

9.3.1 Creating a system

The process of creating a new system walks you through a step-by-step wizard, asking you questions about
each aspect of the system. Everything you enter here may be modified later, so don't panic if you don't have
all information.

Getting started
· From the System menu, select New system

Creating a new system

Step 1: Client Details
This information is about the client who owns the master-key system. This may be the same as the system
address, but in the case of large clients often will not.
You always have the choice to make a new client by entering the client's details, however, if the client already
has a master-key system with you, please don't enter the client again. In this case, choose the option Select
an existing client and click the button Select existing client to choose the client.
The thing to remember here is that a single client may have many master-key systems, and by entering the
client just once you maintain better records, make it easier to synchronise signatories between systems, make
client level signatories possible and make exporting data for key management easier.
There are numerous application parameters that allow you to control which of the client fields are
mandatory when adding a client for your system. This allows you to enforce data requirements, but
remember that making field mandatory when there is no data available will result in users entering
meaningless information to satisfy the mandatory field requirements.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

104 ProMaster Master Keying

Step 2: System identification

Select the System type for this new system. If you are uncertain at this time, make an educated guess.
Provide the system has not been coded, the system type may be changed later.
The System number uniquely identifies the system. Enter a system number for this system, or click
Generate next to make one for you (you may define the way system numbers are generated as part of the
system type setup).
Stamping is optional, and for most systems will not be used. System stamping allows you to define a name
for a system to me marked on keys and cylinders as an alternative to the system number.

For the System description, enter a description of the master-key system that provides some meaning as to
its location and/or client and/or building.
Step 3: Address and contact
Enter the address of the installation, and any other contact information you have.
Step 4: System Details
Installed on: Alter the installation date to reflect when the system is likely to be installed. In the future you
may do some systems analysis to determine the level of system activity and the age of systems, so this date
will become important.
Keying type: Keying type serves a few purposes. First, on some design modules it is used to select a keying
type that allows construction keying. Second, it allows you to classify systems for analysis purposes, and third
it may be used as an indication to the type of coding required when later the coding is performed. See Keying
types 53
Use key and door issue numbers: Normally this option would be left on. Sometimes records are so poor
on old paper based systems or from basic master-key software that there are no records of issue numbers. In
that situation you may want to turn this option off so that future keys and doors are not marked with an issue
number.
Allow door hardware recording: If you turn this option on, you will be able within this system to record
door hardware items other than the locking products.
User must have high security access to open this system: Each user has a flag as to whether they
may access high security systems. That flag is matched with this one to determine if the user may open the
system. This is a bit of a blunt instrument, and you may wish to consider Security categories (described later)
for more granular control over system security.
Use DHI key and door numbering: Defaults according to to the application parameter Terminology. If it
is set to USA then this parameter will default to on.
Marking 1, 2, 3: Additional marking parameters available on premium and manufacturer editions. These
values are used in the job XML files.
Step 5: Signatories And Orders
Number of signatories required to order keys: This is the global number of signatories required to order
any any key, provided that there is not individual signatory security in place for the key.
Type of key signatory security: This option controls the type of signatory security that is applied to the
115
keys. See Signatories for an explanation of the choices.
Number of signatories required to order doors: This is the global number of signatories required to
order any any door, provided that there is not individual signatory security in place for the door.
Type of door signatory security: This option controls the type of signatory security that is applied to the
115
doors. See Signatories for an explanation of the choices.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 105

Quantity of each key to order: This number is used when adding keys. If you set this to 2, then as you
add keys, the default quantity of each to order will be 2. If you don't like ordering keys at the same time as
you create them, make this option zero. The default for this option comes from the corresponding Application
parameter 49.
Quantity of each door to order: This is for doors as the option above is for keys.
Step 6: System notes
This is where you may record a virtually unlimited amount of notes about the system.
Step 7: Job Notes

Any notes you enter in the job notes are copied into each new job as the default notes. If the customer has
particular job instructions that you want to accompany each job, this is the place to record them.
Step 8: Security
Security categories are used to restrict access to systems and correspondingly grant access to particular
users.
Select any security categories that you want to apply to this system.
If the current user is not permitted to access systems without a security category then you must select one or
more security categories. A user is permitted to assign only those security categories to which the user is a
member.
Here's how it works: If a system is associated with a security category, then only users who are in a security
group associated with the same security category may open that system. A system may be associated with
several security categories, thereby allowing several groups of users access, and similarly a security group
may be associated with several security categories, allowing access to any systems in those security
categories.
See Security categories 48 to define security categories.
Step 9: Finish
Click Finish to save the new system.

9.3.2 Creating a system from hierarchy quantities

Creating a system from hierarchy quantities is much the same as creating a system normally, with an
additional process where you define a system based on the structure of the keys.
103
See Creating a system for an explanation of all options not specific to hierarchy quantities.
Getting started
· From the System menu, select New system from hierarchy quantities

Creating a new system from hierarchy quantities

Step 2: System identification
There is an additional requirement on this step to choose the factory that will be used for making a job to
order the keys and doors.
Step 4: System Details
Use DHI key and door numbering: Defaults according to to the application parameter Terminology. If it
is set to USA then this parameter will default to on.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

106 ProMaster Master Keying

Level: If DHI numbering is not being used, leave this at 0. If DHI numbering is used, choose the level you
require for the system (from 2 to 7).

Step 9: Define key hierarchy

If you are using DHI numbering, all levels are created with a quantity 1, otherwise just the first key "GMK" is
created.
In defining the key hierarchy, you build a structure of master keys, change keys and selective keys.
For each key you specify the naming convention, description, quantity to create, and quantity of each to order.

For DHI systems with a simple hierarchy, all you need to do is change the quantity of each key that is required
and if doors are to be created, select the lock to be used (on the "Change' key node)
Then, use the Add master, Add change and Add selective buttons to build up a structure of your system.
If your system is asymmetric you can add multiple masters under any master to build the structure.
Step 10: Finish
Click Finish to save the new system.
How it works - International
There are a number of parameters that control how the keys are generated. Most settings are stored so that
next time you add a key (in the current system or another one) your preferences are remembered.

Setting Description
Starting characters The characters you want at the start of the key number. If the option
"Create a single key" is chosen then this value is the entire key number,
otherwise the rest of the key number is generated according to your other
choices.
Create a single key... Available when the quantity is set to 1, this makes a single master key.
This is particularly useful for asymmetric systems for creating masters
with each branch with a different name.
Quantity of keys to create... The number of keys to create. 1 or more. If the value is 1 for master
keys, the option "Create a single key" is available
Numbering style Numeric: Numbers keys using the sequence 1,2,3...
Alpha: Numbers keys using the sequence A, B, C...
Length to make the number When numbering style is numeric, this is the minimum length to use
forthe numeric portion.
E.g.: Starting characters = "MK", Numbering style Numeric, Length = 4,
then key numbers will be MK0001, MK0002 etc.
Number from the key above For an example, the master above is "MK", numeric, Length = 0, quantity
3, resulting in keys MK1, MK2, MK3.
Now make a change key node, starting "C", numeric, Length = 0, quantity
2, separator "."
For each of the choices, here are the key names produced:
Do not use it to make this key: C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
Place it before the number of this key: C1.1, C1.2, C2.1, C2.2, C3.1,
C3.2
Place it after the number of this key: C1.1, C2.1, C1.2, C2.2, C1.3,
C2.3
Separate the number from the This is the character to place between the key number and the number
key above with this character from the key above if it is being used. In the example C1.1 the separator
used is "."
If alpha numbering is used for masters and numeric for change keys then
it may be desirable to have the separator blank.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 107

Description The description to use for each key.

Quantity of each key to order This will add the keys to a job to be manufactured if you enter a value
other than 0.

For change keys, there is an option to create a door. The door settings are:
Setting Description
Create a door for each key Select this option to have the doors created
Numbering Generate: The door number is formed from the door prefix and then the
key number.
Same as key: The door number is made the same as the key number.
Sequential: The door number is created sequentially. 1,2,3... and is
prefixed by value of Door prefix.
Door prefix The starting characters if the numbering is Generate or Sequential.
Stamping Key number: The stamping is set to the key number.
Door number: The stamping is set to the door number (which could be
the same as the key number).
Sequential: The door number is created sequentially. 1,2,3...
Description The description to use for each door.
Area The area to use for each door.
Lock The lock or cylinder to use on the door. Choose from the list of values
already used or click Select lock.

How it works - DHI

The structure of the system is created from the DHI level selected in Step 9.
For each branch of the system you may specify the quantity. All other settings are unavailable as the number
automatically follows DHI conventions.
For change keys you can specify other parameters for how the door is generated.
You can add additional branched for masters if your system is asymmetric.
You can add additional branched for change keys if some of the corresponding doors use different parameters
(typically a different lock).

9.3.3 Creating a system from Excel

ProMaster Master Keying ships with some Excel spreadsheets that are used as templates. You may send one
of these templates to your customer, and when you receive the file back with the doors and keys entered then
you can use that to create a new system.
Creating a system from an Excel file is much the same as creating a system normally, many of the the
answers are from the Excel and also the doors/keys/keying and job are created after the system.
103
See Creating a system for an explanation of all options not specific to the Excel import.
About templates

© 2019 WH Software Limited

108 ProMaster Master Keying

Two templates are provided. They are stored in the Templates folder beneath the ProMaster Master Keying
program folder (e.g. C:\Program Files (x86)\WH Software\PM8\Templates)

These are PM8System_500Doors_200Keys.xlsx and PM8System_3000Doors_1000Keys.xlsx. The only

difference is the number of columns and rows that have been formatted. Why not format many thousands of
columns and rows? Because it makes the file much larger and that makes emailing it more troublesome.
The templates have specific formatting to present the data correctly, and also to ensure it may be read into
ProMaster Master Keying. The spreadsheets have protection to prohibit changes to areas that would interfere
with the import process.

Premium and Manufacturer edition only: There is a template definition provided for reading old PM7 "xls" files.
This will read the first page only. This should be used for transitional purposes only and all future work
should use the PM8 excel template definition. The PM7 template definition is for new systems only, not for
extending or for exporting.
Using the templates
Entering doors
Doors are entered one per line. The cells on the first line of doors have notes that you may read in Excel on
how to enter the data. You may leave blank lines between doors to improve readability, however a gap of
more than 4 lines is considered to be the end, and any doors after such a gap will be ignored.
Entering Keys
Keys are entered one per column. The cells for the first key have notes that you may read in Excel on how to
enter the data. You may leave blank columns between keys to improve readability, however a gap of more
than 4 columns is considered to be the end, and any keys after such a gap will be ignored.
Entering keying
At the intersection of each key and door, place an X if the key is to operate that door.
Before you import the system into ProMaster Master Keying
When you get your file back from your customer, here's some do's and don't's:
· Do save the file onto your computer.

· Don't save it in the folder where the templates are stored.

· Do open it in Excel before you import it into ProMaster Master Keying and study it for mistakes. If it has
errors, the import will reject it, so best you find them first.
· Do not leave the spreadsheet open in Excel when you perform the import into ProMaster Master Keying.

Getting started
· From the System menu, select New system from Excel file

Creating a new system from Excel file

Step 0: File
Select the Excel file to import and choose the template definition that corresponds to the file you are
308
importing. See Excel template definition for information about making your own definitions to match a
custom Excel file layout.
After opening the file, its contents are analysed and if there are errors they are reported. Errors must be
corrected before importing.
The contents of the file provide the answers for values on the next steps.
What next

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 109

After the import is complete, review your doors, keys and keying, then proceed to coding and manufacturing
as you would with a system you entered yourself.

9.3.4 Modifying a system

Almost any of the information you enter when you create a system may later be modified. There are some
constraints applied to ensure data integrity, such as:
· Once the system has been coded you may not change the System type.

· Once the system has been exported to a client using ProMaster Key Manager you may not change the
System number.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Modify system

Explanation of data fields

The majority of the data shown on the various tabs is the same as that when you create a system. For a
103
description of the various fields, read the topic Creating a system .
Here's a description of data fields that are available when modifying the system that were not available during
creation:

Data field Description

Which software is the client using This is where you choose the version of ProMaster Key Manager that the
for managing their keys client is using for managing their master-key system.
Versions prior to ProMaster Key Manager 7 are not supported due to the
changes in field lengths and Unicode character set.
Original system number If the system was known by another number previously, you may record it
here.
Allow "Coding complete" override Available only for legacy systems, not those build in ProMaster, allows you
to continue to work on systems with errors. See Coding complete
193
override

9.3.5 Importing a system extension from Excel

114
ProMaster Master Keying allows you to export your system to Excel (see Exporting to Excel ), then re-
import the Excel file, adding any new doors and keys to your system.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Import system extension from Excel file

Importing data
Select the Excel file to import and choose the template definition that corresponds to the file you are
308
importing. See Excel template definition for information about making your own definitions to match a
custom Excel file layout.
Several options allow you to decide how doors, keys and keying will be imported.
After opening the file, its contents are analysed and if there are errors they are reported. Errors must be
corrected before importing.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 110 ProMaster Master Keying

Some comparison information is shown between the system that is open and that within the Excel file. Please
confirm that this information is correct before proceeding.

Select the Factory that will be used for making a job if doors or keys are ordered by the extension.
Other than changing the description on existing keys, and the description, area, stage and notes on
existing doors, no other modification will be made to existing items. Keying will never be altered for
existing doors unless you make the choice to create keying for any doors that have not yet been keyed.
Any door that has keying will never have its keying altered by importing a system extension.

9.3.6 Change system status

The system status determines if the system is able to be worked on, and also categories it so you know if it is
active, closed, snapshot.

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Change system status.

Making a change
Choose the new status you want.
Notes
Here is an explanation of the system status values.

Status Description
Active The system is able to be worked on. This is the normal status for
systems.
Closed Use this status when a system is no longer in service. This will prohibit
any further activity to the system (other than opening the system and
changing its status). This is a better option than deleting s system.
Snapshot This is the status that is set when you make a snapshot of a system - see
110
System snapshot (it is set on the copy, not on the original system - the
original system is not altered). A snapshot system may not be altered,
but you may wish to revert to it by changing its status to "Active". If you
do this you should also mark the previously active system as being a
snapshot (or possibly even deleting it) so there is absolutely no confusion
about which copy of the system you are working on.

9.3.7 System snapshot

A snapshot is an exact copy of the system including all its activity and documents. There is nothing shared
between the original system and the snapshot other than that they belong to the same client. If you snapshot
a system then make some changes which you then decided you didn't want, you could delete the live system,
open the snapshot and change its status from snapshot to in active and you would be back where you were
just prior to making the snapshot - with one slight difference.
As no two systems may have the same name, snapshots are named the same as the original system and
carry a suffix SNAP1, SNAP2 etc. If you turn a snapshot project back into a live project, you should also alter
its project number so that it appears identical to the original.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Create a snapshot of the system.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 111

Notes
A new system number will be offered for the snapshot. You may alter this if you wish but generally the
generated name is adequate.
See also Change system status 110 for turning a snapshot into an active system and Systems 102
for finding
snapshots (Normally snapshots are not returned by the system search).

9.3.8 Duplicating a system

At times you may wish to duplicate a system so that you can start again with a new system design. This might
happen for example when you have an active key system and is has reached the end of its patent and the
customer wants it re-keyed on a product with an active patent. In this scenario, we don't want to touch the
old system and discard its coding or history, so a duplicate, without history or coding is required.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Create a new system from this system.

An explanation of the options

You must enter a system number for the new system.
The site description defaults to that of the old system, with the ability to change it, as does the installation
date.
A group of check boxed allow you to decide what to copy from the current system to the new one. The
availability of each option depends on what data is available in the existing system.
Finally, decide if you want to open the new system, then click OK to create it.
What happens

· A new system is created.

· Keys, key groups, doors, door groups, keying, signatories etc are copied according to the options you
selected.
· The coding design is not copied.

· The key codes are not copied.

· The door pinning is not copied.

· Jobs are not copied.

What next
The system that is created is just like that which would result from you creating a new system, then entering
keys, doors, keying etc.
Next you should modify the new system to set its system type and other such parameters, make any key or
door changes required, then proceed with coding.

9.3.9 Deleting a system

Occasionally you may want to delete a system. E.g. Delete a system you created for testing or delete a
system that was not used.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 112 ProMaster Master Keying

Deleting a system removes the system, all doors, keys, keying, jobs etc. A system cannot be deleted
until its design is deleted.

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Delete system.

Making a change
· You must enter the specified text before proceeding.

· Click OK to delete the system.

There is no undo. When you type the confirmation text and click OK, the system is gone.

9.4 Exporting and importing systems

9.4.1 Exporting systems
ProMaster Master Keying allows systems to be exported and imported between ProMaster installations.
Some reasons why you might want to do this are:
· To send a system to ProMaster support if assistance is required.

· To relinquish the system to another company.

· To sent the system to a lock manufacturer so that a large order may be processed by their factory.

· To receive a system from a lock manufacturer.

Rules for exporting

ProMaster Master Keying allows systems to be exported without restriction to ProMaster Master Keying.
Premium and Manufacturer edition only: It is also capable of exporting to ProMaster Master-Keying 7,
however some rules are applied to govern the data integrity.
Export to versions prior to version 7 are not supported.
· If the ProMaster Master Keying system uses a design module that was not available in a previous version of
ProMaster, then the export is not possible.
· If the ProMaster Master Keying system uses features that result in data that is not possible to use in a
previous version of ProMaster, then the export is not possible.
There is an extensive set of reasons why a system might not be able to export to an older ProMaster,
including longer field names, new features, internal keying on doors, characters not supported by the
older version.
If you choose to export to an old version and the export is not possible, you will be shown the reason(s) why.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Export system to ProMaster.

Exporting data
· Choose what to export. The default selection is to export just the current system, however if you have
multiple systems for the client you may choose to export them all.
· Choose the folder where the file(s) will be written

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 113

· Choose the destination ProMaster Master Keying version.

· You may choose to omit documents from the export, and to include an descriptive annotation to include in
the export file.
Finally, choose what you want to happen after the export and click Finish.

9.4.2 Importing systems

ProMaster Master Keying allows you to import a system from another ProMaster Master-Keying user.
Getting started
· You must be logged in without a system open.

· From the System menu, select Import system.

Importing data
File
Select the ProMaster file to import.
File contents and origin
A summary of the file contents is shown, including where the file came from, when it was created, the system
type, the design module and the number of doors, keys, keying and jobs.
System number
You are asked about system numbers. The choices available depend on a number of things, including:
· Is there an existing system with the same System Number?

· Does the existing system use ProMaster Key Manager 7?

· Does the system being imported use ProMaster Key Manager 7?

If there is an existing system with the same system number, you must rename either the existing system
(which you may be planning to remove anyway) or the system being imported.
Make your choice on system numbers.
If you choose to change the existing number, there is a choice to convert the existing system to a
110
snapshot (See System snapshot ). This is a good thing to do.
System type
The system type for the system being imported is shown.
A list of compatible system types that you have defined is shown.
Choose the system type to use when the system is imported.
Key sections on the import are matched up to your key sections.
· If a key section family with the same top key section exists and it contains all the necessary key sections,
then there is no further action required.
· If a key section family with the same top key section exists and is is missing some key sections required by
the import, you must fix it before importing.
· If a key section family with the same top key section does not exist, and the file is a version 8 file, the key
section family will be created.
· If a key section family with the same top key section does not exist, and the file is a version 7 file, the key
section family will not be created, and you must create it yourself. This is because the key section storage

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 114 ProMaster Master Keying

has changed in ProMaster Master Keying and sometimes not all necessary information is present for the key
section family to be created automatically.

Locks
For each lock, choose if you want to use the existing item (if it exists), use a different item, or create the item
(if it does not already exist).
If the file is from ProMaster Master Keying then these choices are remembered in relation to who sent you the
file and automatically offered next time.
If the file is from version 7, then these choices are remembered as a global set of information and
automatically offered next time. The version 7 file does not contain the necessary identifying information to
remember your choice in relation to the source of the file.
Post import tasks
If a system existed with the same system number as that you imported, you have the opportunity to analyse
the differences between the original system and the imported system, and also to remove the original system.
Unless you are confident that the new system genuinely replaces the existing system, it is better to
leave the old system, preferably as a snapshot (i.e. Don't remove it), then examine both systems
111
carefully before deleting the old system. See Deleting a system to learn about deleting a system at
some later time.

9.4.3 Exporting to Excel

ProMaster Master Keying can export your system details, doors, keys and keying to an Excel file
This is a good way to give it to your customer, both to explain it to them but also when you want the customer
to enter new doors and new keys, that you will later import into ProMaster Master Keying.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Export system to Excel.

Exporting data
· A name for the export is offered. You may choose a different file.

· Choose the excel template to use (there are two that ship with ProMaster Master Keying byt you may have
added some of your own)
· Choose the template definition that corresponds to the excel template layout. See Creating a system from
107
Excel for information about excel files and template definitions.
· Choose how you want door quantities and key quantities exported.

· Finally, choose what you want to happen after the export and click Finish.

The ProMaster Master Keying Excel imports and exports do not require Excel to be installed to read or
write the files. You must have Excel installed if you want to view or alter the Excel files.

9.4.4 Exporting to ProMaster Key Manager

By exporting your systems to your client, they are able to maintain an accurate record of all key issues to
personnel. Your client will need to purchase ProMaster Key Manager. (This is available from your ProMaster
Master Keying reseller).
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 115

· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Export to Key Manager.

Exporting data
· Choose what to export. The default selection is to export just the current system, however if you have
multiple systems for the client you may choose to export them all.
· Choose the folder where the file(s) will be written

· The first time you perform an export to your client, you must select from the drop down list the version of
ProMaster Key Manager that your client has. This selection is remembered for future exports, but may be
altered if necessary (e.g. Client upgrades to a new version of ProMaster Key Manager).
Versions prior to ProMaster Key Manager 7 are not supported due to the changes in field lengths and
Unicode character set.
ProMaster Key Manager 8
If you have publishing configured (See Configuring publishing) 80 and your client is using ProMaster Key
Manager 8 then you can send the Key Manager system data to your client via the ProMaster publishing
service.
See Mobile services 79 about permissions for configuring Key Manager Publishing and permissions for
sending systems via the publishing service.
· Choose the Key Manager publishing configuration. Almost always for each client there should be just 1 to
choose from and it will be called "Default"
· Note that the system you are exporting must be permitted for the selected publishing configuration (See
Configuring Key Manager users 85 ). If you have the required permission, the Configure Key Manager
publishing button will be available.
· If you are not using the Key Manager 8 publishing service then choose what you want to happen after the
export and click Finish.
Update your client regularly. You must export this key management data to your client whenever
changes are made to the system or an order is processed for doors or keys.

9.5 Signatories
Signatories are the people who are authorised to order keys and doors. The manner in which signatories are
treated depends on way signatories are configured for your system.
System settings
The system settings which you configure are:
· Number of signatories required per to order keys.

· Type of key signatory security

· Number of signatories required per to order doors.

· Type of door signatory security

Type of signatory security

Type of signatory security is the fundamental control for how signatory authority is configured. Three choices
for keys are available:

© 2019 WH Software Limited

116 ProMaster Master Keying

· All keys require the system specified number of signatories: The quantity set for "Number of
signatories required per to order keys" is required to order any key. Any active signatories may make up the
required number of signatories - but read also about mandatory signatories.
· Allow a different number of signatories required for each key: The quantity set for "Number of
signatories required per to order keys" is required to order any key, but each key may be given an
overriding number of signatories required for just that key. Any active signatories may make up the
required quantity of signatories - but read also about mandatory signatories.
· Individual signatories permitted and allow different number of signatories required for each
key: The quantity set for "Number of signatories required per to order keys" is required to order to order
any key, but each key may be given an overriding quantity of signatories required for just that key. Each key
must be assigned the signatories who are allowed to authorise that particular key. Any active signatories
from those assigned to each key may make up the required number of signatories for that key - but read
also about mandatory signatories.
The choices for doors are the same, but separate from the key choices.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Signatories

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your signatories.

· See Entering signatories

117
for information on signatories.
Other functionality
Right click a signatory and choose Copy this signatory to other systems to copy the select signatory into
121
other systems for the same client. See Copy signatory to other systems .
Right click a signatory and choose Signatory history to see changes that have been made to the signatory.
117
See Signatory history .
Right click a signatory and choose Jobs authorised by this signatory to see a list of jobs who this
117
signatory authorised. See Job history for signatory .

Right click a signatory and choose Key authorities to change which keys this signatory may order. Available
118
when the type of key signatory security is "Individual signatories...". See Key authorities .
Right click a signatory and choose Door authorities to change which doors this signatory may order.
Available when the type of door signatory security is "Individual signatories...". See Door authorities 119 .
Right click a signatory and choose Copy authorities from another signatory to copy key or door
authorities from another signatory to the selected signatory. Available when the type of key or door signatory
security is "Individual signatories...". See Copying authorities from another signatory 120 .
Right click a signatory and choose Convert signatory from system signatory to client signatory to
promote the system signatory to become a client signatory. If a client signatory exists with the same name
then the that client signatory will be used, otherwise a client signatory will be added.
Right click a signatory and choose Convert signatory from client signatory to system signatory to de-
attach the signatory from the client signatory of the same name and leave it as a stand-alone signatory in the
system.
Click the Options button then Add from client to select a client signatory and add it to the system.
Click the Options button then Import signatories from another system to select the signatories in
another system and add them to the current system. See Copy signatories to this system from another
121
system .

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 117

Click the Options button then Key authorities matrix to open a matrix of signatories and keys where you
may alter an authority. Available when the type of key signatory security is "Individual signatories...". See
Key authorities matrix 118 .
Click the Options button then Door authorities matrix to open a matrix of signatories and doors where
you may alter an authority. Available when the type of door signatory security is "Individual signatories...".
See Door authorities matrix 119.
Click the Options button then Display authorities to toggle the display of doors and keys on or off.
The choices Copy this signatory to other systems and Import signatories from another
system make copies of signatories but is better replaced with the client signatory functionality.

9.5.1 Entering signatories

Signatories may be entered against a system to be used for order authentication. Signatories may also be
entered against the client and used for multiple systems.
For clients with multiple systems using the same signatories, consider using client signatories rather than
adding each signatory to each system.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
Explanation of data fields
The Name is required, and must be unique within this system. All other values are optional, but you may
benefit in maintaining control over the system by gathering a full set of details.
The Active flag is used to deactivate a signatory in the future, while still maintaining a history of the
signatory activity.
The Mandatory signatory flag indicates that the signatory must be included on every order, or if individual
key authorities are assigned to a key or door then must be on the order for that key or door.
Signature
The image you store of a signatory's signature is displayed for verification when you are entering an order.

Photo
Like for the signature, the signatory photo is displayed for verification when you are entering an order, and
may be beneficial for verifying over-the-counter orders.

9.5.2 Signatory history

Signatory history is used to document changes made to signatory details. When you add or change a
signatory, you are prompted for information to document the change.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
A list of changes is displayed.

9.5.3 Job history for signatory

Job history for signatory allows you to see the jobs for which a signatory has given authorisation.
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 118 ProMaster Master Keying

115
See Signatories .
A list of jobs is displayed.

You may click Details to open the highlighted job.

9.5.4 Key authorities

Available only if Type of key signatory security is set to Individual signatories permitted and allow
different number of signatories required for each key.
Key authorities is one of several ways you may see and alter the keys that a signatory is permitted to order.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
Making a change
A list of keys is shown.
Check any keys that the signatory is permitted to order.
Right click the key list for more options.

9.5.5 Key authorities matrix

Available only if Type of key signatory security is set to Individual signatories permitted and allow
different number of signatories required for each key.
Key authorities matrix is one of several ways you may see and alter the keys that a signatory is permitted to
order. The key authorities matrix is a matrix of all active signatories and all keys (other than disabled and
replaced) so that you may get an overview of permissions and make rapid changes.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
An explanation of the options

Option Description
Find key Search for keys. Keys that start with the text you enter are indicated with
a purple arrow. If there is a key that is a full match for the text you
entered then that key is selected as well as the purple arrow.
Key details Shows information about the current key.
Find signatory Search for signatories. Signatories that start with the text you enter are
indicated with a purple arrow. If there is a signatory that is a full match
for the text you entered then that signatory is selected as well as the
purple arrow.
Signatory details Shows information about the current signatory.
Toggle authority Toggles the authority for the selected cells.
Authority on Turns authority on for the selected cells.
Authority off Turns authority off for the selected cells.
This key | Key on Turns authority on for the selected key for all signatories.
This key | Key off Turns authority off for the selected key for all signatories.
This key | Undo changes to this Undoes all changes to the selected key, reverting it to the authorities it
key had when you opened the window.
This signatory | Signatory on Turns authority on for the selected signatory for all keys.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 119

This signatory | Signatory off Turns authority off for the selected signatory for all keys.
This signatory | Undo changes to Undoes all changes to the selected signatory, reverting it to the authorities
this signatory it had when you opened the window.

Other functionality
Right click on the matrix for other option. Some options on this pop-up menu are the same as the toolbar
(however you can learn the shortcut keys by looking at the pop-up menu), but he new options are listed here.

Option Description
Change orientation Swaps the location of signatories and keys in columns/rows.
Show indicator for unassigned Turn on to show a warning graphic by each key that does not have
signatories and keys signatories assigned and by each signatory that does not have keys
assigned.
Find next ... Navigates from the current location to other authorities in each direction.

Notes
A green + graphic indicates each authority added and a red - graphic indicates each authority removed.
Changes are not saved until you click OK.

9.5.6 Door authorities

Available only if Type of door signatory security is set to Individual signatories permitted and allow
different number of signatories required for each door.
Door authorities is one of several ways you may see and alter the doors that a signatory is permitted to order.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
Making a change
A list of doors is shown.

Check any doors that the signatory is permitted to order.

Right click the door list for more options.

9.5.7 Door authorities matrix

Available only if Type of door signatory security is set to Individual signatories permitted and allow
different number of signatories required for each door.
Door authorities matrix is one of several ways you may see and alter the doors that a signatory is permitted to
order. The door authorities matrix is a matrix of all active signatories and all doors (other than disabled and
replaced) so that you may get an overview of permissions and make rapid changes.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
An explanation of the options

Option Description
Find door Search for doors. Doors that start with the text you enter are indicated
with a purple arrow. If there is a door that is a full match for the text you
entered then that door is selected as well as the purple arrow.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 120 ProMaster Master Keying

Door details Shows information about the current door.

Find signatory Search for signatories. Signatories that start with the text you enter are
indicated with a purple arrow. If there is a signatory that is a full match
for the text you entered then that signatory is selected as well as the
purple arrow.
Signatory details Shows information about the current signatory.
Toggle authority Toggles the authority for the selected cells.
Authority on Turns authority on for the selected cells.
Authority off Turns authority off for the selected cells.
This door | Door on Turns authority on for the selected door for all signatories.
This door | Door off Turns authority off for the selected door for all signatories.
This door | Undo changes to this Undoes all changes to the selected door, reverting it to the authorities it
door had when you opened the window.
This signatory | Signatory on Turns authority on for the selected signatory for all doors.
This signatory | Signatory off Turns authority off for the selected signatory for all doors.
This signatory | Undo changes to Undoes all changes to the selected signatory, reverting it to the authorities
this signatory it had when you opened the window.

Other functionality
Right click on the matrix for other option. Some options on this pop-up menu are the same as the toolbar
(however you can learn the shortcut doors by looking at the pop-up menu), but he new options are listed
here.

Option Description
Change orientation Swaps the location of signatories and doors in columns/rows.
Show indicator for unassigned Turn on to show a warning graphic by each door that does not have
signatories and doors signatories assigned and by each signatory that does not have doors
assigned.
Find next ... Navigates from the current location to other authorities in each direction.

Notes
A green + graphic indicates each authority added and a red - graphic indicates each authority removed.
Changes are not saved until you click OK.

9.5.8 Copying authorities from another signatory

Available only if Type of key signatory security is set to Individual signatories permitted and allow
different number of signatories required for each key, or the same setting for doors.
This procedure allows you to quickly set the key authorities for one signatory to be the same as for another
signatory.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
Making a change
From the drop down list, copy the signatory from which you want to copy the authorities.
Choose key authorities, door authorities or both.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 121

When you click OK, authorities on the signatory are replaced to be the same as the one that you choose to
copy from.

9.5.9 Copy signatories to this system from another system

Sometimes a client has more than one master key system, and there may be signatories who are the same
for more than one system. This is one of two processes for copying signatories between systems for the
same client.
If a client has multiple systems with the same signatories, please consider using client signatories
rather then this process. If you copy signatories between systems they are individually maintained,
whereas client signatories are centrally maintained.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
Making a change
Using the drop down list, choose another system belonging to the same client from which you want to copy
signatories.
In the list of signatories, check the signatories that you want to copy.
Client signatories are shown with the client graphic but may not be selected. For client signatories see Add
from client in the topic Signatories 115 .
Choose if you want to only add new signatories, or if the signatory matches an existing one if you want to
update the signatory details.

Click OK to perform the copy.

Images in the list of signatories indicate that the signatory will be added if it is selected, or edited if it is
selected and you have chosen the option to update existing signatories.

9.5.10 Copy signatory to other systems

Sometimes a client has more than one master key system, and there may be signatories who are the same
for more than one system. This is one of two processes for copying signatories between systems for the
same client.
If a client has multiple systems with the same signatories, please consider using client signatories
rather then this process. If you copy signatories between systems they are individually maintained,
whereas client signatories are centrally maintained.
Getting started
115
See Signatories .
Making a change
A list is displayed of other systems belonging to the same client. Check the systems to which you want to copy
the signatory.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 122 ProMaster Master Keying

Choose if you want to only add new signatories, or if the signatory matches an existing one if you want to
update the signatory details.

Click OK to perform the copy.

Images in the list of systems indicate that the signatory will be added if it is selected, or edited if it is
selected and you have chosen the option to update existing signatories.

9.6 Documents
Any amount of documentation may be stored within a system. Documentation may be notes only, or images,
or any of the supported document types (e.g. zip, rar, pdf, xps, msg, rtf, txt, doc, docm, docx, xls, xlsm, xlsx,
ppt, pptm, pps, ppsm, pptx, ppsx).
Documents may be related to the system only, or may be tied to a particular job.
Once a document has been added to the system it is immutable.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Documents

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons the manage your documents.

When you add a document, you will be asked if you want to add a document, image (load from disk, capture
from scanner or paste from clipboard) or notes only.
If you are storing an image (from a file, your scanner of the clipboard), you will be presented with the image
308
in the image editor (see Image editor ) where you can perform edits to the image to optimise it for
readability and size.
You may drag a file from Windows Explorer or Microsoft Outlook and drop it onto the target instead of
choosing a source and clicking OK to select the file. The file you drop must be one of the accepted document
or image types and it must be a single file.
You may drag the whole message (.msg file) from Outlook into the document store. Outlook Express EML files
are not supported.
Document properties
· You must provide a Type for your document before you store it. The Type is used for easy identification of
the document at a later time.
· The document description should contain a useful description, helpful when later retrieving the document.

· A tab shows your document, and another tab is provided where you may record notes about the document.

The document properties may be edited at a later time, but once saved, the actual document (image, PDF,
DOC etc) is immutable.
You may print the graphic by clicking on the Print button.
Other functionality

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 123

By right clicking on a document in the list, you may:

Option Description
Move up Changes the order that documents will appear in the system. Available
only when all items are being displayed.
Move down Changes the order that documents will appear in the system. Available
only when all items are being displayed.
Sort by date Sorts the documents according to the date. Available only when all items
are being displayed.

9.7 Alerts
Alerts are messages that appear either always or after a particular date. They are shown at the bottom of
the ProMaster Master Keying main window when the system is open.
Alerts flagged to always show are always shown, provided you have not unselected the Show this alert flag.
Alerts set to show on and after a date show on that date, provided you have not unselected the Show this
alert flag and only until they are flagged as acknowledged.
Where the alerts are shown at the bottom of the ProMaster Master Keying main window, buttons step
between the alerts and for alerts with a date, there is a button to acknowledge the alert so that it disappears.
Click on the alert description at the bottom of the ProMaster Master Keying main window to open the alert so
thay you may read its notes.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Alerts.

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your alerts.

· Right click on an alert to access options for sorting the alerts. Sorting choices are available only if you have
searched for all items.
Notes
The description is shown on the ProMaster Master Keying main window.
Deselecting the Show this alert flag will, regardless of date choices, always hide the alert.
If the alert is to be shown only after a date, you must enter the date.
The notes are shown only when you open the alert

9.8 Keys
The keys window is the hub for almost all key activity. Depending on where you have accessed keys,
functionality is made available or removed to match the current requirements. None the less, the basics of
how you search for keys remains the same.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 124 ProMaster Master Keying

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Keys

While all the search options are clearly worded, there are some more complex options that can help you
refine your key search and it is worthwhile having a look at some of the options like "Key above" and
"Replaced" so that you are familiar with them should the need arise.
Making a change

· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your keys.

· See Entering keys

124
for information on keys.
Other functionality
126
Click the Door access button to see or alter the doors operated by the key. See Door access .
Click the Signatories button to see or alter the signatories permitted to order the key. See Authorised
signatories for key 127.
Right click a key and choose Replace to replace the selected key with a new key (e.g. It has been lost). See
Replace key 127 .
127
Right click a key and choose History to see a list of jobs where the key was ordered. See Key history .
Right click a key and choose Move up / Move down to change the order of the keys. This is available only if
the search has returned all keys, including replaced keys. See also Sort keys 130.
Right click a key and choose Find the key above this key, Find keys below this key, Find keys with the
same key above as this key to perform a new search based on the key hierarchy of the current key.
Click the Options button then Bulk change to open the bulk changer with the current selection of keys. See
Bulk change keys 130.
130
Click the Options button then Sorter to open the key sorter. See Sort keys .
Click the Options button then Keying matrix to open the keying matrix with the initial view set to the current
selection of keys. See Keying matrix 145.

Click the Options button then Import CSV to import keys from a csv file. See Importing keys from a csv
file 128

9.8.1 Entering keys

Getting started
123
See Keys .
Explanation of data fields

Data field Description

Key The number that uniquely identifies this key within the system. Each key
has a unique key number.
Description A description of the key to give it meaning beyond that attributed to the
key number.
Category Category allows you to perform basic grouping on keys. This information
has no meaning beyond grouping keys together into a logical group and
for searching purposes.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 125

Key above The Key above specifies the key above this key in hierarchy. The top level
key in a system will have no keys above. See Understanding key
designations and hierarchy 126 .
Designation The designation specifies the keys purpose. See Understanding key
126
designations and hierarchy .
Part code Available when the application parameter Allow entry of key part
code is turned on. Allows a part code to be recorded for the key.
Generally this would not be used, and is provided for customers with
manufacturing integration processes.
Stamping Available when the application parameter Allow entry of key stamping
is turned on. Stamping is optional, but when entered the value is used in
preference to the key number when marking keys during manufacturing.
Ship this key separate from lock This option, if checked, is considered during the job process. If a key
parts which has this option checked is ordered on the same job as any lock
products (i.e. Doors) then this option will enforce the entry of two shipping
addresses for the job.
Key is disabled This flag allows you to effectively obsolete a key. A disabled key may not
be assigned to any doors, nor may it be ordered.
Signatory quantity required If your system is restricted by signatory, or allows for a different number
of signatories required to order each key then this field will be available.
The system default is shown, and if you enter a value for Signatories
quantity required then it will take precedence when validating a job
with this key.
Add this key to a job Available when adding a key (but not modifying an existing one), the
Quantity specifies the quantity of this key to order. The default value for
Quantity is set for the system (and you may change the default by
modifying the system details).

The note is added to the line item for this key if you order it by entering a
quantity. Most often this note is not required, but may be used to convey
special manufacturing or delivery instructions.
Add a door for this key If you turn on this option, then after the key is added, you will be given the
opportunity to add a door, which will then be operated by this key. This
option is available only when adding keys (I.e. Not when modifying
existing keys).

Saving the key

When you have finished entering your key information, either click OK if you have no more keys to add, or
click Save / Add another to save this key then continue adding keys. When you click Save / Add
another, ProMaster Master Keying pre-populates some of the fields with information derived from the key
that you have just saved. See Setting your preferences 33 .
When you use Save / Add another to add multiple keys, ProMaster Master Keying indicates at the bottom
of the window the key that was most recently added. This will assist you in not omitting any keys when
entering them from a list.
Save / Add another is available when adding keys, but not when modifying an existing key.
Editing keys
If you edit a key that has been ordered, the Key number will be protected from change. The Edit key
number button allows you to make this field editable. If keys have been manufactured and stamped, or data
sent to the client then exercise discretion in doing this.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 126 ProMaster Master Keying

While editing a key, the History option access a list of jobs on which the key was ordered, and gives you the
ability to see the job details.

Notes
Add a door for this key: The default for this flag is determined by the Preference 33 When adding keys
default "Add door" to checked. The are many ways of entering doors, keys and keying so you should alter
this preference to correspond to the way you operate.
In the top right of this window, Issues indicates the number of times this key has been ordered.

9.8.2 Understanding key designations and hierarchy

Key above and Designation play a number of roles.
For ProMaster Master Keying they form a central part of automatic coding. When assigning keys to doors, the
key above is used to propagate the assignment to master keys. From the user perspective they perform a
documentation role and help facilitate good system design and understanding. Additionally, there are some
special key designations that affect specific design modules.
It is important to understand and adhere to the rules for Key above and Designation.
Key above
In a system, the top level key will not and must not have a Key above. All other keys should be assigned a
key above that complies with the following rules.
· Any key that is a Key above for another key must be designation Master.

· If key A is above key B, then key A must operate all doors operated by key B. Or put another way, key B
must not operate any doors that are not operate by key A.
· If a key is not the Key above another key, then its designation must not be Master.

Designation

Designation Description
Master A Master key fits into a pure hierarchy layout and is the Key above for one or more
other keys
Change A Change key is a bottom level key that fits into a pure hierarchy layout. A Change key
must not be the key above for another key.
Selective A Selective key does not fit into a pure hierarchy layout. A selective key must not be the
Key above for another key.
Construction The Construction key is available on construction keyed systems for design modules that
support construction keying.
Control The Control key available only on design modules that have interchangeable code
cylinders.

If a key is the Key above another key, then it must operate all doors that the lower level key opens.

9.8.3 Door access

Door access is one of several ways to see keying. This method allows you to select a single key and see or
edit the doors that it operates.
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 127

123
See Keys .
The Door access for key window shows the door that the key operates.

Making a change
· Click Add to add doors to the key. When you add a door, and if the key has a key above, ProMaster Master
Keying will offer to add also keys above the key you are working on to the door.
· Click Remove to Remove the selected door from the key.

When doors have different internal keying (for double cylinders), be careful to select the correct side of the
door when adding it to the key.
Be aware that once a system is coded, any changes you make will affect the pinning for your doors.
When you make keying changes, ProMaster Master Keying marks the system as Coding required so
that coding for affected doors must be recalculated before any manufacturing may proceed.

9.8.4 Authorised signatories for key

Available only if Type of key signatory security is set to Individual signatories permitted and allow
different number of signatories required for each key.
Authorised signatories for key is one of several ways you may see and alter the keys that a signatory is
permitted to order.
Getting started
123
See Keys .
Making a change

A list of signatories is shown.

Check any signatories that are permitted to order the key.

9.8.5 Key history

Key history allows you to see the jobs when a key was ordered.
Getting started
123
See Keys .
A list of jobs is displayed.
You may click Details to open the highlighted job.

9.8.6 Replace key

Replacing a key is the process whereby you effectively say "The old key is lost, here's the new key to replace
it". Now, take a moment to dwell on this since replacing a key is much tidier than simply creating a new key
and hoping the old key does not get ordered. Here's why:
When you create a replacement key, the old key remains, along with its coding and its history, but since it is
flagged as replaced then it may no longer be ordered, and customers using ProMaster Key Manager see the
key as deleted. All other attributes from the replaced key including its keying, signatory authorities and key
groups are attributed to the replacement key.
Getting started
123
See Keys .

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 128 ProMaster Master Keying

You must enter the key number for the replacement key.
Keying the replaced key

The keying from the replaced key is attributed to the replacement key, and the replaced key (which still exists
out there somewhere) maintains its coding information. All the normal data entry places for controlling keying
do not allow you to assign any keying to the replaced key.
Now, if the replaced key previously operated a central or maison keyed door, you may find that the replaced
key appears as a phantom or error when performing coding. This is because the lock coding still allows the
replaced key to pass but the replaced key is no longer keyed to operate that lock.

This is intentional, and you must make a simple choice on how you wish to handle it.
· Your first choice is to replace other keys that operate the central door, thereby changing the lock pinning so
that the initial replaced key no longer presents an error. In a high security situation this will likely be the
preferred answer, then the time and cost of numerous system changes must be considered.
· The other choice, and one frequently adopted is that the replaced key (the one that was lost) does not
present sufficient security compromise to warrant further cost, and the replaced key should be allowed to
continue operating the central door. In this case you must assign the to operate the door, thereby
eliminating the phantom key error report.
All the normal data entry places for controlling keying do not allow you to assign any keying to the
replaced key. When you are performing coding for a replaced key, you must assign the replaced key's
keying from within the keying matrix on the coding screens (Coding tree or Coding matrix).
Assigning keying while replacing key
If you have coding permissions, then on the Replace key window there will be the option to select doors that
will continue to be operated by the replaced key (as well as by the replacement key). Do this only if you are
certain about the requirements, otherwise leave the keying until you perform the coding.

9.8.7 Exporting keys to a csv file

232
See Exporting system data to a csv file .

9.8.8 Importing keys from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with key information you can import this data.
306
Read the topic Key import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The key field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the key is new (and therefore
will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
123
See Keys .
Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 129

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.

It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish

A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

9.8.9 Key groups

Key groups provide a way to take a selection of keys, with no particular rules constraining your selection, and
to give that selection a meaningful name. Key groups can then be used for a number of reporting operations
and also to set the keying of a door group to all the keys in a selected key group.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Keys menu, select Key groups.

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your key groups.

Editing the group

Whether you are adding a group or altering an existing one, the process is simple.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 130 ProMaster Master Keying

· The group must have a name, and than group name must not be used by another key group within this
system

· Click Add to select keys that you want in the group. You may do this as many times as you need.

· Click Remove to take a key out of the group.

When you have finished editing the group, click OK to save it.

9.8.10 Bulk change keys

Bulk changing is the process whereby you may apply the same change to a few or even many keys in a single
operation. It is useful for changing a number of keys when you have entered them without this information or
to rapidly fix data errors.

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Keys menu, select Bulk change keys.

Alternatively, initiate the bulk change from the keys window after having searched for a range of keys. See
Keys 123 .
Making a change
The process of making a bulk change is very simple, just follow these steps.
· Ensure that the correct keys are selected, selecting or deselecting them as necessary.

· In the Data type list, choose what you want to change

· The options for what you may change depend on the selection made. Enter the information for your change
(e.g. new value, selection, etc)
· Click the Apply change button.

Repeat these 4 steps as many times as you want.

Finally, to save your changes click the OK button.
Notes
Within this window, the selected change is applied only to items that are checked (in the far left column of
each item)
You can check and uncheck items individually, or use the Select all and Clear selection buttons. Right click
on the list for more selection options.
You can make as many different types of changes as you like within this window.
Changes are stored in memory, and are not saved until you click the OK button.
Keys that have been changed are indicated by a pencil graphic next to the key selection. You may undo
changes to keys by right clicking and choosing Undo.
Right click and choose Show changed values so see a graphic indicator of the individual values that
have been altered.

9.8.11 Sort keys

Generally, keys are added after the selected key when adding from the keys window, otherwise at the end of
the key list.
If your keys are out of order, this process gives more sorting capabilities than sorting one key at a time from
123
the keys window. (See Keys )

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 131

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Keys menu, select Sort keys.

Making a change
The process of sorting keys involves selecting the keys to sort then applying a sorting operation to those
selected keys. The process may be repeated as many times as necessary.
Selection and sorting operations are accessible through the button bar at the top of the window, through a
pop-up context menu (right click mouse) and through various hot-key combinations.
Selecting keys
Keys may be selected using mouse/keyboard, including shift-clicking to select a range and ctrl-clicking to
select dis-contiguous keys, or various menu options such as:
· Select all

· Select none

· Select keys with the same category (The currently highlighted key must have a category)

· Select to bottom (Selects from the currently highlighted key to the end)

· Select keys with the same key above

· Select the key above this key

· Select keys below this key

Sorting keys
The sorting operation is applied to the selected keys.

Option Description
Move up Moves all selected keys up one position.
Move down Moves all selected keys down one position.
Move up page Moves all the selected keys up half the height of the window.
Move down page Moves all the selected keys down half the height of the window.
Bring together Brings all the selected keys together, positioning them under the topmost
selected key.
Sort key number as text Sorts the selected keys by doing a text comparison on their key numbers.
Sort key number Sorts the selected keys in logical numerical order. All selected keys must
have a numerical component in the key number. Each key number is
broken into multiple numerical components and these are compared for
sorting purposes. A numeric sort will correctly produce the sequence 1.1,
1.2, ..., 1.9. 1.10, 1.11, 2.1, 2.2, ..., 2.9, 2.10
Sort USA Sorts the selected keys according to the USA key naming convention.
Sort by description Sorts the selected keys by their descriptions.

Finally, to save your changes click the OK button.

9.8.12 Key hierarchy

This feature shows the key hierarchy in a tree layout, and allows you to make changes by dragging a key onto
a different key which then becomes it's key above.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 132 ProMaster Master Keying

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Keys menu, select Key hierarchy.

Making a change
· Drag a key onto a different master to change it's key above.

Exercise caution - is it easy to make a mess by dropping keys in the wrong place.
Print key hierarchy
161
From the Options menu choose Print. See Key hierarchy .
You may print the original hierarchy or the changed hierarchy (if you have made a change).

9.8.13 Set key quantity issued

Key issue numbers are tracked automatically when keys are manufactured.
For legacy systems entered into ProMaster Master Keying, it is unlikely that you have a complete order history
available (and that you want to enter all historical jobs), so you may want to set the quantity of each key
issued manually.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Key menu, select Set key quantities issued.

Making a change
All keys are show, along with the quantity currently known, and as a comparison the quantity accounted for on
jobs in ProMaster Master Keying.
Enter the new quantity that has been produced for any keys that are incorrect.
Do this only for legacy systems. Incorrect values will interfere with the automatic allocation of issue
numbers on jobs.

9.9 Doors
The doors window is the hub for almost all door activity. Depending on where you have accessed doors,
functionality is made available or removed to match the current requirements. None the less, the basics of
how you search for doors remains the same.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Doors

While all the search options are clearly worded, there are some more complex options that can help you
refine your door search and it is worthwhile having a look at some of the options like "Duplicate stamping",
"Keys" and "Multiple keyings" so that you are familiar with them should the need arise.
Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your doors.

· See Entering doors

133
for information on doors.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 133

Other functionality
135
Click the Key access button to see or alter the keys that operate the door. See Door keying .

Click the Signatories button to see or alter the signatories permitted to order the key. See Authorised
signatories for door 136 .
Right click a key and choose Hardware to record hardware other than the locking product. See Recording
door hardware 136.
139
Right click a key and choose History to see a list of jobs where the door was ordered. See Door history .

Right click a key and choose Move up / Move down to change the order of the doors. This is available only
144
if the search has returned all doors. See also Sort doors .
Click the Options button then Bulk change to open the bulk changer with the current selection of doors. See
Bulk change doors 143 .
144
Click the Options button then Sorter to open the door sorter. See Sort doors .
Click the Options button then Keying matrix to open the keying matrix with the initial view set to the current
selection of keys. See Keying matrix 145.
Click the Options button then Duplicate doors to duplicate one or more doors multiple times. See
136
Duplicating doors .
Click the Options button then Duplicate area to duplicate a door areas one or more times. See Duplicating
a door area 138 .
Click the Options button then Import CSV to import keys from a csv file. See Importing doors from a csv
file 140.
Click the Options button then Import door renaming CSV to import keys from a csv file. See Importing
door renaming from a csv file 141.

9.9.1 Entering doors

Getting started
132
See Doors .
Explanation of data fields

Data field Description

Door The number that uniquely identifies this Door within the system. Each
Door has a unique key number.
Stamping The stamping is information that may be marked onto the cylinder during
manufacturing. The way in which you use the stamping will depend on
which school of thought you follow. Some people want the stamping to be
the same as the door number, others believe that the stamping should be
the key number of the lowest level key that is to operate the door, while
others use the stamping in a more abstract manner.
Description A description of the door to give it meaning beyond that attributed to the
door number.
Area The area is used to represent the physical location of the door. In a multi
building project, the area should contain a reference to the building and to
the level. You may type in a new area, or pick one used on another door
within the system from the drop down list.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

134 ProMaster Master Keying

Stage While normally not used, the stage allows you to record doors by stage in
large ongoing building projects.
Non keyed Used to indicate that the door does not have a locking product and is not
operated by any keys. You may record the details of non-keyed doors,
including additional hardware if you have enabled the hardware recording
functionality, however a non-keyed door may not be assigned any keys
and may not be ordered.
Lock If the door is keyed (I.e. It has a lock on it and is operated by one or more
keys) then this lock is the part code of the lock or cylinder installed on this
door. You may select a lock by clicking on the Select lock button, or
choose one from the drop down list of locks used on other doors within
this system.
Different keying side 2 Turn this on for doors with a double cylinder that are keyed differently on
the inside. If the internal keying is the same as the external keying, do not
turn this on.
Notes A place for you to store a small amount of notes about this door
Height, Width, Thickness The dimensions of the door. Useful if you have this information and wish
to record it so you have it available later to assist in determining
appropriate products.
Signatory quantity required If your system is restricted by signatory, or allows for a different number
of signatories required to order each key then this field will be available.
The system default is shown, and if you enter a value for Signatories
quantity required then it will take precedence when validating a job
with this key.
Pinning notes Available only if you have coding rights, the pinning notes allow you to
record any special manufacturing instructions for this door. Typically the
pinning notes would not be required.
Add this door to a job Available when adding a door (but not modifying an existing one), the
Quantity specifies the quantity of this door to order. The default value for
Quantity is set for the system (and you may change the default by
modifying the system details).

The note is added to the line item for this door if you order it by entering
a quantity. Most often this note is not required, but may be used to convey
special manufacturing or delivery instructions.
Add a key to this door If you turn on this flag, then after the door is added, you will be given the
opportunity to add a key, which will then be assigned to operate this door.
This option is available only when adding doors (I.e. not when modifying
existing doors).
Add hardware to this door If you turn on this flag, then after the door is added, you will be given the
opportunity to record additional hardware (e.g. closer) against the door.
This option is available only if you have enabled hardware recording in the
configuration of this system.

Saving the door

When you have finished entering your door information, either click OK if you have no more doors to add, or
click Save / Add another to save this door then continue adding doors. When you click Save / Add
another, ProMaster Master Keying pre-populates some of the fields with information derived from the door
that you have just saved. See Setting your preferences 33 .
When you use Save / Add another to add multiple doors, ProMaster Master Keying indicates at the bottom
of the window the door that was most recently added. This will assist you in not omitting any doors when
entering them from a list.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 135

Save / Add another is available when adding doors, but not when modifying an existing door.
Editing doors

If you edit a door that has been ordered, the Door number and stamping will be protected from change.
The Edit door number button allows you to make these fields editable. If doors have been manufactured
and stamped, or data sent to the client then exercise discretion in doing this.
While editing a door, the History option access a list of jobs on which the door was ordered, and gives you
the ability to see the job details.
Notes

Stamping: Then you are adding a door, and then save it, the application parameter When adding doors,
copy keying from doors with the same stamping is read, and if the parameter is set on, ProMaster
Master Keying then locates a door with the same stamping and copies the keying from that door to the one
that you have just added. For those users who use the stamping to identify doors that are keyed identically,
this is a parameter which you might consider turning on.
Add a key to this door: The default for this flag is determined by the Preference 33 When adding doors
default "Add key" to checked. The are many ways of entering doors, keys and keying so you should alter
this preference to correspond to the way you operate.
In the top right of this window, Issues indicates the number of times this door has been ordered.

9.9.2 Door keying

Door keying is one of several ways to see keying. This method allows you to select a single door and see or
edit the keys that operate it.
Getting started
132
See Doors .
The Door keying shows the keys that operate the door.
Making a change
· Click Add to add keys to the door. When you add a key, and if the key has a key above, ProMaster Master
Keying will offer to add also keys above the key you are adding to the door.
· Click Add group to select a key group. All keys in the selected group will be assigned to operate the door.

· Click Remove to Remove the selected key from the door.

When doors have different internal keying (for double cylinders), two sets of keyiong are shown. Click in then
external or internal keying to select that side of the door.
Bottom level key
If the application parameter Allow keys to be ordered as "Key quantity per cylinder" on each door is
turned on to allow the ordering of change keys for an ordered cylinder, then the bottom level key for the
door will be shown at the top of the window. By default, the bottom level key is defined as the only change
key that operates a door. In the event that several change keys operate a door, or that no change keys
operate a door then you must define which key is considered the bottom level key. This is done by right
clicking on the key within the list that you want to make into the bottom level key and choosing the menu
option to Set bottom level key. Your setting may be removed with the Clear bottom level key menu
selection, reverting to the algorithm than selects the singular change key for the door. This feature is not
available for internal keying on doors.
Be aware that once a system is coded, any changes you make will affect the pinning for your doors.
When you make keying changes, ProMaster Master Keying marks the system as Coding required so
that coding for affected doors must be recalculated before any manufacturing may proceed.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 136 ProMaster Master Keying

9.9.3 Authorised signatories for door

Available only if Type of door signatory security is set to Individual signatories permitted and allow
different number of signatories required for each door.
Authorised signatories for door is one of several ways you may see and alter the doors that a signatory is
permitted to order.
Getting started
132
See Doors .
Making a change

A list of signatories is shown.

Check any signatories that are permitted to order the door.

9.9.4 Recording door hardware

ProMaster Master Keying allows you to record hardware items for your doors other than the locking product
required for your key system. Door hardware recording is enabled on a system-by-system basis, either when
you create the system or at any later time by altering the system setting Allow door hardware to be
recorded.
Getting started
· From the Doors menu, select Doors.

· Search a door.

· Right click the door and select Hardware.

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your door hardware.

· Use Increase and Decrease to alter the quantity of the selected item.

9.9.5 Duplicating doors

The process of duplicating doors takes one or more doors, preferably with some commonality in the way they
are numbered, and from this it produces piles more doors.
Duplicating doors is a feature that will save you a huge amount of time on large and well structured
projects. To use this feature to its maximum potential, you need to plan your data entry.
Getting started
· From the Doors menu, select Doors.

· Search for the first door you want to duplicate.

· Click Options the Duplicate doors.

Making a change
Select doors
The first door will be displayed.
· Use the Select doors and Remove door buttons to build up the list of doors you want to duplicate.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 137

Door numbering
The door numbers of the doors you selected are analysed, and ProMaster Master Keying determines which
parts of the door numbers can be changed to produce the new doors.
· Choose the method for how new door numbers will be created.

Here are the methods and how they work:

Method Description
Create new door numbers using Looks for common parts in the door numbers and if common parts are
structured numbering available then this method is allowed. For example, doors 1.1A, 1.1B and
1.1C would be analysed as Numeric,Symbol,Numeric,Alpha and as the
numeric parts are the same on all doors, they would be available for this
method.

You must enter the number that new doors will start from and progress
up to.

So, in this example, if you chose the second numeric portion and choose
starting from 2 and progressing up to 4, then the following door numbers
are generated: 1.2A, 1.2B, 1.2C, 1.3A, 1.3B, 1.3C, 1.4A, 1.4B, 1.4C.
Create new door numbers using This method works regardless of how existing doors are numbered and
door number generation rules generates a sequence of new numbers for the new doors.

You may enter a prefix and suffix. You must specify what the starting
number is and how many of each door are generated.

So, using the example where you are duplicating 3 doors, and you enter
Prefix "X", Suffix "SP", Number from "2", Qty of each door "3" and pad
number length to "2", then the following door numbers are generated:
X02SP, X03SP, X04SP, X05SP, X06SP, X07SP, X08SP, X09SP, X10SP.

Door description

If there is no portion of the door description that reflects the door number, there are no options available.
More often than not this should be the case as it is usually superfluous to include the door number as part of
the door description.
If however the door Descriptions did include a representation of the door number (e.g. Apartment Entrance
1.1, Bedroom 1.1, Bathroom 1.1) then the wizard determines if the door descriptions can be automatically
generated and gives you choices accordingly.
The option to change the way door descriptions are generated is available only when you are using structured
numbering.
Door stamping
Choose if the stamping for each new door is to be the same as the door from which it was created, or if the
stamping for the new doors should be made the same as the new door number.
Confirm new door numbers
All the door numbers and descriptions that will be created are displayed. Peruse the list to be certain that it is
what you are expecting.
Ready to duplicate doors
A summary of the change that will be applied is shown.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 138 ProMaster Master Keying

Each door generated will have the same lock, area and other attributes as the door from which it is
generated.

9.9.6 Duplicating a door area

The process of duplicating door areas takes all the doors in an area, preferably with some commonality in the
way they are numbered, and from this it produces new areas that are a copy of the original area. For
example, you might enter doors for level 1 of an apartment building and then duplicate this for areas 2 and 3.
Duplicating door areas is a feature that will save you a huge amount of time on large and well
structured projects. To use this feature to its maximum potential, you need to plan your data entry.
Getting started
· From the Doors menu, select Doors.

· Search for the first door you want to duplicate.

· Click Options the Duplicate area.

Making a change
Select area
Select the area you want to duplicate. The choice is pre-populated with the door you selected before starting
the wizard.
Select doors
The doors in the area you selected are shown. Initially they are all selected. Before proceeding, peruse the list
and deselect any doors that you do not want to duplicate for the new area.
Door numbering
The door numbers of the doors you selected are analysed, and ProMaster Hardware determines which parts
of the door numbers can be changed to produce the new doors.
· Choose the method for how new door numbers will be created.

Here are the methods and how they work:

Method Description
Create new door numbers using Looks for common parts in the door numbers and if common parts are
structured numbering available then this method is allowed. For example, doors 1.1A, 1.1B and
1.1C would be analysed as Numeric,Symbol,Numeric,Alpha and as the
numeric parts are the same on all doors, they would be available for this
method.

You must enter the number that new doors will start from and progress
up to.

So, in this example, if you chose the first numeric portion and choose
starting from 2 and progressing up to 3, then two areas are created with
the following door numbers are generated: 2.1A, 2.1B, 2.1C, 3.1A, 3.1B,
3.1C.
Create new door numbers using This method works regardless of how existing doors are numbered and
door number generation rules generates a sequence of new numbers for the new doors.

You may enter a prefix and suffix. You must specify what the starting
number is and how many of each door are generated. The number of
each door generated is effectively the number of new areas created.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 139

So, using the example where you are duplicating 3 doors, and you enter
Prefix "X", Suffix "SP", Number from "2", Qty of each door "3" and pad
number length to "2", then the following door numbers are generated:
(X02SP, X03SP, X04SP), (X05SP, X06SP, X07SP), (X08SP, X09SP,
X10SP). The parentheses show each of the 3 areas.
Create new door numbers by Using this method, you enter pairs of existing leading characters and what
altering the leading characters of those characters will be replaced with on the new doors.
the door number
Using this method, only one new area may be generated. To make
another area you must run the wizard again.

Here's an example.

Say you are copying doors called DL4-1, DL4-2, APT401-1, APT401-2,
APT403-1, APT402-2

Specify change "DL4" to "DL5" and "APT4" to "APT5".

The door numbers produced will be: DL5-1, DL5-2, APT501-1, APT501-2,
APT503-1, APT502-2
Area names
ProMaster Master Keying shows the first new door in each new area, and what it has determined the new
areas will be called.
If you want to change the names of the new areas, then for each entry in the list, click to highlight the new
area, enter a new area name in the space provided below then click Update to apply the new area name.
You must then specify the name for each area.
Door stamping
Choose if the stamping for each new door is to be the same as the door from which it was created, or if the
stamping for the new doors should be made the same as the new door number.
Confirm new door numbers

All the door numbers and descriptions that will be created are displayed. Peruse the list to be certain that it is
what you are expecting.
Ready to duplicate doors
A summary of the change that will be applied is shown.
Each door generated will have the same lock, area and other attributes as the door from which it is
generated.

9.9.7 Door history

Door history allows you to see the jobs when a door was ordered.
Getting started
132
See Doors .
A list of jobs is displayed.
You may click Details to open the highlighted job.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 140 ProMaster Master Keying

9.9.8 Exporting doors to a csv file

232
See Exporting system data to a csv file .

9.9.9 Importing doors from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with door information you can import this data.
304
Read the topic Door import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The door field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the door is new (and
therefore will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).

Getting started
132
See Doors .
Importing data
To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. Choose if you want new items, if you are updating
existing items, or both.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 141

erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Data remapping
Any values that match existing information are mapped automatically and you will see on those lines the
Value from database will be completed. For all lines where the Value from database is blank, you must:
Click the line then choose the correct value from the Use value drop down list, then click she Set button to
set that value for the line you are working on. Repeat this process for all incomplete lines. If you make a
mistake simply repeat the process on the erroneous line to alter it.

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

9.9.10 Importing door renaming from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with door renaming information you can import this data.
305
Read the topic Door renaming import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
This is not a normal process. It is useful if you create a system not knowing what the doors are called
(And perhaps you have netered sequential names) and then later receive the correct door numbers.
Getting started
132
See Doors .
Importing data

To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
· Click Next

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 142 ProMaster Master Keying

For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.
· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.

9.9.11 Importing from ProMaster Hardware

ProMaster Hardware is used for designing and managing the door hardware aspects of a building construction
project. Invariably after the construction phase of a building is complete, a master key system is required. At
this time, rather than starting from scratch in ProMaster Master Keying, great efficiencies can be realised by
importing data from ProMaster Hardware into ProMaster Master Keying.
It may be that your business runs both ProMaster Master Keyingand ProMaster Hardware, or you may receive
a ProMaster Hardware export from the architectural hardware specifier.
General
The file produced by ProMaster Hardware includes only those doors that are flagged within ProMaster
Hardware as being keyed.
The file produced by ProMaster Hardware may include only the lock product, or may contain all the door
hardware. This choice is made by the ProMaster Hardware user when the export is produced for you.
If the ProMaster Hardware user has created any keys, these too will be exported to you.
The file produced by ProMaster Hardware is used within ProMaster Master Keying to introduce doors and
possibly keys to master-key system. It does not produce a new master key system for a number of reasons,
not limited to the following: There is often not a one-to-one correlation between a building project and a
master-key system, and the building project may be an extension to an existing building so an existing
master-key system must be extended.
Doors and keys are added to the system you have open. The import does not create a new system. If
you require a new system, then create it before performing the import.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the System menu, select Import doors and keys from ProMaster Hardware 7.

Importing data
The wizard shows you information about the data in the file and asks about how you want doors and keys
imported.
The doors and/or keys are added to your system.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 143

Any doors or keys that already exist with the same door number or key number as one being imported
will not be altered. Those doors or keys in the import file will be ignored.

9.9.12 Door groups

Door groups provide a way to take a selection of doors, with no particular rules constraining your selection,
and to give that selection a meaningful name.
Door groups can then be used for a number of reporting operations and in the keying matrix.
Getting started

· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Door menu, select Door groups.

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your door groups.

Editing the group

Whether you are adding a group or altering an existing one, the process is simple.
· The group must have a name, and than group name must not be used by another door group within this
system
· Click Add to select doors that you want in the group. You may do this as many times as you need.

· Click Remove to take a door out of the group.

When you have finished editing the group, click OK to save it.

9.9.13 Bulk change doors

Bulk changing is the process whereby you may apply the same change to a few or even many doors in a
single operation. It is useful for changing a number of doors when you have entered them without this
information or to rapidly fix data errors.

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Doors menu, select Bulk change doors.

Alternatively, initiate the bulk change from the doors window after having searched for a range of doors. See
Doors 132.
Making a change
The process of making a bulk change is very simple, just follow these steps.
· Ensure that the correct doors are selected, selecting or deselecting them as necessary.

· In the Data type list, choose what you want to change

· The options for what you may change depend on the selection made. Enter the information for your change
(e.g. new value, selection, etc)
· Click the Apply change button.

Repeat these 4 steps as many times as you want.

Finally, to save your changes click the OK button.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 144 ProMaster Master Keying

Notes
Within this window, the selected change is applied only to items that are checked (in the far left column of
each item)
You can check and uncheck items individually, or use the Select all and Clear selection buttons. Right click
on the list for more selection options.
You can make as many different types of changes as you like within this window.
Changes are stored in memory, and are not saved until you click the OK button.

Doors that have been changed are indicated by a pencil graphic next to the door selection. You may
undo changes to keys by right clicking and choosing Undo.
Right click and choose Show changed values so see a graphic indicator of the individual values that
have been altered.

9.9.14 Sort doors

Generally, doors are added after the selected door when adding from the doors window, otherwise at the end
of the door list.
If your door are out of order, this process gives more sorting capabilities than sorting one door at a time from
132
the doors window. (See Doors )
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Doors menu, select Sort doors.

Making a change
The process of sorting doors involves selecting the doors to sort then applying a sorting operation to those
selected doors. The process may be repeated as many times as necessary.
Selection and sorting operations are accessible through the button bar at the top of the window, through a
pop-up context menu (right click mouse) and through various hot-key combinations.
Selecting doors
Doors may be selected using mouse/keyboard, including shift-clicking to select a range and ctrl-clicking to
select dis-contiguous doors, or various menu options such as:
· Select all

· Select none

· Select doors with the same area (The currently highlighted door must have an area)

· Select doors with the same stage (The currently highlighted door must have a stage)

· Select to bottom (Selects from the currently highlighted door to the end)

Sorting doors
The sorting operation is applied to the selected doors.

Option Description
Move up Moves all selected doors up one position.
Move down Moves all selected doors down one position.
Move up page Moves all the selected doors up half the height of the window.
Move down page Moves all the selected doors down half the height of the window.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 145

Bring together Brings all the selected doors together, positioning them under the topmost
selected door.
Sort door number as text Sorts the selected doors by doing a text comparison on their door
numbers.
Sort door number Sorts the selected doors in logical numerical order. All selected doors
must have a numerical component in the door number. Each door number
is broken into multiple numerical components and these are compared for
sorting purposes. A numeric sort will correctly produce the sequence 1.1,
1.2, ..., 1.9. 1.10, 1.11, 2.1, 2.2, ..., 2.9, 2.10
Sort by description Sorts the selected doors by their descriptions.

Finally, to save your changes click the OK button.

9.9.15 Set door quantity issued

Door issue numbers are tracked automatically when doors are manufactured.
For legacy systems entered into ProMaster Master Keying, it is unlikely that you have a complete order history
available (and that you want to enter all historical jobs), so you may want to set the quantity of each door
issued manually.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Door menu, select Set door quantities issued.

Making a change
All doors are show, along with the quantity currently known, and as a comparison the quantity accounted for
on jobs in ProMaster Master Keying.
Enter the new quantity that has been produced for any doors that are incorrect.
Do this only for legacy systems. Incorrect values will interfere with the automatic allocation of issue
numbers on jobs.

9.10 Keying matrix

The keying matrix is the most comprehensive way to view keying for a system.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Doors menu, select Keying

· Also accessible from doors search window and keys search window

An explanation of the options

When the keying matrix is opened, all doors and keys are loaded, however there are options to restrict the
view to a subset of keys or doors to make it easier to understand.

Option Description
Find key Search for keys. Keys that start with the text you enter are indicated with
a purple arrow. If there is a key that is a full match for the text you
entered then that key is selected as well as the purple arrow.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

146 ProMaster Master Keying

Key details Shows information about the current key.

Key display Show all keys: All keys are shown.

Show selection: This option is available if you invoke the keying matrix
from the keys search window and restricts the keys displayed to those
returned in the key search window.

Hide masters: Master keys are not shown but all other keys are shown.
This can be use for for large hierarchical, particularly in conjunction with
the propagation options, to simplify the display.

Show keys in group: This option is available if you have key groups
defined. After you choose a group, the matrix is redrawn to show only
the keys in that group.

Changed keys: This option shows keys where keying has been added or
removed, and is useful for checking your changes before saving. This
option makes the keying matrix read-only.
Find door Search for doors. Doors that start with the text you enter are indicated
with a purple arrow. If there is a door that is a full match for the text you
entered then that door is selected as well as the purple arrow.
Door details Shows information about the current door.
Door display Show all doors: All doors are shown.

Show selection: This option is available if you invoke the keying matrix
from the doors search window and restricts the doors displayed to those
returned in the door search window.

Show unique stamping: This options doors by stamping rather than

door number, and shows only the first door for each stamping.

When this display mode is used and you change the keying, it is
always propagated to other doors with the same stamping,
regardless of the propagation settings.

Show only first door for each keying: This option shows the first door
for each unique combination of keying. It does this by walking through all
the doors and each time a door has a different set of keys to previous
doors then the door is added to the display. This option makes the keying
matrix read-only.

Show doors in group: This option is available if you have door groups
defined. After you choose a group, the matrix is redrawn to show only
the doors in that group.

Changed doors: This option shows doors where keying has been added
or removed, and is useful for checking your changes before saving. This
option makes the keying matrix read-only.
Propagation Same stamping: With this option on, then when you turn keying on or off
for a cell, the same change is made to all doors with the same stamping
and on the same side (External/Internal).

The drop-down menu on the "Same stamping" option determines if the

doors to which the keying is copied are (a) All doors with the same

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 147

stamping or (b) Doors with the same stamping only if they are displayed
according to the "Door display" options.

Normally if doors are stamped according to the keying, the first and
default choice is correct. In the rare (and messy) case when
stamping relates to keying for only some doors, and you have
entered the keying matrix from the door search to restrict the
displayed doors by some other criteria then the second choice may
be helpful.

Add keys above: With this option on, then when you turn keying on for
a key, all keys above that key are turned on also.

Remove keys above: With this option on, then when you turn keying off
for a key, all keys above that key are turned off also.

Remove keys below: With this option on, then when you turn keying off
for a key, all keys below that key are turned off also.
Toggle keying Toggles the keying when a single cell selected or a valid selection (green
highlight, horizontal, vertical or diagonal).
Keying on Turns keying on when a single cell selected or a valid selection (green
highlight, horizontal, vertical or diagonal).
Keying off Turns keying off when a single cell selected or a valid selection (green
highlight, horizontal, vertical or diagonal).
Selection on Turns keying on for all cells in a selection, regardless of the shape of the
selection. Propagation does not apply.
Selection off Turns keying off for all cells in a selection, regardless of the shape of the
selection. Propagation does not apply.
This key | Key on Turns keying on for the selected key for all doors.
This key | Key off Turns keying off for the selected key for all doors.
This key | Undo changes to this Undoes all changes to the selected key, reverting it to the keying it had
key when you opened the window.
This door | Door on Turns keying on for the selected door for all keys.
This door | Door off Turns keying off for the selected door for all keys.
This door | Undo changes to this Undoes all changes to the selected door, reverting it to the keying it had
door when you opened the window.

Other functionality
Right click on the keying matrix for other options. Some options on this pop-up menu are the same as the
toolbar (however you can learn the shortcut keys by looking at the pop-up menu), but the new options are
listed here.

Option Description
Disallow changes to When on, changes to doors that have been manufactured are not
manufactured doors possible. The default value for this option is from an Application
Parameter "In keying matrix, make manufactured doors read-only by
default"
Copy keying to doors with the Copies the keying from the current door and side, to other doors with the
same stamping same stamping and to the same side of each of those doors.
148
Import keying from CSV file See Import keying from a csv file .

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 148 ProMaster Master Keying

Change orientation Swaps the location of doors and keys in columns/rows.

Use condensed layout Turn on for a compressed layout. Changed keyings are not shown and
less information for each door and key is shows, but many more doors
and keys will be visible without scrolling.
Show indicator for unassigned Turn on to show a warning graphic by each key that does not have doors
doors and keys assigned and by each door that does not have keys assigned.
Show indicator for doors with the Turn on to show a blue arrow graphic by each door that has the same
same stamping stamping as the current door. This operates on the same side of each
door (I.e. either external or internal, but not both at the same time)
Find next ... Navigates from the current location to other keyings in each direction.

Notes
In normal layout (not condensed), a green + graphic indicates each keying added and a red - graphic
indicates each keying removed.
Changes are not saved until you click OK.

9.10.1 Import keying from a csv file

If you have a CSV file with keying information you can import this data.
307
Read the topic Keying import (CSV) file format for more information on the file contents allowed.
The key field in the import is matched to existing values to determine if the key is new (and therefore
will be added) or existing (and therefore will be updated to the new information).
Getting started
145
See Keying matrix .
Importing data

To import data from a csv file, click on the Options button then choose Import csv.
A simple wizard steps you through the import process.
Select the file to import
· Click Select file to select the file you are importing.

· Click Next

File contents and operation

The wizard shows you the first four lines of the file so that you can see how it has been parsed. From this you
may determine if the file content is what you were expecting or not.
It is common for the first line of a CSV file to contain column headings. The wizard tries to determine if that is
the case with the file you selected, and sets the options accordingly. If the option for the first line is not
correct, be sure to check or un-check it as necessary.
The Operation determines how the import is processed. First you must choose if your import file refers to
Key numbers and Door numbers or if i refers to Key numbers And Door stamping. In the latter
scenario, imported data will be applied to all doors with the stamping and the propagation choice is changed
correspondingly
Propagation: If you are importing by Door number, you may choose any of the propagation rules. If you
are importing by Door stamping, then you must choose a propagation rule Propagate keys to same
145
stamping. See Keying matrix for a more comprehensive description of propagation rules.
· Click Next

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 149

Choose data columns

The wizard looks at the column headings (if they are included in the file) and from these it attempts to
determine what each column in the file is used for.
You may change the source column for each type of data. In each drop-down list, the column number,
heading and first piece of data is shown.
Before proceeding you must correct any errors in the automatic column selection and also for any unassigned
column make a selection for the source.
For all data types not contained in the import file the selection Not available must be made.

· Click Next

Data analysis
A comprehensive data analysis is performed and any problems are reported.
If the analysis indicates that there are errors contained in the file, then you have the option to see the detail of
those errors.
If there are errors, you must either fix the file and restart the import, of if you are happy to ignore the
erroneous rows then then you can check the option to skip those rows.
· Click Next

Ready to finish
A summary is displayed.
Click Finish to perform the import.
Notes

The imported keying is stored in the keying matrix. To save it, you must now click OK in the keying matrix. If
the keying imported was not what you expected, click Cancel in the keying matrix to discard all changes.

9.11 Reporting
9.11.1 Printer options
Most reports allows you to access printer options by clicking on the Printer options link on the bottom left of
the report options screen.
Printer options allow you to:
· Choose a different printer and paper tray for the report to be sent to.

· Print on both sides of the paper (if your printer supports duplexing)

· Print multiple copies

· Access the printer's advanced settings.

If you select the option to Show advanced printer settings before printing, the printer settings for your
printer are displayed before the report is sent to the printer. This allows you to access printer specific
features such as printing multiple pages onto a single sheet of paper, selecting a different output bin or
requesting the report be stapled.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 150 ProMaster Master Keying

9.11.2 Admin reports

9.11.2.1 Unreturned system registration forms
This report tells you about systems where you have printed a signature registration form (see Signature
167
registration form ) but it has not been returned from the customer and recorded.
Running this report periodically and chasing unreturned registration forms should be undertaken
periodically.
Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Unreturned system registration forms.

Range

The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include. This can be useful for partitioning your follow-up
calls between high-end security systems and low security ones.
How should the follow-up date be Systems where the follow-up date is before today: The follow
treated update date on each system printed has passed.

Disregard follow-up date: The follow up date on each system is not

considered when selecting the systems to print.

Systems where the follow-up date has passed by 7 days or

more: The follow up date on each system was passed 7 days ago or
more.

Systems where the follow-up date has passed by 14 days or

more: The follow up date on each system was passed 14 days ago or
more.
Include systems that have not When selecting systems to show on the report, this flag allows you to not
had a signature registration form consider if a registration form has been printed, and only consider if a
printed registration card has been received. This may produce many more
systems on the report.

Notes
When you add, edit or import signatories for a system and a registration form has been printed but not
received you will be asked if it has now been received.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 151

Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.2 Blank signature registration form

This report is used to gather signatory information, particularly the signatures of each signatory, but is used
when the system is not yet productd.
167
See also Signature registration form
This report is available (with appropriate permissions) whe a system is not open.

Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Blank Signature registration form.

Options

Option Description
Show the client name Shows a placed for the client name on the form.
Show system information Shows a place for the system address and other properties on the form.
Show user's choice of agent Manufacturer edition only. Prints a place for the client to enter the name
of there preferred key cutting agent.
Number of blank signatory places After any existing signatories, places for new signatories will be printed.
to show You can choose from 1 to 20 places.
Use layout with increased text Choose between 2 layouts.
size
Template Choose your instructions to the signatories. This is printed at the top of
the form. See Templates 76 to create templates.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.3 System without signatories

This report tells you about systems where the number of active signatories recorded is less than the number
of signatories required to order keys or doors.
Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Systems without signatories.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 152 ProMaster Master Keying

choices:

Range Description
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include.
Include systems where the Normally systems that require no signatories to order keys will be
required number of signatories s excluded from this report. Select this option to include these systems.
zero

Producing the report

See Printer options 149
for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.4 Signatories without a signature picture

This report tells you about systems and active signatories where there is not a picture of the signatory's
signature recorded.
Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Signatories without a signature picture.

Range

The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 153

Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.5 Jobs awaiting coding or manufacturing

This report can best be considered as a "to do" list, showing jobs that are awaiting coding (I.e. Systems
where a job has been entered, but has not proceeded to manufacturing because coding is not complete) or
jobs that are awaiting manufacturing.
The "coding" status of jobs, where the job has been entered and locked but not released to
manufacturing because coding is not complete, is available in Premium and Manufacturer edition and
to use it requires the application parameter "Send jobs to coding when released if coding is required"
be turned on.
Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Systems without signatories.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include.
Which job status do you want to Choose between "coding and manufacturing", "coding" only and
include "manufacturing" only.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.6 Job administration summary

This report gives a look into the job activity. It gives flexibility to slice the data numerous ways, and for large
companies provides an insight into the job activity.
Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Job administration summary.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 154 ProMaster Master Keying

Range Description
Which factory do you want to You may choose all factories or an individual factory
include in the report
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include.
Which job status do you want to Select which of the job status you want to include. Your selection
include determines which dates are considered.
What date range do you want to You may select a date range for each job status.
include If you do not want a starting date or an ending date to be applied when
selecting the date, check the proximate "Any" check box and the date will
be disabled and ignored in the data selection.

Notes
The more options you select, the more restricted will be the result.
For example, if you request "entering" and "manufacturing" jobs, and specify a start and end date for both the
"created" date and the "manufacturing" date, then what you will get is:
· Jobs in the data entry state (and those in the coding state) that were created in the date period stipulated
for the "created" date.
and also
· Jobs in the manufacturing state that were sent to manufacturing in the date period stipulated by the
"manufacturing" dates and that were created in the date period stipulated for the "created" date.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.7 Job key section usage

This report gives a summary by design module and by key section of the number of each key section used in
manufacturing.
Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Job key section usage.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 155

Which factory do you want to You may choose all factories or an individual factory
include in the report
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include.
What date range do you want to You may select a date range for when the job was sent to manufacturing.
include If you do not want a starting date or an ending date to be applied when
selecting the date, check the proximate "Any" check box and the date will
be disabled and ignored in the data selection.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports 310
for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.8 Aged systems

This report is used to identify systems that have been inactive, or are old. The result of this report can be
managed as a sales opportunity to install a newer more secure solution for your customers.
Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Aged systems.

Range

The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include.
Select systems by considering Allows you to select systems by specifying a date after which a job has
the most recent job not been created.
Select systems by considering Allows you to select systems by specifying a date before which the system
the system installation date was installed.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 156 ProMaster Master Keying

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.9 Key Manager users

This report identifies your systems that are enhanced by ProMaster Key Manager at the customer site. By
using this report to identify users on old versions of Key Manager, you can facilitate their transition to a newer
more feature rich version of Key Manager.

Getting started
· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Key manager users.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which system types do you want Include all system types: No particular attention is applied to system
to include types when making the selection for the report

Include only selected system types: You may choose one or more
system types to include.
Which Key Manager versions do Select one or more versions of Key Manager to include.
you want to include

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.10 Lock usage

This report shows you everywhere a lock or cylinder is used.
Getting started
· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Locks and cylinders.

· Search for a lock or cylinder.

· Right click on a cylinder and choose Usage report.

Options

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 157

Option Description
Include doors using a lock that When the chosen product is a cylinder, and this option is checked, then
contain this cylinder any door using a lock that references the cylinder is included.
Include closed systems Determines of systems marked as "closed" are included.
Include system snapshots Determines of systems marked as "snapshot" are included.
Show only the system summary If checked, the report is significantly shorter with only a quantity for each
and do not show doors system.
If unchecked, each door is listed.
The first is useful for seeing how many times a lock is used whereas the
second is useful for locating doors using a lock or cylinder.

Producing the report

See Printer options 149
for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.2.11 Custom reports - general

This is where you may print "general" custom reports. That is to say, they are not related to the system that
is open or to the job that is being manufactured.
This is available on premium and manufacturer editions with the "end user reporting" feature
purchased with your ProMaster Master Keying license.
Getting started

· From the Admin Reports menu, choose Custom reports - general.

Range
Choose from the list the report you want.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 158 ProMaster Master Keying

9.11.3 System reports

9.11.3.1 Initial system reports
Initial system reports is a collection of other reports gathered into a single place. The Initial system reports
collection is designed to simplify the task of producing reports for the customer after you have entered the
doors, keys and keying so they may be approved prior to coding and manufacturing.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Initial system reports.

The 5 reports available are:

158
System details
167
Signature registration form
160
Order form
161
Keys
Doors 162

Initial system reports has most of the options that the individual reports have, but simplified to some extent in
that all keys and doors rather than having a selection available.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.2 System details

This report summarises the system, with address information, optional client information and optional
signatories.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Systems details.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Show client Choose if you want the client information included on the report.
Show signatories Choose if you want the signatories included on the report.
Inactive signatories are not included in the report.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 159

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.

Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports 310
for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.3 System lock usage

This report gives you quantities of locking product used by a system.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Systems lock usage.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
How do you want to count locks Count the items defined for each door: This choice examines all
doors and their locks, and counts the quantity of each lock product. I.e.
The quantity of products defined for each door, not the quantity actually
ordered.

Count the items ordered on all manufactured job: This choice

examines all products on each door on each job. Jobs in the "coding"
state, "manufacturing" state and "completed" state are considered for this
report.

Count the product ordered on a single job: Much the same as the
previous choice, but for a single job that you select from the list.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 160 ProMaster Master Keying

9.11.3.4 Order form

The order form is used to facilitate an accurate order from your customer if they are not blessed with
electronic ordering through ProMaster Key Manager.

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Order form.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which keys do you want to None: Keys are not show on the order form.
include
Located on the "keys" tab All: All keys are included on the order form.

A selection of keys: You select the keys to be included on the order

form.

Keys in a category: Select a key category. Keys in that category are

included on the order form.

Keys fitting a single door area: Select a door area. All keys that fit
doors in that area are included on the order form.
Which doors do you want to None: Doors are not show on the order form.
include
Located on the "doors" tab All: All doors are included on the order form.

A selection of doors: You select the doors to be included on the order

form.

Doors in an area: Select an area. Doors in that area are included on

the order form.
Show signatories on each page Show the area where signatories write their names and sign on each
page of the order form.
Signatory quantity Choose the number of signatory boxes shown (from 0 to 9)
Template Choose your instructions (if any). This is printed near the top of the form.
See Templates 76 to create templates.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 161

9.11.3.5 Keys
This is one of the most frequently used reports. It is also part of the collection of reports produced by the
158
Initial system reports .

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Keys.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which keys do you want to All: All keys are printed.
include in this report
A selection of keys: You select the keys to be included on the report.

Keys in a category: Select a key category. Keys in that category are

included on the report.

Keys in a group: Select a key group. Keys in that group are included on
the report.

Keys that have been manufactured: All keys that have been
manufactured are included on the report.

Keys that have not been manufactured: All keys that have not been
manufactured are included on the report.

Options

Option Description
Show key category When selected, the key category will be shown on the report.
Show doors When selected, each key will be followed by the doors that it operates.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.6 Key hierarchy

Prints a structured view of keys using the key hierarchy (key above).
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 162 ProMaster Master Keying

· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Key heierarchy.

131
Also printed from Key hierarchy allowing a choice of original hierarchy or modified hierarchy.
Options

Option Description
Print the key hierarchy Prints all keys showing the key hierarchy
Print the modified key hierarchy Available when printed from the key hierarchy editor and changes have
which is not yet saved been made. This selection prints the modified key hierarchy which has
not yet been saved.
Show expanded and collapsed Available when printed from the key hierarchy editor.
branches as displayed When unchecked, all keys are shows.
When checked each branch is printed as currently displayed (expanded or
collapsed)

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.7 Doors
This is one of the most frequently used reports. It is also part of the collection of reports produced by the
158
Initial system reports .

The report layout determines the type of report produced.

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Doors.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which doors do you want to All: All doors are printed.
include in this report
A selection of doors: You select the doors to be included on the report.

Doors that fit a selection of keys: You select one or more keys and all
doors that are operated by any of those keys are included on the report.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 163

Doors in an area: Select an area. Doors in that area are included on

the report.

Doors in a group: Select a door group. Doors in that group are included
on the report.

Doors that have been manufactured: All doors that have been
manufactured are included on the report.

Doors that have not been manufactured: All doors that have not
been manufactured are included on the report.

Construction keyed doors: All doors marked as having construction

keying are included in the report.

Options

Option Description
Report layout The report layout determines the type of report that is produced.

Door detail: Shows doors and associated information, but not keys.

Doors with keys: Shows doors and associated information, and after
each door shows the keys that operate the door.

Non keyed doors: Shows only the doors that are marked as non-keyed.
Show lock information Shows lock information on the report (First 2 layouts).
Show door notes Shows notes associated with each door.
Show quantity issued Shows the quantity of each door manufactured (First 2 layouts).

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.8 Keying matrix

This report shows a matrix of doors and keys, with intersection points indicating the keys that operate each
door.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Keying matrix.

Range

© 2019 WH Software Limited

164 ProMaster Master Keying

The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which doors do you want to All: All doors are printed.
include in this report
A selection of doors: You select the doors to be included on the report.

Doors that fit a selection of keys: You select one or more keys and all
doors that are operated by any of those keys are included on the report.

Doors in an area: Select an area. Doors in that area are included on

the report.

Doors in a group: Select a door group. Doors in that group are included
on the report.

Doors that have been manufactured: All doors that have been
manufactured are included on the report.
Doors that have not been manufactured: All doors that have not
been manufactured are included on the report.

Construction keyed doors: All doors marked as having construction

keying are included in the report.

Options

Option Description
Show door description Shows the door description - results in fewer doors per page.
Show door area Shows the door area - results in fewer doors per page.
Show door quantity Shows the quantity of each door manufactured.
manufactured
Show key description Shows the key description - results in fewer keys per page.
Show key quantity manufactured Shows the quantity of each key manufactured.
Show keys not used by selected Shows all keys instead of only those required for the doors being printed.
doors
Show only first door for each Determines which doors to print by looking at each door in order and
keying looking at its keying then showing only those doors with a unique keying.
The purpose of this layout is to allow a printout to read when determining
the system structure for coding.
Show unkeyed indicator Shows a warning graphic next to each door and key that is not assigned
any keying.
Print on large paper Prints more doors and keys per page. Useful if you have a large format
printer. The other thing is that many modern printers will automatically
resize A3 content to A4 if the printer does not support the larger paper -
the result if this is more doors and keys per page and somewhat smaller
writing which is agreeable only to younger eyes!

Notes
Large systems may require a number of pages to be joined together sideways as well as vertically. When you
preview the report, one vertical section is shown at a time.
Producing the report

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 165

See Printer options 149

for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.9 Key history

This is a report that shows for each key the jobs where the key was ordered. Jobs of any status are
considered (Except when choosing by "Keys on jobs in a date range"), including any jobs that are currently
being entered. The status of each job is shown.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Keys history.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which keys do you want to All: All keys are printed.
include in this report
A selection of keys: You select the keys to be included on the report.

Keys in a category: Select a key category. Keys in that category are

included on the report.

Keys in a group: Select a key group. Keys in that group are included on
the report.

Keys on jobs in a date range: Select a date range for the job
manufactured date.

Options

Option Description
Show signatories Beneath each job the signatories for that job are shown.

Notes
When the range "Keys on jobs in a date range" is select, a different report layout is generated and the criteria
for the report is considered differently.
· The layout shows each job then keys on that job instead of keys and the jobs on which the key was
ordered.
· Jobs in manufacturing and completed state are included.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 166 ProMaster Master Keying

· The date range entered is matched to the date on which the job was released to manufacturing. The date
shown for each job is the released to manufacturing date. The other variants of this report don't select the
data based on a date range, but display the date when the job was created.
Producing the report
See Printer options 149
for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.10 Door history

This is a report that shows for each door the jobs where the door was ordered. Jobs of any status are
considered, including any jobs that are currently being entered. The status of each job is shown.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Doors history.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which doors do you want to All: All doors are printed.
include in this report
A selection of doors: You select the doors to be included on the report.

Doors that fit a selection of keys: You select one or more keys and all
doors that are operated by any of those keys are included on the report.

Doors in an area: Select an area. Doors in that area are included on

the report.

Doors in a group: Select a door group. Doors in that group are included
on the report.

Construction keyed doors: All doors marked as having construction

keying are included in the report.

Options

Option Description
Show lock information Shows lock information on the report.
Show door notes Shows notes associated with each door.
Show issue numbers Shows the issue numbers assigned on each job. Generally this is
significant only when a door represents a padlock that may be ordered

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 167

multiple times.
Show signatories Beneath each job the signatories for that job are shown.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.11 Signature registration form

This report is used to gather signatory information, particularly the signatures of each signatory.
After you receive the form back from your client you will do two things. First, scan the whole form and store it
in the system documents so you have a permanent record of it. Then scan each signature into ProMaster
Master Keying against the corresponding signatory. This way you may verify signatures for each signatory
when processing a job.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Signature registration form.

Options

Option Description
Show the client name Shows the client name on the form.
Show system information Shows the system address and other properties on the form.
Show system description Shows the system description on the form.
Show existing active signatories This option is useful for gathering signatures on signatories that you have
that do not have a signature entered but don't have a signature, or if you want to get updated
recorded signatory details
Show existing active signatories This option is useful if you want to get updated signatory details
that have a signature recorded
Show user's choice of agent Manufacturer edition only. Prints a place for the client to enter the name
of there preferred key cutting agent.
Number of blank signatory places After any existing signatories, places for new signatories will be printed.
to show You can choose from 0 to 20 places.
Use layout with increased text Choose between 2 layouts.
size
Template Choose your instructions to the signatories. This is printed at the top of
the form. See Templates 76 to create templates.

System update

Option Description

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 168 ProMaster Master Keying

Update the system to record Causes a follow up date to be recorded, so that you may later report on
printed date and follow-up date unreturned registration forms. See Unreturned system registration
forms 150
How many days from today until If the system is to be updated with a follow up date, this option allows you
follow-up date to specify how far in the future that date is from today.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.

Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.12 Signatory key authorities

This report produces a matrix of signatories and keys permitted and is available when the system is
configured to have individual key signatory authorities.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Signatory key authorities.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which information do you want All: All keys and active signatories are printed.
to include in this report
A selection of signatories: You select the signatories to include in the
report. All keys are shown.

A selection of keys: You select the keys to be included on the report.

All active signatories are shown.

Options

Option Description
Show keys that are not used by Determines if unassigned keys are shown. If you are using the report to
any signatories gather information on permissions then likely you want this on, however if
the report is to convey information about the current permissions then
having this off may be useful in reducing the amount of information
shown.
Show signatories that are not Determines if unassigned signatories are shown. Particularly useful in
used by any keys reducing the size of the report when only a few keys are selected for the

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 169

report.
Show signatory title Includes the signatory title after each signatory. This results in fewer
signatories per page.

Notes
Large systems may require a number of pages to be joined together sideways as well as vertically. When you
preview the report, one vertical section is shown at a time.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.13 Signatory door authorities

This report produces a matrix of signatories and doors permitted and is available when the system is
configured to have individual door signatory authorities.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Signatory door authorities.

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which information do you want All: All doors and active signatories are printed.
to include in this report
A selection of signatories: You select the signatories to include in the
report. All doors are shown.

A selection of doors: You select the door to be included on the report.

All active signatories are shown.

Options

Option Description
Show doors that are not used by Determines if unassigned doors are shown. If you are using the report to
any signatories gather information on permissions then likely you want this on, however if
the report is to convey information about the current permissions then
having this off may be useful in reducing the amount of information
shown.
Show signatories that are not Determines if unassigned signatories are shown. Particularly useful in
used by any doors reducing the size of the report when only a few doors are selected for the

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 170 ProMaster Master Keying

report.
Show signatory title Includes the signatory title after each signatory. This results in fewer
signatories per page.

Notes
Large systems may require a number of pages to be joined together sideways as well as vertically. When you
preview the report, one vertical section is shown at a time.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.14 Custom reports - system

This is where you may print "system" custom reports. That is to say, reports that related to the system that is
open.
This is available on premium and manufacturer editions with the "end user reporting" feature
purchased with your ProMaster Master Keying license.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Reports menu, choose Custom reports - system.

Range
Choose from the list the report you want.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.11.3.15 Construction keyed doors

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 171

This report is available at the time you modify a system (See Modifying a system 109 ) and change the keying
type from a construction-keyed keying type to a non-construction-keyed keying type. After confirming that you
want the change, and before all doors are modified to make them non-construction keyed, this report is
available.
The report includes all construction-keyed doors.
Options

Option Description
Show keys Shows doors and associated information, and after each door shows the
keys that operate the door.
Show lock information Shows lock information on the report.
Show door notes Shows notes associated with each door.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.12 Coding
9.12.1 Coding overview
Coding is the process of assigning key codes to keys and calculating the door pinning then checking for errors.

Coding can be performed in the Coding tree, Coding matrix of Kaba coding grid, depending on the way
you prefer to work and also on the design module of your key system.
The first time you open a coding window, you are taken to the System design window to create the system
design. The system design window can be accessed at any time to alter or expand the system design.
In the System design window you choose the TMK, and how to progress codes. You can alter the system
rules (which are copied from the associated System type).
In the Coding window, keys are assigned to keys, and when all keys are assigned and door pinning
calculated successfully, the system is marked that the coding is complete, allowing jobs to be manufactured.
Any changes to the system, such as adding keys, adding doors or altering keying, results in the system being
flagged as coding required. You must then return to the coding window to complete any coding steps
necessary including a successful pinning calculation and error check.

9.12.2 System design

The general method of creating a system design is the same for all design modules. This topic outlines the
general process.
See the design module specific information in the Creating and modifying the system design topic under
233
the specific design module here: Design modules

© 2019 WH Software Limited

172 ProMaster Master Keying

After you create a system (I.e. You've entered the doors, keys and keying), you will proceed to coding the
system. Depending on the way you work, coding is performed using the Coding tree, Coding matrix, or
Coding grid. These three methods are referred to generically as Coding windows.
Creating the design
When you first open a coding window, ProMaster Master Keying identifies that the system does not have its
design parameters defined, and opens the appropriate system design window.
After you have defined the design parameters, you then proceed to a coding window (See Coding screen
180 184 186
overview , Coding using the coding tree , Coding using the coding matrix , Coding using the kaba
188
coding grid ).
Changing the design
You may revisit the system design at any time by first opening a coding window, then click the Change
design button (top right of the window).
The capabilities available when you are changing the design are similar to those you use when creating the
design, the most notable difference being the ability to add multiple Code progression when changing the
design.
More on changing the design later.
General process for creating system design
The general process for creating a system design is:
· Select the appropriate key section, if applicable, from the drop down list.

· Verify the Rules, and make any changes needed.

· Enter the TMK, or allow ProMaster Master Keying to generate one for you by clicking the Create TMK
button.
· Define a Code progression, which is the rule that ProMaster Master Keying uses to derive codes for your
system from the TMK. If all the keys in your system have correct designations and key above, you may use
178
the Design assistant to create the Code progression.
· Click OK to save the design and proceed to the coding window.
233
Design module specific features apply, see Design modules
Creating system design: Key section and TMK
When you create a system design, the first thing you must do is select the highest level key section that the
design will use. The drop down list of key sections shows key sections grouped into their families, so if you
have the same key section name in two different families, be sure to select the correct one. Most design
modules have a key section.
Next, the TMK is required. In most design modules you may enter a TMK. Most design provide a button,
Create TMK, that will create a TMK that adheres to the rules. Create TMK is not offered in design modules
where the TMK is provided by the lock manufacturer. Some design modules require that you pick a List
provided by the lock manufacturer before creating the TMK.
Creating system design: Rules
Some design modules have few rules that you may alter, while others have many. The rules are generally a
mixture of physical constraints and quality control constraints. The default value for each rule is determined by
your system type. See System types 87
Get the system type defaults right, and each time you make a system the values are correct.
Creating system design: Standard progression

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 173

In order to produce a hierarchy of codes, you must progress some chambers and specify what each chamber
is used for (e.g. Master, Change etc). The are two ways of specifying a progression. The more flexible but
more complicated way is to enter your own values for SOP (sequence of progression), Depth step and
Designation. Later we will look at how to do this. The easy way is to click the Assist button and allow the
Design assistant 178 to determine the progressed and rotated chambers.
The Design Assistant attempts to compute the size required for your system by examining your key hierarchy.
However, even if your key hierarchy is not in place you may still use the Design Assistant to determine the
Code Progression by entering into the Design Assistant the quantities you require of each key hierarchy.
Entering your own code progression

This might seem like a lot of information when you first read it, but knowing how it works gives you greater
flexibility and many users prefer to always define their own code progression.
To enter your own code progression, most design modules require three pieces of information as follows (but
remember there are differences in design modules - some do not use depth steps, others require additional
information):
· Sequence of progression (SOP): All positions being progressed must have a value of 1 or greater. All other
positions, including positions for rotated constants, must have the value 0. No value other than 0 may
appear more than once. Numbered positions must be contiguous, but not necessarily in order, starting from
1. SOP is used primarily to control the drawing of the coding matrix, but also determines if codes on the
coding tree progress from left to right or right to left.
· Depth step: When used by the design module, all positions that are progressed or rotated must have a
depth step of 1 or greater. All other positions must have the value 0. Depth Steps are used to determine the
values of code differs that will be produced.
· Designations: Designations specify the hierarchy of codes on the coding tree. They are not used in the
coding matrix. The following table explains the symbols used for designating a chamber as progressed for
each level of key hierarchy, and also the symbols used to designate the corresponding rotated constant.
Right click on any cell in the code progression to get a menu of available values. Learn them, it is
easier to type them, but when you forget, right click for the options.

Rank Symbol progressed Symbol rotated

G5MK L l
G5XK U
G4MK K k
G4XK V
G3MK J j
G3XK W
G2MK H h
G2XK Z
GMK G g
GXK Y
MK M m
XK X
CK C c
IK I

A number of rules govern the use of the symbols to ensure a sensible result.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

174 ProMaster Master Keying

When any hierarchy symbol (L, K, J, H, G, M) is used then one of the symbols immediately beneath it must
exist. E.g. If you use a "G", then you must use at least one "M" or "X" must be used.

When any cross master symbol (V, W, Z, Y, X) is used then so must the hierarchy symbol (K, J, H, G, M) at
the same level.
When any rotated constant symbol is used, the corresponding progressed symbol must be used also.
Special Symbols: In addition to the symbols used for Progressed and Rotated Constants, the following special
symbols are available.

Symbol Description
B Designates that the chamber is used for a ball for lost ball
construction keying when allowed by the design module. When "B"
is used, the depth step specifies the ball size and the SOP must
be 0. See Construction keying 177.
A Used on pure keyed-to-differ. "A" is construed to mean All. If you
use the symbol A then you may have only one code progression,
and other than 0, A is the only symbol allowed. Available only on
design modules that support pure keyed-to-differ. When "A" is
used, then all combinations of codes are produced, without any
consideration to master keys. This is suitable only for systems that
have many individual keys, but absolutely no master keys.

After entering the values for a progression, it is a good idea to review it (Click Test, see Testing the system
design - coding tree 179 , Testing the system design - coding matrix) 180
Creating system design: Custom progression
The standard progressions we have looked at until now use a constant depth step for each chamber and
generated codes are produced in ascending order. Many design modules allow you to specify a custom
progression.
Custom progressions use SOP and designations in the manner described above, but instead of depth step you
specify for each progressed or rotated chamber the actual depth values you want to use and the order in
which they are to be used.
To make a custom progression, click on the custom progression tab. In the appropriate cells enter the
progress order and designations as you would for a standard progression, then for the depths enter the
values that you want that chamber progressed to.
Custom progressions give the ability for the agile minded to produce multiple code progressions,
each time using only part of a chamber. They may also assist you in making a coding tree that is
compatible with a legacy system. Unless you have special coding requirements is is advisable to use
standard progressions where possible.
Modifying a system design
You may revisit the system design at any time by first opening a coding window, then click the Change
design button (top right of the window).
Here's an overview of things specific to changing the system design.
Making more key section available
If the design module allows multi-section systems, then the button Promote key section will allow you to
select a new higher level key section for the system from the key section family already assigned to the
system. Having promoted the system key section, there will be more key sections available in the coding
window. See Promote key section 176.
Changing the TMK

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 175

There is little if any reason to alter a TMK after a system is coded, however as you start coding you may
determine that a better main permutation selection would be beneficial. To allow the main permutation to be
altered, click on the adjacent Edit TMK button.
Adding another code progression
Many systems need only a single code progression to derive all the codes you will need. However on occasion
you may want to "slice and dice" the codes in such a way that a single code progression cannot produce. For
example, when you want to make several coding trees to tightly represent a non-symmetrical system..
· To add another code progression, enter it into the Standard progression or Custom progression as
described earlier.
· Enter a brief description of the code progression in the place provided. Please do this! When you design
systems with multiple code progressions is will often be unclear why each code progression was created,
particularly when you revisit the system some time later. The description appears on the coding window to
assist you while coding.
· Click the Test button to see the solution.

· Click Add progression to add the code progression to the system design.

You may enter noted for the progression on the notes tab. Click back on onto the Standard
progression or Custom progression (choose the one you where entered the progression) tab
clicking Add progression.
· Click OK to save the system design changes. On returning to the coding window the new code progression
will be available.
When you add multiple code progressions, ProMaster Master Keying applies constraints to prohibit you
from entering conflicting code progressions. In particular, once a chamber has been used for one
purpose you are prohibited from using it for another purpose. This is a good solution for many user,
however some users will find this too restrictive. It is possible to disable these checks in the security
group permissions by turning on the security flag Access advanced coding features. Be aware that
turning on Access advanced coding features disables a number of sanity checks, so you are now
responsible for more of the system integrity. Don't turn on Access advanced coding features
because you want to be the most powerful person around! Turn it on only if you really need it.
Altering a code progression

There are a number of reasons why you might want to alter a code progression. For example, you might
want to introduce some rotated constants.
When you alter a code progression, be careful not to make it incompatible with any existing codes. To make a
simple example, let's say the Designations were 000CC0 and using this progression you coded the system.
Then later you need more codes, and decide to change the Designations to 00CCC0. This will produce key
codes that are not compatible with the ones you have already used, because instead of 2 positions varying
from the TMK, you now have 3 positions varying. In this situation, to get more codes for an existing system
and to keep them compatible, you must rotate a constant like this: 00cCC0. (Notice the lower case c which
specifies the rotated constant).
To alter a code progression:
· Select the Code progression in the list.

· Click the Edit Progression button.

The code progression will be displayed in the standard progression or custom progression depending on the
type of progression.
· Make your changes, being sure to enter a description if appropriate.

· Click the Test button to see the solution.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 176 ProMaster Master Keying

· Click Save progression to save the progression or Cancel edit to discard your changes.

Converting a standard progression to custom

To convert a standard progression into a custom progression so that you may specify the precise depth
progressions:
· Select the Code progression in the list.

· Right click on the list, and select Convert to custom progression.

The code Progression will be displayed in the custom progression.

· Make your changes (you must enter the depths), being sure to enter a Description if appropriate.

· Click the Test button to see the solution.

· Click Save progression to save the progression as a custom progression or Cancel edit to discard your
changes.
Removing a code progression
You may not remove the only code progression, but if you have added multiple code progressions you may
also remove them.
· Select the Code progression in the list.

· Click the Remove progression button.

Sorting progressions
Right click on the progression list to see options for sorting progressions into the order that you want.

9.12.2.1 Promote key section

When you design a system, you select a system key section, and that key section and all key sections beneath
that key section are available for coding. Promoting the key section is available only on design modules for
locking systems that support multi-section families.

If you need to expand the system to use a broader range of key sections, you then use the promote key
section feature.
When you Promote key section, the key sections available to you are determined from the current system
key section and the key section (and keyway) definitions. You may then choose a new key section to use as
the system key section, and subsequently you will have all key sections beneath that new key section available
for coding.
Promoting the key section is a one way operation - you can not then demote the key section. Promoting
the key section does not change the coding of any keys within the system, it merely changes the
system design to allow more key section to be used.
Getting started
171
See System design .

9.12.2.2 System design notes

Notes may be stored to document the system design.
Getting started
180
See Coding screen overview

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 177

· From the coding windows, click the Design notes button.

9.12.2.3 Construction keying

Construction keying is supported in a number of design modules
Enabling construction keying
To enable construction keying for a system you must:

· Change the Keying Type to a Construction Keyed Keying Type.

· Flag all doors that need to be construction keyed. This can be done as you add the doors (if you had
already selected a Construction Keyed Keying Type) or later in the Door Bulk Change window.
· Any and all construction keys must have the designation Construction. Once a key is flagged through its
designation as being a construction key, various functions and capabilities are automatically enabled.
· Assign the construction key to operate all the construction keyed doors.

Types of construction keying

Construction keying may be done in one of two ways.
· Half key method (Inline and Lockwood Twin design modules)

· Lost ball method.

Half key construction keying.

To use the half key method of construction keying, you must manually enter the appropriate half code for your
construction keys. Do this in the coding tree or coding matrix by selecting the construction key then click the
Enter code button.
Lost ball construction keying
To use the lost ball method of construction keying, your coding progression must have the symbol B in the
designation, and the corresponding position in the depth step indicates the ball size. Leave the SOP in this
position as 0. In the coding tree or coding matrix you can right click on the construction key to access menu
options for assigning the construction key code.
Here's an example of a system design for lost ball construction keying.

Item Value
TMK 365144
SOP 000120
Designation 000CCB
Depth step 000224

Advanced construction keying

Now, few people need to do this, but it is possible to code in the same chamber that is used for construction
keying. Here's how you do this in ProMaster Master-Keying 7.
Let's say our TMK is 365144, and we are using the last chamber for a construction ball. However, we want to
use the last chamber to make some master keys also.
This is achieved by using two code progressions. First, a custom code progression is used to derive the
master key codes, then a standard progression is used to specify the construction keying.
Here's an example.

Item Value

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 178 ProMaster Master Keying

TMK 365144
SOP 000321
Designation 000CCM
Custom depth step Chamber 4 = 3, 5, 7, 9
Chamber 5 = 0, 2, 6, 8
Chamber 6 = 0, 2

Notice that we are using values in the ball

chamber that are less than the TMK cut, but not
those that are deeper than it.

That's the custom progression that will generate all your normal codes. Now we need to add a standard
progression to define where the construction keying ball will appear. Here how:

Item Value
TMK 365144
SOP 000000
Designation 00000B
Depth step 000004

Now, when you return to the coding tree or coding matrix, there will be one tab with the custom progression
for all your standard codes, and another one for retaining the ball information.
To create the two code progressions described here, the user needs to have their security rights set to
Access advanced coding features as the normal checks will prohibit the reuse of the chamber (It
is used for M and B purposes)

9.12.3 Top master key

When you create a new design, ProMaster Master Keying will, for most design modules, generate a TMK
code. To do this, click on the Create TMK button.

The TMK is generated according to the rules you entered when creating the design. Any TMK that ProMaster
Master Keying generates is then checked against existing systems to check for a duplication.
If you accept the TMK that has been generated, click OK, else click Calculate to have another one generated.
The option to generate a TMK is not available for all design modules. Generally if the manufacturer's
guide is that main permutations are to be taken from a manufacturer provided list then the option to
generate one will not be available.

9.12.4 Design assistant

The Design assistant is available when you create a system design for the coding tree. It helps design the
171
system coding. It is accessed from the System design windows by clicking on the Assist button.
Before using the Design assistant, the TMK and system rules must be completed.
The first thing the design assistant does is evaluate your system by looking at all your keys, their designations
and the key hierarchy. The results of this evaluation are offered as default values for each level of hierarchy.
If the key hierarchy is flawed, you will be notified and required hierarchy quantities will not be offered.
Quantities

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 179

The key hierarchy evaluation displays in the quantity calculated column and offers the Quantity required of
each level within the key hierarchy. You should adjust these numbers to allow for spare keys, system growth,
etc. Some design modules will allow you to alter the depth step used for progressing the TMK in each
chamber.
Logic rules are applied, and an error reported if your request does not make sense (e.g. 2 GMK keys and 3
CK, but no MK).
Options
The choice Use rotated constants if needed, if checked, instructs ProMaster Master Keying to construct a
design using rotated constants to yield more keys if such a solution is possible.
233
Other choices depend on the design module you are working with. See Design modules
Calculation
After making your adjustments, click Calculate. ProMaster Master Keying will compute a solution, or notify
you if a solution is not possible.
After the solution is computed, you will see:
· For each level of hierarchy the minimum number of codes available at that level.

· The Solution, showing the chamber usage, depth steps and rotated constants.

You may recompute the solution if you wish by clicking the Calculate button again.
Viewing the solution
You may view the solution in the matrix or tree by clicking the corresponding buttons.
When you are satisfied with the proposed solution, click OK to return to the system design window. The
computed solution will be transferred into the Standard progression ready for you to complete the system
design.

9.12.5 Testing the system design - coding tree

Whenever you design or modify a system, it is a good idea to test your Code progression.
Getting started
· While creating or modifying the system design, to test a code progression you are creating, after you enter
your progression, click Test.
· While creating or modifying the system design, to test an existing progression, right click on the progression
and choose Test.
· Or from the Design assistant
178
click Show tree.
General
The Test Coding Tree Codes window shows the coding tree derived from your code progression.
The information area shows:
· The image used for good codes.

· The symbols used for each rank or hierarchy.

· The image used for bad codes.

· The minimum number of good codes in any branch for each designation.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 180 ProMaster Master Keying

· The total number of good codes.

· The percentage of bad codes.

Beneath the legend, the Bad code reasons gives the reasons why the selected code is bad. As you move
about the tree the reasons change to reflect your selection.

9.12.6 Testing the system design - coding matrix

Whenever you design or modify a system, it is a good idea to test your Code progression.
Getting started
· While creating or modifying the system design, to test a code progression you are creating, after you enter
your progression, click Test.
· While creating or modifying the system design, to test an existing progression, right click on the progression
and choose Test.
· Or from the Design assistant
178
click Show matrix.
General
The Test Coding Matrix Codes window shows the coding tree derived from your code progression.
Using the Options, you can change the presentation of the coding matrix.
The options for Codes to hide allow you to determine the way codes grouped, shown and hidden. After you
make any change, click Apply settings to see the change in the coding matrix.
The Bad code reasons gives the reasons why the selected code is bad. As you move about the matrix the
reasons change to reflect your selection.

9.12.7 Coding screen overview

All coding windows share some functionality aspects, regardless of the design module or the type of coding
window.
See the design module specific information in the Coding topic under the specific design module here: Design
233
modules
The following three topics cover the specific characteristics of the coding tree, coding matrix and Kaba coding
grid.
General
Coding windows are where you assign codes to keys (either manually or by automatic coding), where the
door pinning calculations are performed, and where a phantom check is performed to identify any erroneous
conditions.
It is also where you may reserve codes or branches of codes for future use by assigning those codes as
lockout codes.
Layout
Coding windows consist of:
· Several tabs on the left.

· A coding work-space on the right (used to show the tree, matrix or grid).

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 181

· A keying matrix on the right, below coding work-space.

· Buttons on the top right for changing the system design, coding reports and notes.

Left Tab: Keys

Overview: Of all the tabs on the left of the coding window, the keys tab is the one you will see most. It is
where you see a list of all your keys and the codes, colour and key sections assigned to each.
Key sections: On any design module that uses key sections, you will see a list of key sections at the top of
the keys tab. When you are working on a multi-section system, the key section that is assigned to a key, or
the key section that is assigned to a lockout code, or the key section for which the keys are currently displayed
in the coding window, is all determined by the key section that is currently selected.
Colours: On any design module that uses key head colours, there are one or more lists of colours at the top
of the keys tab. The lists of colours is defined by each design module and the number of lists of colours will
vary according to the design module. The colour(s) that are assigned to a key are determined by the currently
selected colours. Additionally, once a key is coded, you may change the colour(s) assigned to a key by
following these steps:
· Select the key whose colour you want to change.

· Select the colour(s) you require.

· Click the button above and to the right of the lists of key colours.

The colour(s) on the key will be changed.

When you use the coding tree to perform automatic coding, the currently selected colour is not used,
but instead you are asked how key head colours are to be automatically assigned.
Keys: The keys list shows each key and the corresponding coding information. The select key in the list is the
one that will be altered when you perform any of the following tasks:
· Click the Find in designer button to find the key in the coding tree or coding matrix.

· Click the Enter code. button to manually enter a key code. See Code entry
191
.
· Click the Remove button to remove the key code.

· Click the Find key above in designer button to find the key above the selected key in the coding tree or
coding matrix.
· Click the Find key above in key list button to find the key above the selected key in the key list.

· Assign a code from the coding tree or coding matrix.

· Click the Assign branch button to auto assign the codes in just that branch of the key hierarchy within the
coding tree.
· Right click on the key list in some design modules to perform tasks such as assigning construction key
codes and assigning control key codes.
Within the key list, in addition to the normal navigation key presses that operate in any such list, you
may also use Ctrl-UpArrow and Ctrl-DownArrow to move to the previous or next key that does not
have a code assigned and F3 to search for a Key Number. Right click on the list for a menu with more
options and the corresponding key presses.
Automatic Code Assignment: The buttons for automatic code assignment appear only on the coding tree.
See Coding using the coding tree 184.
Coding: Click Calculate coding and errors to perform a complete calculation on all doors and to check for
errors.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

182 ProMaster Master Keying

After coding is finished, you must always click Calculate coding and errors to complete the process.
If Calculate coding and errors is successful, and other conditions are met (e.g. each key has a code
assigned, each door has one or more keys assigned) then the system will be flagged to indicate that
coding is complete, and jobs will be allowed to progress to manufacturing.
Coding errors: Down the bottom of the keys tab is an area that displays any errors that are identified. The
coding errors area is initially shrunk (you may resize it using your mouse on the splitter just above the
heading), and if errors are identified it appears automatically.
In the coding errors area, all errors are shown on the Door errors tab where each problem door is listed
with the keys that erroneously operate it, and each error is also shown on the By Key tab where each problem
key is listed with the doors that it erroneously operates. Print and Print preview are available for the error
list, as well as Door pinning report for the selected door.
If your system shows coding errors, click on one of the errors (in the Doors errors or the Key errors
lists) and then click the Find button. The offending key will be located on the coding work space, and
also the offending door-key combination will be located in the Keying matrix. This may also be
achieved by double clicking on the phantom.
When a system is correctly coded, there will be no coding errors. Your first step to resolving coding errors
should always be to assign new codes to the offending keys. If however the error is unavoidable, perhaps
because of the limitations of the locking system or because it is a replaced key whose code still operates a
central door, then the resolution will be to assign that key to operate the door, thereby removing the error
condition. Changing the keying should not be done without due consideration, and in the case of complex
cross keyed systems that simply cannot be coded, you may have to redesign the key system in conjunction
with your client.
On systems that use Control keys (A control key removes an interchangeable core, and is specified by
setting the key designation to Control), the error check is performed on both the lock shear line (or
equivalent) and also the control shear line. When error keys are displayed, they are sufficed with information
to indicate which shear lines the key phantoms through.
Left Tab: Lockout codes
When you click on the Lockout codes tab, you change the operating mode of the coding windows from that
of assigning key codes to locking out or reserving codes.
Locked out codes are codes that you have for one reason or another prohibited from use. Typically you might
lock out a branch or more of codes that you
After having selected the Lockout codes tab, to create a locked out code, do one of the following:
· Double click on an unused code on the Coding tree or Coding matrix, then when prompted, enter a
reason for the locked out code.
· Or, click the Enter code button to enter the code manually.

In the same way that keys are shown in the coding tree and coding matrix, so too are locked out
codes, showing that the code is locked out and also on the coding tree the reason that you entered.
Left Tab: Options
Options
The Display option (Coding matrix only) allows you to choose how the coding matrix appears, whether is is
small, large, shows codes or shows keys.
Here are other options available:

Option Description
Move after code assigned After you assign a code to a key, causes the next un-coded key to
be selected. Generally you would want this turned on, however if

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 183

you have a messy system and you are repeatedly guessing a code
and checking for errors, you would benefit from leaving this off so
the key remains selected.
Calculate pinning while assigning codes Causes pinning and phantom check calculation to occur as you
assign each code. This is the best way to operate as error
conditions are immediately brought to your attention.
Allow cut keys to be rekeyed Available only if the user has the necessary security permissions.
This allows the code to be altered or removed on a key that has
been manufactured. For safety reasons, the setting for this option
is not remembered, and if you leave and re-enter a coding
window it will be off.
Show code quantities on tree Coding tree: When the Options tab is selected, having this
option on draws the tree to show the quantities of codes beneath
each master.
Hide bad codes Coding tree. Bad codes are hidden on the coding tree rather
than being shown with a bad-code graphic.

Coding matrix: Bad codes are greyed out.

Highlight child nodes Coding matrix: Changes the matrix drawing to show an indicator
beside each code that is immediately beneath the currently
selected code.
Allow bad code usage Allows bad codes to be assigned to keys. Before using a bad
code, check the Bad code reasons.
Weak key is bad code Available in selected design modules. Determines if a weak key is
considered as a bad code. To use weak keys (not
recommended), turn this option off while assigning codes.

Codes to hide (Coding matrix only)

The various options for Codes to hide In coding matrix allow you to slice and dice the view of the generated
codes. When you make a change to any of these options, click the Apply settings button to apply the new
options to the coding matrix.
Bad code reasons

As you select any key in the coding tree or coding matrix, the bad code reasons show any reasons why the
selected code is considered bad. It is possible to use bad codes (see Options earlier), but before doing so you
should consider the reason why a code is bad. For example, you may choose to use a code that is deeper in
the first cut than desirable, thereby producing a weak key, but to use a key code that violates the Maximum
adjacent cut variations (MACS) makes no sense since usually the key is not able to be produced.
Left tab: Doors
Shows a list of all doors in the system, and beneath each door the keys that operate the door. Right click on a
door or key for more options.
In many design modules you may select a door, then click Special pinning to specify special pinning for the
191
door. See Special pinning .
In some design modules it is possible to have a key assigned to a door, but for the door coding to not be
calculated. The menu options Find prior door without pinning and Find next door without pinning
locate doors that have no pinning solution. An example of this is in the interchangeable code module, having a
door with a control key assigned but no operating keys.
Top right buttons
171
Click Change design to alter the system design. See System design .

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 184 ProMaster Master Keying

Change design
The Change design button gives access to a menu of options for altering the system design.

The drop down part of the Change design button access more system options, depending on the design
module:
Change key sections: Allows the key sections to be replaced with different ones. See Change key
193
sections .
Change a constant cut: Opens the system design window in a manner that allows the TMK to be altered in
positions that are common to all keys. The only positions that may be altered on the TMK are those that are
constant across all keys. Typically this would be used if you have an existing key system where keys have
been lost, and instead of a complete re-key and new keys you choose to re-cut one position in each key to a
deeper code and to alter the pinning only in a single chamber in each cylinder, effectively making the system
secure against the lost keys without a complete new system being required. Note however, the new value for
the constant chamber must be a deeper cut than the original.
Coding work space
The coding work space appearance and functionality depends on the particular coding window you are using.
184 186
See Coding using the coding tree , Coding using the coding matrix , Coding using the kaba coding
188
grid .
Keying matrix
Over on the right with of the coding window, below the coding work space is the keying matrix. This keying
matrix is similar in appearance to that you use when assigning keys to doors while entering the system, but
with somewhat reduced functionality.
To make the keying matrix visible, grab the splitter above the keying matrix with your mouse and drag it up.
This keying matrix serves two purposes:
It allows you to view the keying in a matrix layout.
It allows you to right click any door-key junction and select Keying on or Keying off. Do this with caution as
altering keying should generally not be the first tool you turn to when you have difficulty coding a complex
system. When you alter the keying, the door is recalculated and errors are updated accordingly.

9.12.8 Coding using the coding tree

This topic discusses coding functionality specific to using the coding tree. For all other information on the
coding window, see Coding screen overview 180.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Coding menu, select Coding tree

If the system has not yet been designed, the system design windows will open first. Complete the design
171
process (see System design )
After the system design is complete, the coding tree window appears.
Coding work space
The coding work space is the area on the right of the coding window. At the top of the coding work space are
one or more tabs, which show the code progression used to produce the coding tree.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 185

Initially, any system will have just one code progression, and hence just one tab at the top of the
coding work space. Advanced coding, or coding in some design modules may require multiple code
progressions, and these will be displayed, each on their own tab.
If the code progression has a description, that (or the first part if it is long) is shown on the code
progression tab. If the code progression has noted, a note graphic is shown on the tab and you may right
click to get access to the code progression notes.
When you are on the coding tree, the navigation keys on your keyboard navigate around it. To assign a code
from the tree to a the selected key, either double click the code with your mouse, or press the Space key on
your keyboard. If you use automatic code assignment then you will not need to do this.

When a code on the tree is assigned to a key, or is reserved as a lockout code, the key number or lockout
reason is shown beside the key code.
On multi-section systems, the coding tree displays the keys that are assigned codes using the currently
selected key section.
If there are multiple tabs at the top (I.e. Multiple code progressions have been defined, then the coding tree is
drawn using the definitions from the currently selected code progression tab).
Automatic code assignment
To perform automatic code assignment, the key above and designation must be correct for all keys and
the system design must have a code progression suitable for the key hierarchy. I.e. You cannot create
an inappropriate design and expect ProMaster Master Keying to wave a magic wand and make it work.
The Assign codes attempts to assign a code to every key that does not already have a code. If you are doing
automatic coding and the system does not require any intervention (such as is required on a multi-section
system) then this is the button you click to do the business.
The Assign branch button is used when you want automatic code assignment but want some control over
where the coding starts from. Here's an example of how you might do this. Imagine a multi-section system
and you want a branch of a system on a particular key section. To do this, first select the key section then
select the master key at the top of the branch and then assign it a single code. Now, with the master key
assigned a code and still highlighted, click the Assign branch button to have all keys below that master key
assigned a code. When you click Assign branch, a key section window will prompt you for the key section to
use id there is a choice. E.g. Key sections ABC, AB, AC, BC, and your master or sub-master is on ABC then
the window will give you a choice of ABC or the key sections beneath ABC.

The Remove unordered button removes the coding information from all keys that have not been ordered.
Don't panic – it makes you type in a confirmation message first.
What about removing codes from all keys including ordered keys? First you must have sufficient security
access, then on the Options tab you need turn on the flag Allow cut keys to be rekeyed. Now when you
click on the Remove unordered button it gives you an option to allow all codes to be removed.
If this all seems like way too much functionality for a simple system, consider this. If you enter a
straight forward sort of system, and correctly enter the Designation and Key above for each key,
171
then the coding takes just a few seconds to (a) Create the design (See System design ), then (b)
178
Use the Design assistant (See Design assistant ) to make a suitable Code progression, then (c) In
the Coding tree, click the Assign codes button. Straight forward system? All done!
Key head colours and automatic code assignment
When ProMaster Master Keying performs automatic code assignment on a system that uses key head colours,
186
you are asked how colours are to be assigned. See Colour rules
Sometimes on highly selective systems it is very hard to find a code for a key that will not produce
errors and it comes down to trying dozens of codes and seeing what happens. Here's a hint to make
this process easier. First, on the Options tab turn off the option Move after code assigned.
Highlight the troublesome key. Now when you assign a code to the key, hold down the Shift key on

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 186 ProMaster Master Keying

your keyboard. The Shift key allows you to assign a new code to the key without first removing the old
code, and because you turned off the option Move after code assigned, then the key will remain
selected after the code is assigned, thereby allowing you to immediately try a new code if errors were
produced by your code assignment.

9.12.8.1 Colour rules

When using automatic code assignment with systems that use key head colours, the colour rules window
offers you choices for colour selection.
Dependent on the design module in use, you will have 1, 2 or 3 colours available for each key.
The choices for how colours are assigned are:

Assign the same came colour to all keys: The colour(s) you select are applied to all keys that are
assigned a code.
Assign the colour to each key based on the key hierarchy: You must select the colour(s) for each
level of key hierarchy, and those hierarchy colour choices are applied to all keys that are assigned a code.
The colours you select are remembered for each design module, so when you return to automatic code
assignment the colours remain the same.

9.12.9 Coding using the coding matrix

This topic discusses coding functionality specific to using the coding matrix. For all other information on the
coding window, see Coding screen overview 180.
The coding matrix gives access to every conceivable code, which has some distinct benefits for achieving a
solution in messy cross keyed systems, but this comes at the cost of being much more complex than the
coding tree. Whenever possible you should try to achieve your solution in the coding tree as it is easier to
code, easier to understand and easier for someone else to look at your work and understand it.
The coding matrix is not available for Kaba systems as it makes no sense. For the equivalent for Kaba
188
systems, see Coding using the kaba coding grid . Additionally, the coding matrix is not available on
systems where you have specified a pure keyed to differ code progression.

Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Coding menu, select Coding matrix

If the system has not yet been designed, the system design windows will open first. Complete the design
171
process (see System design )
After the system design is complete, the coding matrix window appears.
How the coding matrix works
The coding matrix takes a code progression and produces an array of codes, displaying them in a hierarchy
of codes within codes. Each hierarchy of code is shown in a different colour, and the Codes to hide option
allow you to alter the view of the codes to simplify it down to just show the code structure that you require.
The nature of the coding matrix is such that:
· When you create the design, the design assistant is not available.

· When you create the design, designations are not used.

· When you create the design, rotated constants are not used.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 187

· If you open the coding matrix for a system that has designations or rotated constants defined, they are
ignored.

· To produce the equivalent of rotating a constant, you define multiple code progressions for the coding
matrix.
Coding work space
The coding work space is the area on the right of the coding window. At the top of the coding work space are
one or more tabs, which show the code progression used to produce the coding tree.
Initially, any system will have just one code progression, and hence just one tab at the top of the
coding work space. Advanced coding, or coding in some design modules may require multiple code
progressions, and these will be
If the code progression has a description, that (or the first part if it is long) is shown on the code
progression tab. If the code progression has noted, a note graphic is shown on the tab and you may right
click to get access to the code progression notes.
When you are on the coding matrix, navigation keys on your keyboard move around it. To assign a code from
the matrix to a the selected key, either double click the code with your mouse, or press the Space key on
your keyboard.
When a code on the matrix is assigned to a key, or is reserved as a Lockout code, the code is modified to
indicate that it has been used.
On multi-section systems, the coding matrix displays the keys that are assigned codes using the currently
selected key section.
If there are multiple tabs at the top (I.e. Multiple code progressions have been defined, then the coding matrix
is drawn using the definitions from the currently selected code progression tab).
We have covered coding in the matrix fairly quickly. There are 2 reasons for this. Firstly, no amount of
words are as good as getting in and trying it and learning how the codes work. Second, most users
who do matrix coding are already trained in the matrix-coding principals.
Option on the options tab
The first option is the matrix Display style. This determines how the the keys and codes represented on the
matrix - as a cube (3 sizes), showing the key code, or showing the key number assigned that code (2 sizes).
For a large matrix it is often more manageable to display the matrix as a series of colour coded cubes and not
display the code or key number.
Codes to hide controls which of the generated codes are shown on the matrix.
If you turn off the flag in Incidental masters and click the Apply settings button, you will see the matrix in
its full glory. It is a good idea to do this on a smallish matrix (maximum 4 chambers progressed) and examine
the colours and key codes to understand how the matrix shows every key code and their relationships.
When you progress several chambers from the TMK, there are many codes produced, and we want to look at
how to classify these.
Any code that has every progressed position different from the TMK is a Level 1 key. It is a Change key.
Now look at the yellow cells in the matrix. These key codes have all but one of the progressed chambers
different from the TMK and are referred to as a Level 2 key. An on it goes for all other levels.
Hierarchical masters form a hierarchy going up through the levels, from Level 1 right up to the TMK. Out
of the codes we also select a set of master codes that we call Cross masters. Cross masters operate
through different sets of keys to those operated by each Hierarchical master. If it helps you can think of
them as horizontal versus vertical masters. Finally, Incidental masters are all masters that are not a Cross
master or a Hierarchical master. Incidental masters are the most complicated to understand, and
should only be turned on if you need to select one of them for a key.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 188 ProMaster Master Keying

Sometimes on highly selective systems it is very hard to find a code for a key that will not produce
errors and it comes down to trying dozens of codes and seeing what happens. Here's a hint to make
this process easier. First, on the Options tab turn off the option Move after code assigned.
Highlight the troublesome key. Now when you assign a code to the key, hold down the Shift key on
your keyboard. The Shift key allows you to assign a new code to the key without first removing the old
code, and because you turned off the option Move after code assigned, then the key will remain
selected after the code is assigned, thereby allowing you to immediately try a new code if errors were
produced by your code assignment.

9.12.10 Coding using the Kaba coding grid

This topic discusses coding functionality specific to using the Kaba coding grid. For all other information on the
coding window, see Coding screen overview 180.

Design modules
This topic is applicable to these design modules:
· Kaba ACE

· Kaba Expert Plus

· Kaba Expert

· Kaba Quattro

· Kaba Gemini

General
The Kaba modules all allow you to perform tree based coding (see Coding using the coding tree 184 ) and this
is often an easier option for simple systems. The coding grid is used to code Kaba systems is the traditional
manner and is the best way to code with multiple rotor stators or cross keying.
A prerequisite for using these design modules within ProMaster Master Keying is that you have
completed appropriate Kaba training and have a comprehensive understanding of positional keying.

· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Coding menu, select Coding matrix

If the system has not yet been designed, the system design windows will open first. Complete the design
171
process (see System design )
After the system design is complete, the coding grid window appears.
How the coding grid works
All coding happens by adding keys into the designer, altering the code, then saving the keys in the designer.
On the Keys tab there are several buttons for adding codes to the designer:
Add all to designer: Adds all the keys to the designer.
Add to designer: Adds just the selected key to the designer
Add keys below to designer: Adds all the keys below the selected to the designer.
Often you will need to add more keys into the designer than just those you plan to alter, as you need to
see the pattern of how the codes are progressed. For manageability, you may find it easiest to work on
a branch of the system at a time when your system is large.
When you add codes into the designer, one of two things happen.
· If the key already has a code, then it is added to the designer with its code, and the code is displayed.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 189

· In the key is un-coded, then when it is added to the designer, the Set TMK when adding options above
the designer are used to determine which parts of the TMK will be used to make a code for the key. So for
example, if you want to make a key that has only left side, then you would turn on the LXX options and turn
off the RXX options then add the un-coded key to the designer.
You may sort keys in the designer by dragging the Key number further up or further down the grid using
your mouse.
Progressing individual codes
To progress codes, navigate to the designer cell that you want progress, and press the Space key. You will
see the code at that position change to a 4 (or a 3 in some circumstances) and the cell will be coloured green.
Right click on the designer for more options.
Progressing multiple codes
When a single cell on a master is selected, the option Copy master cuts to keys below is available.
To progress a block of codes, select that block and use the Selection progressed and Selection not
progressed options.
When a single cell is selected, the options Column progressed and Column not progressed are available.
Automatic progression of codes
ProMaster Master Keying provides a facility to automatically progress codes for a selected range of keys.
To do this:
· Either select a single cell on a master and use the option Progress keys below this master

· Or select a range of keys in a single column and use the option Progress
190
The Progression window opens. See Coding grid progression
Other functionality
There are a number of buttons beneath the designer and are available options on the designer popup menu
also (have a look and learn the key presses).
· Set key cuts to TMK cuts: Sets the selected key in the designer to the cuts of the TMK.

· Set block to TMK cuts: Sets the current block or segment of the selected key in the designer to the cuts
of the TMK.
· Clear block: Clears the current block or segment of the selected key.

· Undo key changes: Undoes all changes to the key, reverting it to the value it had when it was loaded into
the designer.
· Discard key: Removes the selected key from the designer without saving it.

· Discard all: Removes all keys from the designer without saving.

Saving the designer

To save the key codes in the designer, click Save changes button.
Pinning, Errors And Rotor assignment
To perform a pinning and error check, click the Calculate coding and errors button.
The Calculate coding and errors button, like several other functions is available only when the
editor is empty. I.e. You must save or discard the editor first.
Rotor selection

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 190 ProMaster Master Keying

Whenever possible, ProMaster Master Keying will determine the correct rotor automatically.
If the coding is wrong, no rotor will be possible.

If the combination of keys produces multiple rotor possibilities, you will be asked to make a rotor selection for
those doors.
Each door is shown, and for each segment the following apply:
Yellow key = the segment is used on all keys and is the same on each.
Purple key = the segment is used on all keys and is not the same on each, because there is variation in the
coding.
To the right is the rotor currently assigned to the door. If a previously assigned rotor is no longer suitable
then it will be removed.
At the top of the screen are a series of buttons, named after the rotors (and they show you which segments
of the code are used). Any rotors that are not suitable for the selected door are disabled. Click on the rotor
that you want for the door.
The bottom of the screen shows the keys that operate the selected door.
After you click OK, the calculation will continue with the rotors that you selected.

9.12.10.1 Coding grid progression

When you are using the Kaba coding grid and choose to progress several keys, the Progression window
opens.
There are two ways of using the progression window.

General
All possible rotors for the selected keys are shown in the left top list. You must first select which rotor you
want to use.
Standard method
After selecting the rotor:
· Choose which positions on the rotor you want to use. Unavailable segments are disabled. A segment will
be unavailable if it is the dealer segment, has no common positions across all keys that can be progressed,
or is empty on one or more keys. Select which segments on the rotor you want to use for coding.
· Choose the progression direction. Right to left is normal for change keys. Left to right is often used for
master keys for the reason that it makes them visually distinct on the designer.
Now a solution, if one is possible, will be shown. It will be the solution that uses the fewest positions.
· Under Keys required and yield, change the drop down selection for Progress to generate additional
codes (e.g. For expansion and replacement keys) if you wish. A new solution will be shown.
· Click OK to produce the progression and return to the designer.

Advanced method

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 191

After selecting the rotor:

· Choose which positions on the rotor you want to use. Unavailable segments are disabled. A segment will
be unavailable if it is the dealer segment, has no common positions across all keys that can be progressed,
or is empty on one or more keys. Select which segments on the rotor you want to use for coding.
· Turn on the Advanced: Individual position selection option.

· In the Positions available and selection in advanced mode toggle on the positions that you want to
use. When enough positions are selected to generate a solution, the OK buttons is available.
· Under Keys required and yield, change the drop down selection for Progress if you want to tailor the
solution.
· Click OK to produce the progression and return to the designer.

9.12.11 Code entry

The code entry window is used for:
· Entering a code for a key in the coding windows. See Coding screen overview 180
.
· Entering a lockout code in the coding windows. See Coding screen overview
180
.
· Entering a code when opening a system by key code. See Systems
102
.
· Entering a special code for a key in the coding windows. This is used in some design modules that require
control keys with additional options.
· Searching for a key code in the coding tree and coding matrix.

The choices vary by design module, and also by depth/space card used (when applicable).
The values available for selection are constrained by those values permitted, and any other factors, such as
the List in some design modules.

9.12.12 Special pinning

Special pinning allows you to specify pinning information for a door and that is then combined with the key
data for that door to compute its final pinning.
Special pinning is available in many design modules. The functionality varies by design module according to
the lock system capabilities, some having cut selection available, some having empty positions available and
some having both.
General
Sometimes the situation arises where a central (maison) door must be manufactured, however the system is
not finished, so some keys which will eventually be entered and coded to fit the central door are not available.
In this situation you may know that one or more chambers in the cylinder must be fully loaded (or left empty),
thereby allowing not only the current keys to fit, but also future keys.
In specifying special pinning, you may specify any key sections that must fit the door (on multi-section
systems) and any combination of key code data. There is no requirement to specify key code data for each
chamber in the cylinder.
For example, you may specify nothing except the 5th chamber must fit codes 1,2,5,7,9, leaving all other
chambers unspecified.
What happens when pinning is computed for the door is that any code data you specify, and any key sections
you specify are then combined with the key section(s) and cut data from the keys to produce the final pinning
solution for the door.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 192 ProMaster Master Keying

On some design modules, the option to leave a chamber empty is available. If you specify that a chamber is
empty, it results in blank pinning in that position, and phantom checking adjusted accordingly to not check that
position.
Getting started
On the coding window:
· Click on the doors tab.

· Select the door that requires special pinning.

· Click the Special pinning button.

Making a change
Please enter a note to explain why you have special pinning.
· For design modules that support multiple key sections, you may select any key sections that you want to
operate the door.
· In the Additional cuts to operate door area, turn on any codes you want to operate the door.

· In the Additional cuts to operate door area, if you want a chamber left empty, turn on Empty for that
position.
· Click OK to save.

When you return to the coding window, there is a indicator graphic beside the door.
Pinning is recalculated for the door.

9.12.13 Deleting the the system design

Once in a while you will have designed a system, only to rethink it or possibly change it to a different locking
system.
Deleting the system design removes the design, all key codes, key colours, pinning information and all
history. If you are planning to re-key an old system, you should not delete the design, but instead
duplicate the system and then recode the new system.
Consider making a snapshot before you delete the design. That way you can restore the snapshot if you later
change your mind. See System snapshot 110
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Coding menu, choose Delete design.

Making a change
· You must enter the specified text before proceeding.

· Click OK to delete the system.

There is no undo. When you type the confirmation text and click OK, the design is gone.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 193

9.12.14 Coding complete override

ProMaster Master Keying performs automatic tracking of a system status, and when any number of a range of
events occur (e.g. add key, add door, change keying, etc) then the system is flagged to indicate that coding is
required.
Then, before a job may be manufactured, you must open the coding window, perform any coding tasks
required and then perform successful Calculate coding and errors.
However, many systems imported from legacy applications and often large historically paper based systems
will have errors. When systems are imported into ProMaster Master Keying from legacy applications, they are
flagged internally to indicate that horrendous errors may exist, and to allow such errors to be ignored,
ProMaster Master Keying provides the facility to flag the system as being ok despite these errors.

This is not a once only process. Each time you make a system change that ProMaster Master Keying knows
will affect coding integrity, it flags the system as "coding not complete", and even though you want to override
this, you must still enter the coding window, perform Calculate coding and errors (which may not be
successful). Then to accept the system errors and enable the manufacturing processes, you must then follow
this process.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Coding menu, choose Mark system as coding complete.

Read the warning.

If you wish to proceed, click OK.

9.12.15 Change key sections

Available for many design modules, this allows you to completely change the key sections used on a system to
another family of key sections.
Clearly this should be used only during the initial design phase where you decide to use a different key section
family, as doing this to a system that has been manufactured makes little sense and a big mess.

On systems using multiple key sections, the process of changing key sections not only requires you select a
new system key sections, but for each key sections used within the system you must choose a replacement
key sections from the new key sections family.
Getting started
· From the coding tree or coding matrix, click the down arrow by the Change design button to get the
menu, then choose Change key sections.
Making a change
· From the Change key section to drop down list, choose the new key section for the system.

· Then click Load key sections. The right side list is loaded with all the key sections below the key
selection you selected.
· Now, for each key section on the left list "Old key section", select it, then on the right list select the
replacement key section, and click Assign replacement key section. Repeat for each old key section.
· When you are finished, read your choices carefully, then enter the confirmation text and click OK.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 194 ProMaster Master Keying

9.12.16 Report: Key codes

This report allows you to print the key codes for each key.

Our advice: Don't print this report. Here's why. If you are printing it to keep a paper copy of your
systems, please consider how practical and reliable that is compared to a comprehensive computer
backup solution. If you are printing this so you can cut keys without entering a job, which some people
do, ask yourself why you are deliberately avoiding generating accurate history for your customer's
system. To top it off, most likely there will be few customers who are happy about having printed
copies of their security investment floating around.
Getting started

· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Coding menu, choose Key codes report.

or
· From the coding windows, click the Key codes report button. See Coding screen overview
180

Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which keys do you want to All: All keys are printed.
include in this report
A selection of keys: You select the keys to be included on the report.

Keys in a category: Select a key category. Keys in that category are

included on the report.

Keys in a group: Select a key group. Keys in that group are included on
the report.

Keys that have been manufactured: All keys that have been
manufactured are included on the report.

Keys that have not been manufactured: All keys that have not been
manufactured are included on the report.

Options

Option Description
Show codes that have not been When selected, keys that have not been assigned a code will be included
assigned a code in the report, otherwise they are excluded.
Show a line between keys May increase readability if on.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 195

more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.12.17 Report: Door pinnings

This report allows you to print the key codes for each key.
Our advice: Don't print this report. Here's why. If you are printing it to keep a paper copy of your
systems, please consider how practical and reliable that is compared to a comprehensive computer
backup solution. If you are printing this so you can cut keys without entering a job, which some people
do, ask yourself why you are deliberately avoiding generating accurate history for your customer's
system. To top it off, most likely there will be few customers who are happy about having printed
copies of their security investment floating around.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Coding menu, choose Door pinning report.

or
· From the coding windows, click the Door pinning report button. See Coding screen overview
180

or
· From the coding windows, right click on a door on the doors tab and choose the Door pinning report.

or

· From the coding windows, right click on a door error (coding errors section at the bottom left of the coding
window)and choose the Door pinning report.
Range
The range specifies the set of data that will included in the report. Here is an explanation of the range
choices:

Range Description
Which doors do you want to All: All doors are printed.
include in this report
A selection of doors: You select the doors to be included on the report.

Doors that fit a selection of keys: You select one or more keys and all
doors that are operated by any of those keys are included on the report.

Doors in an area: Select an area. Doors in that area are included on

the report.

Doors in a group: Select a door group. Doors in that group are included
on the report.

Doors that have been manufactured: All doors that have been
manufactured are included on the report.

Doors that have not been manufactured: All doors that have not
been manufactured are included on the report.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 196 ProMaster Master Keying

Construction keyed doors: All doors marked as having construction

keying are included in the report.

Options

Option Description
Report layout Do not show keys: Keys are not shown.

Complete key information: Key number, cuts, quantity etc. is shown

beneath each door.

Key numbers only: The key numbers are shown beneath each door.
Show doors that have not been When selected, doors that have not codes will be included in the report,
coded otherwise they are excluded.
Show door notes Turn on to show any notes entered in the job for each door.
Show a line between keys Complete key information layout only.
Turn on to show a line between each key. This make improve readability.
Show lock finish Turn on to include the lock finish in the door information area.
Show lock part item number Turn on to include the lock "item number" in the door information area.
Show a line between information Turn on to show a line between each information item. This make
items improve readability.
Show cylinder assembly Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your
ProMaster Master Keying license.
Turn on to include cylinder sub assembly information in the door
information area.
Pinning font size Allows you to decide the font size used for the pinning information part of
the report. A larger size may be preferable for readability.
Sort order Choose how the doors will be sorted.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.13 Jobs
Throughout the life of a system, from the initial order, through system extensions and key reorders, you will
visit the Jobs window to enter the customer job.
When the customer places an order, always create a job. DO NOT cut keys or supply cylinders without
processing a job, or there will be no history of system activity.
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 197

· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Jobs menu, select Jobs

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons the manage up your jobs.

· See Entering jobs

197
for information on jobs.
Other functionality
Click the Import job to import a ProMaster Key Manager job file from your client. See Importing a job from
ProMaster Key Manager 203 .
205
Click the Manufacture to manufacture the keys and doors on the job. See Job manufacturing .
Click the Options button then Print to print the job list.

9.13.1 Entering jobs

Getting started
196
See Jobs .
General
The Job window presents a job when it is in various states (Entering, Manufacturing, Complete, etc) so the
functionality available depends on the job status, as well as some Application parameters 49 that affect the
functionality availability.
The Job window is comprised of seven tabs.

Job tab
The job tab is where you record the basic information about the job, including the factory where it is to be
manufactured. It is also where you see the status of the job and information about who has performed each
stage of the job and when.
Signatories tab
The signatories tab is where you record the signatories who have authorised the order. All active signatories
are shown, and as you select each signatory the corresponding signature and photo is shown. To indicate that
a signatory has authorised the job, place a check next to that signatory. At the bottom of the window is a
summary of the signatory security that has been configured for the system. If applicable you may right click
on a signatory to see individual keys and doors that the selected signatory may authorise.
Key authorities and door authorities are accessed from the toolbar also.
Notes tab
The notes tab allows you to record some notes about the job. The notes are printed on the manufacturing
paperwork. The default notes may be configured for the system, and on a job-by-job basis you may enter
whatever notes are necessary.
Delivery tab
As you would expect, the delivery tab is the destination to which the order will be shipped.
There are two addresses. Normally only the first address would be used, however if you order keys and doors
on the same order, and one or more of those keys is flagged as Ship this key separate from lock parts,
then you must enter a delivery address and a delivery address for keys.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

198 ProMaster Master Keying

Keys tab
The keys tab is where you order the keys. More on this later.

Doors tab
The doors tab is where you order the doors. More on this later.
Documents tab
122
The documents tab allows you to store documents for the system (see Documents ), but rather than being
general document they will be associated with the job. For example, you may receive an order on paper and
decide to store a scanned copy of the order.
Ordering keys
This section is focused on what you do in the keys tab.
When the job is being entered, the keys list shows all active keys in the system. After you release the job
(Order complete), the list is revised to show just the keys you have ordered.
The list shows:
· The key number.

· The number of signatories required for the key.

· If the key must be shipped separate from lock parts ("S/S").

· If the order has been released, the issue numbers allocated to this order.

· If the order has not been released, the quantity already cut.

· The type for the current order (Shows Key if you are ordering new keys, or Reissue if you are ordering
an existing key to be re-cut).
· The quantity on this order.

· Any note you want on the key line item.

Signatories: If the system uses individual key authorities, the Signatories button will show you the
signatories who are permitted to authorise the selected key.

Ordering reissues: To order reissues of the selected key, click the Reissue button. You may enter any valid
issue numbers, and also ranges or issue numbers. For example, if there had been 20 previous issues of a
key, then this would be a valid way to order some reissues: 6-8,3,10,14,12
Reissues are to replace a damaged or broken key. The ability to order key reissues must be turned on,
as it is disabled by default. In many cases, reissues should not be ordered, and you should always
consider if there is a good case for ordering another copy of an existing key. In most cases, it is better
that the old key be recorded as damaged and a new key with a new issue number be produced.
· To order a key, enter a quantity on that line.

· Enter a note for the key if you wish.

At times you have a pile of keys to order, and they are all the same quantity. There's an easier way to
do this. After entering the quantity (and possibly a note) for the first key, press F12 to copy the quantity
to the next line, or press Shift-F12 to copy the quantity and note down to the next line.
· To remove a key from the order, change its quantity to 0, or for reissues, click the Reissue button and
alter the reissue numbers.
· To find a key, click Find key and enter the key number you want to locate.

· To restrict the keys that are displayed, click on the Key display button and make your filter choices.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 199

· If the system uses individual key authorities, click Signatories to see the signatories who may authorise
the key order.

· To print the keys for customer approval, click Print then Print keys. See Report: Job pre-release key
204
confirmation .
You may right click on the keys list for a menu with more choices, including a door access and a history of
key orders.
Ordering doors
This section is focused on what you do in the doors tab.

When the job is being entered, the doors list shows all keyed doors in the system. After you release the job
(Order complete), the list is revised to show just the doors you have ordered.
The list shows:
· The door number.

· The number of signatories required for the door.

· The door stamping.

· If the order has been released, the issue numbers allocated to this order.

· The part code being ordered

· The type of product being ordered.

· The quantity on this order.

· The quantity of Keys per cylinder that is required (Must be enabled in the Application parameters 49 ).

· Any note you want on the door line item.

Because you enter each door as a separate entity, the order quantity for a door will almost always be
one. The exception to this is when a door entity represents a padlock rather than a physical door, in
which case you might order more than one.
· To order a door, enter a quantity on that line.

· If you are using keys per cylinder ordering, enter a quantity for this also.

· Enter a note for the door if you wish.

At times you have a pile of doors to order, and they are all the same quantity. There's an easier way to
do this. After entering the quantity (and possibly a note) for the first door, press F12 to copy the
quantity to the next line, or press Shift-F12 to copy the quantity and note down to the next line.
· To remove a door from the order, change its quantity to 0.

· To find a door, click Find door and enter the door number you want to locate.

· To restrict the doors that are displayed, click on the Door display button and make your filter choices.

· If the system uses individual key authorities, click Signatories to see the signatories who may authorise
the key order.
· To print the doors for customer approval, click Print then Print doors. See Report: Job pre-release door
205
confirmation .
You may right click on the doors list for a menu with more choices, including a key access and a history of
door orders.
Modifying the ordered product

© 2019 WH Software Limited

200 ProMaster Master Keying

Right click on the door for menu choices, or use the toolbar buttons to alter the order if required.
Cylinders: If the product is a lock part, allows you to order all cylinders for the lock. If the product is a
cylinder, reverts the order to ordering the cylinder (assuming it had previously been changed to be say just
the core).
Rekey: Orders a re-key of the door, without supplying a lock or cylinder.
Core: Orders a Core (plug etc depending on your naming convention) and of course the keying/assembly, but
not a lock or cylinder.
Change product: Allows you to change the product being ordered for the selected door. A list shows
associated items, or you may select a completely new lock product (Must be enabled in the Application
parameters 49 ). There should be little or no reason to ever do this.
Rekey for key: Allows you to select a key, then orders a re-key for all doors that are operated by that key.
Final steps
After the order is entered, the keys are specified, the doors are specified, signatories selected and job details
entered, the next thing you do is tell ProMaster Master Keying that you're finished. To do that, click the Order
complete or Release to mfg button (Button changes depending on whether or not you have enabled the
"Coding required' job status in application parameters).
When you click the button, a number of things happen:
· The job is saved.

· The job is checked to ensure that the signatories are appropriate for the keys and doors that have been
ordered.
· If you have orders keys by specifying Keys per cylinder then those keys are located and added to the
order. If a bottom level key cannot be determined for a door, the process of completing the order will halt
and you will be presented with a list of problem doors. So for example, if a door has two bottom level keys
that operate it, and you specify that you want to order some keys for that door, there is no logical way to
tell which key you mean, and in this case you must specify the actual keys you require rather than
specifying Keys per cylinder.
· Depending on whether or not coding is complete for the system or not, and also depend in on your
Application parameters 49 setting "Send jobs to coding when released if coding is required", the job is
released to manufacturing or it is flagged as coding required.
· If the order has been released to manufacturing, issue numbers are allocated for all keys and doors that
have been ordered.
At the time that the job is changed to Manufacturing required status, a snapshot of the keying for
each door on the order is created, and also a snapshot of the pinning for each door on the order. All
subsequent operations on the job, such as viewing keying, printing manufacturing reports, exporting to
machines etc uses the keying and pinning snapshot, so a change to the door's keying does not alter
historical orders. Key codes are not included in the snapshot because they are considered immutable.
205
To manufacture the job, click on the Manufacture button. See the topic Job manufacturing .
Other functionality
The More button gives access to less frequently used functionality. The availability of each function depends
on the job status, application parameters, user permissions and the tab selected in the job.
Return job to manufacturing: Provided it has been allowed in the application parameters, this choice
returns a completed job to the manufacturing status, from where you may manufacture the job or return it
to data entry. Generally this should not be allowed as uncontrolled use of this functionality may result in
reduced history integrity.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 201

Return job to data entry: Returns a job that is awaiting coding or manufacturing to data entry so it may
be altered. Note that when you return a Manufacturing required job to data entry, the history snapshot is
discarded, and later recreated when you release the job to manufacturing.
Order all keys: Allows you to enter a quantity to order for all visible keys (see Key display earlier). The
keys tab must be active.
Order all doors: Allows you to enter a quantity to order for all visible doors (see Door display earlier).
The doors tab must be active.
Order doors for a key: Allows you to elect a key and orders all doors that are operated by that key. The
doors tab must be active.
Edit invoice no: On a job that is no longer in the data entry phase, allows entry of an invoice number. See
Edit job invoice number 203
Toggle "printed" status: Changes the job printed status from yes to no, or no to yes.
Application parameters that affect jobs
Numerous application parameters affect the way jobs work. Here is a list of some you may want to look at
and tailor to the way your company operates.

Application parameter Description

Allow "Reissue" of keys to be ordered Enables the ability to order reissues in addition to new keys. See the
earlier note regarding ordering key reissues.
Allow first job on each system to be Turning this job on allows the first order to be released without any
released without signatories signatories
Allow invoice number on completed If you turn this option on, the invoice number mat be edited on a
jobs to be changed complete job.
Allow jobs to be manufactured after If you turn this option on, you will be allowed to manufacture jobs
they are flagged as "Complete" that have been marked as complete. Generally it is better to leave
this option off to you do not inadvertently manufacture a job that hat
has already been manufactured.
Allow jobs to be returned to Allows users with permissions to alter released orders to return the
manufacturing after they are flagged job to manufacturing after it has been marked as complete.
as "Complete" Generally you should not require this parameter turned on, and
keeping it off stops complete jobs inadvertently being manufactured
again.
Allow keys to be ordered as "Key Enables the ability to order keys by specifying the key quantity per
quantity per cylinder" on each door cylinder for doors. If you would never use this, leave it turned off to
reduce the amount of on-screen information. This is useful for
organisations for produce mostly hierarchy systems, and work on
the concept of "keys per cylinder".
Allow ordered product to be changed If you turn this parameter on, the option for doors "Change product"
for doors will be available. Leave this parameter off unless you have a reason
for it.
Begin manufacture of a job after it is If you turn this parameter on, the manufacturing window will be
released to manufacturing opened as soon as you release a job to manufacturing. In a factory
situation where the process of completing an order and those of
manufacturing happen at different times, by different people in
different rooms, you would be aided by having this parameter off.
Export system to client when releasing When the order is complete, and if this parameter is turned on, and
job to manufacturing if the system is configured to use ProMaster Key Manager, then at
the time the job is released to manufacturing you will be prompted
to send the client an update for their ProMaster Key Manager.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 202 ProMaster Master Keying

Consider also the option to be given the same prompt when you
have finished manufacturing the job and mark it as complete.
Is the job "Invoice number" mandatory Turning this parameter on makes the invoice number mandatory.
Is the job "Required date" mandatory Turning this parameter on makes the required date mandatory.
Send jobs to coding when released if Premium and manufacturer editions only.
coding is required
When a job is entered, and you click the button to say "order
complete", and assuming the order is correct and with sufficient
signatories, then one of two things may happen.

If this parameter is set to No then the order may not be released

unless coding is complete, and if coding is complete then the job will
enter the Manufacturing status, ready to be manufactured.
Generally this option is the best for small organisations.

If this parameter is set to Yes then the job will enter the Coding
status if coding is not complete, effectively locking the order, but not
allowing it to be manufactured until coding has been completed.
Generally this is the best choice for large organisations, factories or
any shop where the order entry, coding and manufacturing are
treated as distinct processes, often requiring disparate staff
What check should be performed for This option determines how ProMaster Master Keying will check for
duplicate order numbers duplicate customer order numbers (No check, check in system,
check in all systems for client)

9.13.2 Order keys from list

If you receive a list of keys (perhaps via email) that need to be ordered, this process makes the keys to the
job easier.
· Right click on the keys in your job and select Order keys from list

· Copy the list of keys to the clipboard

· Paste the keys into the space provided in the Order Keys From List window.

· Enter the quantity you require and any other options.

The list is checked and reports an error if any keys are duplicated or do not exist.
Click OK to add the keys to the order.

9.13.3 Order doors from list

If you receive a list of doors (perhaps via email) that need to be ordered, this process makes the doors to the
job easier.
· Right click on the doors in your job and select Order doors from list

· Copy the list of doors to the clipboard

· Paste the doors into the space provided in the Order Doors From List window.

· Enter the quantity you require (typically the quantity is 1 for doors) and any other options.

The list is checked and reports an error if any doors are duplicated or do not exist.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 203

Click OK to add the doors to the order.

9.13.4 Importing a job from ProMaster Key Manager

The process of ordering keys becomes even easier if your customer is running ProMaster Key Manager and
sends you a ProMaster Master Keying key order as a ProMaster Key Manager Order File.
When you import the order file into ProMaster Master Keying, a job is created, ordering the keys that the
customer requested. After the job is created, you process it in the same way you would for a job that you
entered manually.
There are two ways to import an order file.
Method 1: Importing an order file into the open system
· With the system already open, go to the Job window. See Jobs
196

· Click the Import job button.

· Step through the Import Job From Key Manager wizard.

When you import a job using method 1, the job must be for the system that is open.
Method 2: Importing An order file without opening the system
· From the Jobs menu, select Jobs then Import job from Key Manager

· Step through the Import Job From Key Manager wizard.

When you import a job using method 2, the current system (if one is open) will be closed and the system
required for the job will be opened.
Importing data
After opening the file, the wizard shows some summary information about the order file.
If there are any jobs with the same order number, you will be shown a list of those jobs. From this you may
determine if the job is being imported in error a second time.
Choose the Factory that will manufacture the job.
Click Finish to perform the import.
197
After the import is done, you will be taken to the Job window. See Entering jobs

9.13.5 Edit job invoice number

After a job is released to manufacturing it becomes non-editable.
If you need to enter an invoice number, customer order number etc. after the job is manufactured, use this
procedure instead of returning the job to data entry.
· Open the job

· Click the More button then Edit invoice no

· Enter the invoice number and click OK

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 204 ProMaster Master Keying

9.13.6 Delete job

If a job was created in error, it may be removed. If there are subsequent jobs that have ordered the same
keys or doors then choices must be made on how to handle those items.
Getting started
A job must be in the Entering state before it may be removed.
196
See Jobs .
Making a change
· You must enter the specified text before proceeding.

· If there are subsequent jobs that have ordered the same keys or doors then you must make a choice on
how to handle those items.

Option Description
Deallocate key issues that can be For this choice, the job always remains, and is marked as Cancelled.
removed, leave those that cannot Anything that can be removed from the job is removed, and all keys and
be deallocated and mark the job doors that have issue numbers allocated and are ordered on subsequent
as "Cancelled" jobs remain on the cancelled job to account for the issue numbers. Thsi
was the behaviour of previous versions of ProMaster Key Manager.
Force the job to be deleted. The job will be removed. Any keys and doors that have issue numbers
There will be gaps in the issue associated with them in the job will be removed, and those issue numbers
number sequence for some of will not be accounted for.
the keys or doors
· Click OK to delete the job.

9.13.7 Report: Job pre-release key confirmation

This report is for the client to check before the job is released to manufacturing.
Getting started
196
See Jobs .
Options

Option Description
Show received signing area Shows an area on the report for the recipient to sign for the goods.
Show signatories Turn on to list the signatories who are on the job.
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report
Show key notes Turn on to show any notes entered in the job for each key.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 205

Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.13.8 Report: Job pre-release door confirmation

This report is for the client to check before the job is released to manufacturing.
Getting started
196
See Jobs .

Options

Option Description
Show received signing area Shows an area on the report for the recipient to sign for the goods.
Show signatories Turn on to list the signatories who are on the job.
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report
Show door notes Turn on to show any notes entered in the job for each door.
Show lock finish Turn on to include the lock finish.

Producing the report

149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.
Email The report is sent via email as a PDF attachment.

9.14 Job manufacturing

Once a system is entered, coded and a job created, the next thing to do is manufacture the product.
See the following topics for information about each output.
Getting started
There are three ways to get to the Manufacture Job window.
· From the Job search window, select the job to be manufactured and click Manufacture. See Jobs
196
.
· From the Job window (i.e. You are viewing the job properties), click Manufacture. See Entering jobs 197
.
· Open the job for factory manufacturing. See Open job for manufacturing
206
.
The Manufacture Job window
The Manufacture Job window is where all manufacturing happens.
Some job summary information is shown at the top.
There are several areas on the screen for each category of report and also for key and door manufacturing.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 206 ProMaster Master Keying

The items that are available depend on your job. For exampke, a job with only keys will not have any door
reports available.

For each option that you turn on:

· Many have a settings option

· All have a corresponding button that will print, preview, save, send or view depending on the option.

· Each manufacturing task may be run individually by the corresponding button.

At the bottom of the window are four buttons:

Option Description
Print all selected This button prints all the select reports.
Manufacture all selected This button performs all the selected manufacturing tasks.
Publish to device Opens a window for device publishing. See Manufacture: Publish to
device 223.
Mark job as complete When, and only when, the job is manufactured, click Mark job as
complete to change its status from manufacturing to complete. If the
Application Parameter "Export system to client when job is marked as
complete" is turned on and if the system is configured to use ProMaster
Key Manager, then you will be prompted to sent the client an update for
their ProMaster Key Manager.

Marking the job as complete stops it from being manufactured by mistake, and allows accurate
reporting on outstanding jobs.
Other functionality
Click the options button for more choices

Option Description
Default print action "preview" Adjacent to menu reports is a button that has a default action and also a
drop down from which you may choose "Preview" or "Print". The default
action of that button is controlled by this setting. If you usually preview
reports rather tan printing them, turn this option on. The availability of
preview some reports is controlled by the Application parameter 49
"Allow print preview of manufacturing reports".
Printer setup Access your printer settings. See Printer setup 35 .

223
Machine setup Access your machine settings. See Machine setup .

9.14.1 Open job for manufacturing

While you may manufacture a job by opening the system, then its jobs, there is another way that may help in
larger organisations.
If you want your factory staff to be able to manufacture jobs, but not open the systems, or access any other
functionality, you will find this procedure useful.
First, give your factory user the security permission "Manufacture jobs", but no other system permissions.
Now, when this user logs in, the only option available will be to locate and manufacture jobs that are awaiting
manufacturing.
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 207

· From the Job menu, select Manufacture job.

Search for the job you want then click Manufacture to begin the manufacturing process.

9.14.2 Settings: Print job summary

205
The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.
Options

Option Description
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report

9.14.3 Settings: Print key cutting chart

205
The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.
Options

Option Description
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report
Show key section summary Turn on to include total key section requirements at the top of the report.
Show key notes Turn on to show any notes entered in the job for each key.
Show a line between keys Turn on to show a line between each key. This make improve readability.
Key cuts font size Allows you to decide the font size used for the key cut part of the report.
A larger size may be preferable for readability.

9.14.4 Settings: Print key cutting chart - test keys

205
The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.
Options

Option Description
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report
Show key section summary Turn on to include total key section requirements at the top of the report.
Show a line between keys Turn on to show a line between each key. This make improve readability.
Key cuts font size Allows you to decide the font size used for the key cut part of the report.
A larger size may be preferable for readability.

9.14.5 Settings: Print key labels

205
The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 208 ProMaster Master Keying

For labels to print correctly on almost all label printers, the label size requested by ProMaster Master
Keying must be defined in the printer preferences.
To do this:
(1) Observe the exact label size for the layout you have selected in the Layout.
(2) Open the properties for your label printer and locate the place where you define "stock' or "paper
sizes".
(3) Add a new stock size. Give it a name and set the dimensions to the size of the layout you have
selected.
(4) Set the unprintable area as small as possible.
(5) Save the stock size. There is no need to set it as the default paper size - it simply must exist so
the printer knows about the size you are printing.
Options

Option Description
Layout Choose the label size you are using. Standard sizes are listed first
followed by any custom labels you have created.
Labels per bag The quantity of each label to produce. Normally this will be 1.
Keys per bag The number of keys that you put into each packet.

E.g.: For key MK1, we have manufactured 27 keys. If Quantity is 2 and

Keys per bag is 10 then 6 labels will be produced for the key. That being 3
bags, and 2 labels per bag.
311
Design labels Click this to design labels. See Custom reports

9.14.6 Settings: Print pinning chart

205
The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.
Options

Option Description
Report layout Do not show keys: Keys are not shown.

Complete key information: Key number, cuts, quantity etc. is shown

beneath each door.

Key numbers only: The key numbers are shown beneath each door.
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report
Show door notes Turn on to show any notes entered in the job for each door.
Show a line between keys Complete key information layout only.
Turn on to show a line between each key. This make improve readability.
Show key quantity Complete key information layout only.
Turn on to show the quantity of each key manufactured on the job.
Show lock finish Turn on to include the lock finish in the door information area.
Show lock part item number Turn on to include the lock "item number" in the door information area.
Show a line between information Turn on to show a line between each information item. This make
items improve readability.
Show cylinder assembly Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your
ProMaster Master Keying license.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 209

Turn on to include cylinder sub assembly information in the door

information area.
Pinning font size Allows you to decide the font size used for the pinning information part of
the report. A larger size may be preferable for readability.
Sort order Choose how the doors will be sorted. Generally you should pick the same
sort order when producing labels.

9.14.7 Settings: Print door labels

The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing 205 window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.

For labels to print correctly on almost all label printers, the label size requested by ProMaster Master
Keying must be defined in the printer preferences.
To do this:
(1) Observe the exact label size for the layout you have selected in the Layout.
(2) Open the properties for your label printer and locate the place where you define "stock' or "paper
sizes".
(3) Add a new stock size. Give it a name and set the dimensions to the size of the layout you have
selected.
(4) Set the unprintable area as small as possible.
(5) Save the stock size. There is no need to set it as the default paper size - it simply must exist so
the printer knows about the size you are printing.
Options

Option Description
Layout Choose the label size you are using. Standard sizes are listed first
followed by any custom labels you have created.
Quantity The quantity of each label, with the qualifiers

For each line item (ignore quantity): Ignores the quantity of each
door ordered and produces just the selected quantity of labels for each
line item on the order. This is useful where the line item represents items
with a quantity greater than 1, such as padlocks, and you do not require
individual labels.

For each door manufactured: Produces the selected quantity of labels

for each cylinder manufactured. This is the normal choice.
Show system description Turn on to show the syste, description on the labels.
Print label for re-key cylinders Normally labels are not printed for re-key cylinders (since you are not
supplying cylinders). Some design modules, such as AL Galaxy do have
parts supplied for a re-key.
311
Design labels Click this to design labels. See Custom reports

9.14.8 Settings: On-screen pinning

205
The on-screen settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the "view on-screen
pinning" then click on the settings link. After you change the settings, your changes are shown on the Job
manufacture window and are remembered.
Options

Option Description

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 210 ProMaster Master Keying

Show lock finish Turn on to include the lock finish in the door information area.
Show lock part item number Turn on to include the lock "item number" in the door information area.
Show a line between information Turn on to show a line between each information item. This make
items improve readability.
Pinning font size Allows you to decide the font size used for the pinning information part of
the on-screen pinning. A larger size may be preferable for readability.
Sort order Choose how the doors will be sorted. Generally you should pick the same
sort order when producing labels.

9.14.9 Settings: Print client key confirmation

205
The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.
Options

Option Description
Show received signing area Shows an area on the report for the recipient to sign for the goods.
Show signatories Turn on to list the signatories who are on the job.
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report
Show key notes Turn on to show any notes entered in the job for each key.

9.14.10 Settings: Print client door confirmation

205
The report settings are accessed from the Job manufacturing window. Check the report then click on the
settings link. After you change the report settings, your changes are shown on the Job manufacture window
and are remembered.
Options

Option Description
Show received signing area Shows an area on the report for the recipient to sign for the goods.
Show signatories Turn on to list the signatories who are on the job.
Show job notes Turn on to include the job notes in the report
Show door notes Turn on to show any notes entered in the job for each door.
Show lock finish Turn on to include the lock finish.

9.14.11 Print Shipping Labels

205
The report is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Print shipping labels.

· The report will be included if you click Print all reports.

· To print the report individually, click on the preview button adjacent to the option.

For labels to print correctly on almost all label printers, the label size requested by ProMaster Master
Keying must be defined in the printer preferences.
To do this:
(1) Observe the exact label size for the layout you have selected in the Layout.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 211

(2) Open the properties for your label printer and locate the place where you define "stock" or "paper
sizes".
(3) Add a new stock size. Give it a name and set the dimensions to the size of the layout you have
selected.
(4) Set the unprintable area as small as possible.
(5) Save the stock size. There is no need to set it as the default paper size - it simply must exist so
the printer knows about the size you are printing.
Options

Option Description
Layout Choose the label size you are using. Standard sizes are listed first
followed by any custom labels you have created.
311
Design labels Click this to design labels. See Custom reports
Delivery address The address to print on the label. This is pre-populated from the job
delivery address.
Delivery address quantity The quantity of delivery labels that you want.
Key delivery address The address to print on the label for keys if there is a separate delivery
address. This is pre-populated from the job key delivery address.
Key delivery address quantity The quantity of key delivery labels that you want.
Return address The information to print on a "sender" label.
One return address label is printed for each delivery and key delivery label
printed.
Print return address labels Turn on to print the return address label.

The font size on the label is scaled to accommodate the details on the label size chosen.
Producing the report
149
See Printer options for printer specific choices.
Output options

Option Description
Print The report is printed to the printer you have selected.
310
Preview The report is previewed on your screen. See Previewing reports for
more information.

9.14.12 Manufacture: Mark keys

205
The output is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
The following sections list machine specific settings. Any machines without additional setting are omitted.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Send data to key marker.

· The output will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Send button adjacent to the option.

· Select your marking machine and click Next.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 212 ProMaster Master Keying

· Manufacturing behaviour varies depending on the machine. Some machines sent all the data in a single
operation. Some machines take many keys in a single operation but allow you to choose a batch size. Some
machines handle a single key only and you are prompted to send the next key when ready.
Options

Option Description
Which keys do you want to All keys (ordered and test): All ordered keys and all test keys are sent
manufacture to the machine.

All ordered keys: All ordered keys are sent to the machine.

All test keys: All test keys are sent to the machine.

Selected entry only: You select from the adjacent list the item you
want for the key section and ordered/test.
Manufacturing order Manufacture keys in order by key section, then as sorted: This
option ensures that key sections are not intermingled.

Manufacture keys in the order that the keys are sorted: The
system key order is respected, even if that means mixing key sections.
When manufacturing ordered This option controls how test keys are manufactured in relation to ordered
and test keys keys

Mix according to key section and sort order: Ordered keys and test
keys are manufactured according to the order they are sorted in the
system. This is usually not a good choice as it mixes the keys you are
delivering to the customer with test keys.

Test keys before ordered keys: Test keys are produced first,
respecting the manufacturing order, then ordered keys.

Test keys after ordered keys: Ordered keys are produced first,
respecting the manufacturing order, then test keys.
Change start point When "Selected entry only" is chosen, This button can be used to view the
items for manufacturing and select the start point. This is useful for
resuming an interrupted job.
Keys per batch On machines where multiple keys may be sent in a single operation, this
controls how many keys are sent in each batch. If there are multiple
batches required, you are prompted to send the next batch.
Machine settings and information Machine specific information or options are shown.

9.14.12.1 Machine options: Silca Marker 2000

The marker 2000 marking models must be configured using your Silca marker software.
Options

Option Description
Use configured models for each This option uses your pre-configured choices to request the marking
key section model for each key marked according to the key section. Click Configure
models to make the association between the Silca Marker 2000 models
and your key sections.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 213

You must have permissions to configure marking models. See Security

groups 45.
Cut all keys on this marking Choose the model you want to use from the list. All keys sent to the
model machine will use this marking model.

9.14.13 Manufacture: Cut keys

205
The output is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
The following sections list machine specific settings. Any machines without additional setting are omitted.
Getting started

· Turn on the option Send data to key machine.

· The output will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Send button adjacent to the option.

· Select your key cutting machine and click Next.

· Manufacturing behaviour varies depending on the machine. Some machines sent all the data in a single
operation. Some machines take many keys in a single operation but allow you to choose a batch size. Some
machines handle a single key only and you are prompted to send the next key when ready.
Options

Option Description
Which keys do you want to All keys (ordered and test): All ordered keys and all test keys are sent
manufacture to the machine.

All ordered keys: All ordered keys are sent to the machine.

All test keys: All test keys are sent to the machine.

Selected entry only: You select from the adjacent list the item you
want for the key section and ordered/test.
Manufacturing order Manufacture keys in order by key section, then as sorted: This
option ensures that key sections are not intermingled.

Manufacture keys in the order that the keys are sorted: The
system key order is respected, even if that means mixing key sections.
When manufacturing ordered This option controls how test keys are manufactured in relation to ordered
and test keys keys

Mix according to key section and sort order: Ordered keys and test
keys are manufactured according to the order they are sorted in the
system. This is usually not a good choice as it mixes the keys you are
delivering to the customer with test keys.

Test keys before ordered keys: Test keys are produced first,
respecting the manufacturing order, then ordered keys.

Test keys after ordered keys: Ordered keys are produced first,
respecting the manufacturing order, then test keys.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 214 ProMaster Master Keying

Change start point When "Selected entry only" is chosen, This button can be used to view the
items for manufacturing and select the start point. This is useful for
resuming an interrupted job.
Keys per batch On machines where multiple keys may be sent in a single operation, this
controls how many keys are sent in each batch. If there are multiple
batches required, you are prompted to send the next batch.
Machine settings and information Machine specific information or options are shown.

9.14.13.1 Machine options: Silca UnoCode

Options

Option Description
Use ideal cut (laser cut) rather If the key uses a normal cut, the option to use an ideal cut will be
than normal cut available. Keys should be cut to manufacturer specification, so turn this
on only with a good reason.
Adjustments It should never be necessary to adjust cuts if your machine is calibrated
correctly and product is manufactured correctly.
On rare occasions, you may wish to adjust the cuts. Any changes you set
are remembered on a card-by-card basis.
For Best A2/A4 (Cards 752/754) Available on Interchangeable core module. When selected then tip stop 4
use tip stop 4 instead of tip stop will be used.
3

9.14.13.2 Machine options: Silca UltraCode

Options

Option Description
Use ideal cut (laser cut) rather If the key uses a normal cut, the option to use an ideal cut will be
than normal cut available. Keys should be cut to manufacturer specification, so turn this
on only with a good reason.
Adjustments It should never be necessary to adjust cuts if your machine is calibrated
correctly and product is manufactured correctly.
On rare occasions, you may wish to adjust the cuts. Any changes you set
are remembered on a card-by-card basis.
For Best A2/A4 (Cards 752/754) Available on Interchangeable core module. When selected then tip stop 4
use tip stop 4 instead of tip stop will be used.
3

9.14.13.3 Machine options: Silca UnoCode 199

Options

Option Description
Use ideal cut (laser cut) rather If the key uses a normal cut, the option to use an ideal cut will be
than normal cut available. Keys should be cut to manufacturer specification, so turn this
on only with a good reason.
Adjustments It should never be necessary to adjust cuts if your machine is calibrated
correctly and product is manufactured correctly.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 215

On rare occasions, you may wish to adjust the cuts. Any changes you set
are remembered on a card-by-card basis.

9.14.13.4 Machine options: Silca Futura

Options

Option Description
Use ideal cut (laser cut) rather If the key uses a normal cut, the option to use an ideal cut will be
than normal cut available. Keys should be cut to manufacturer specification, so turn this
on only with a good reason.

9.14.13.5 Machine options: Silca Protech

The output folder and file name are shown.
Options

Option Description
Data for "T02" token Determines the contents of the marking token T02 in the data sent to the
machine.

9.14.13.6 Machine options: Silca QuattroCode

Options

Option Description
Adjustments It should never be necessary to adjust cuts if your machine is calibrated
correctly and product is manufactured correctly.
On rare occasions, you may wish to adjust the cuts.

9.14.13.7 Machine options: Keyline Dezmo

Options

Option Description
Use Dromo If the Dromo is detected on your Dezmo, the option to request the Dromo
is available.

9.14.13.8 Machine options: Abloy LT106

The output folder and file name are shown.
Options

Option Description
Add trailing '0' cuts on 7 disc and Turn on to pad the code length to 10 characters (the leading tip '0' is
9 disc systems removed first)

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 216 ProMaster Master Keying

9.14.13.9 Machine options: HPC Codemax

Options

Option Description
Reset CodeMax At times, CodeMax machines can be temperamental. If communication
with the machines fails, you may try sending a reset to the machine to
sort it out.

9.14.13.10 Machine options: Ilco EZCode

Options

Option Description
Use ideal cut (laser cut) rather If the key uses a normal cut, the option to use an ideal cut will be
than normal cut available. Keys should be cut to manufacturer specification, so turn this
on only with a good reason.

9.14.14 Manufacture: Save job to XML for key marking

Premium and Manufacturer edition only.
To enable XML exports you must turn on the the Application parameter 49 "Allow "XML export" as a
manufacturing output"
205
The export is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Save marking data to XML file under Key manufacturing.

· The report will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Save button adjacent to the option.

Options

Option Description
Folder Choose the folder where you want the XML files created.
File name format Choose how the file will be named.
Export without prompting for When this option is on, and only if all settings are valid, the XML output
"Manufacture all selected" will be written without prompting when you click "Manufacture all
selected". This is useful for eliminating additional user choices during
manufacturing.
Spawn the following program If you want a program to be launched after the XML file is created, choose
that program by clicking the Select button. When the program is
launched, the full name of the XML file is passed as the first parameter to
the program.

By default, the output is written if version 8 format. Version 7 format can be enabled by turning on the
option Application parameter 49 "Use legacy format for "XML export" manufacturing output". Version
7 format does not support new features, and will not be enhanced in the future. Use version 7 format
only for compatibility with existing applications. Use version 8 for all new integration development.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 217

9.14.15 Manufacture: Save job to XML for key cutting

Premium and Manufacturer edition only.

To enable XML exports you must turn on the the Application parameter 49 "Allow "XML export" as a
manufacturing output"
205
The export is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Save cutting data to XML file under Key manufacturing.

· The report will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Save button adjacent to the option.

Options

Option Description
Folder Choose the folder where you want the XML files created.
File name format Choose how the file will be named.
Export without prompting for When this option is on, and only if all settings are valid, the XML output
"Manufacture all selected" will be written without prompting when you click "Manufacture all
selected". This is useful for eliminating additional user choices during
manufacturing.
Spawn the following program If you want a program to be launched after the XML file is created, choose
that program by clicking the Select button. When the program is
launched, the full name of the XML file is passed as the first parameter to
the program.

By default, the output is written if version 8 format. Version 7 format can be enabled by turning on the
option Application parameter 49 "Use legacy format for "XML export" manufacturing output". Version
7 format does not support new features, and will not be enhanced in the future. Use version 7 format
only for compatibility with existing applications. Use version 8 for all new integration development.

9.14.16 Manufacture: Mark doors

205
The output is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
The following sections list machine specific settings. Any machines without additional setting are omitted.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Send data to door marker.

· The output will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Send button adjacent to the option.

· Select your marking machine and click Next.

· Manufacturing behaviour varies depending on the machine. Some machines sent all the data in a single
operation. Some machines take many keys in a single operation but allow you to choose a batch size. Some
machines handle a single key only and you are prompted to send the next key when ready.
Options

Option Description

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 218 ProMaster Master Keying

Which doors do you want to All doors: All doors are sent to the machine.
manufacture
Selected entry only: You select from the adjacent list the item you
want for the part code.
Manufacturing order Manufacture doors in order by part code, key-way, then as
sorted: This option ensures that part codes are not intermingled.

Manufacture doors in order by cylinder style, part code, key-

way, then as sorted: This option ensures that part codes are not
intermingled, but also sorts by cylinder style so the engraver clamp that
holds cylinders is changes as few times as possible.

Manufacture doors in the order that the doors are sorted: The
system door order is respected, even if that means mixing part codes.
Change start point When "Selected entry only" is chosen, This button can be used to view the
items for manufacturing and select the start point. This is useful for
resuming an interrupted job.
Doors per batch On machines where multiple doors may be sent in a single operation, this
controls how many doors are sent in each batch. If there are multiple
batches required, you are prompted to send the next batch.
Machine settings and information Machine specific information or options are shown.

9.14.16.1 Machine options: Gravograph

Options

Option Description
Separate files for each part code This option produces multiple files so part codes are not mixed in a single
or cylinder style file. The options is available for the first two options for manufacturing
order (I.e. where the doors are sorted by part code and possible cylinder
style)
Output only door stamping Normally the output has:
System Stamping,Door Stamping,Issue Number,Door Number
Turn this option on to output only the Door Stamping.

9.14.16.2 Machine options: Ilco EngraveIt Pro

Options

Option Description
Separate files for each part code This option produces multiple files so part codes are not mixed in a single
or cylinder style file. The options is available for the first two options for manufacturing
order (I.e. where the doors are sorted by part code and possible cylinder
style)

9.14.16.3 Machine options: Silca Marker 2000

The marker 2000 marking models must be configured using your Silca marker software.
Options

Option Description

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 219

Marking model Choose the model you want to use from the list. All doors sent to the
machine will use this marking model.

9.14.17 Manufacture: Doors and keys on Galaxy machine

205
The output is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Send data to door machine.

· The output will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Send button adjacent to the option.

· Select your Galaxy machine and click Next.

· This machine manufactures keys and door parts, so the options available will vary depending on whether
the job has keys or doors or both.
Options

Option Description
Send keys to the machine Turn on to send keys as part of the data transfer to the machine.
Which keys do you want to All keys (ordered and test): All ordered keys and all test keys are sent
manufacture to the machine.

All ordered keys: All ordered keys are sent to the machine.

All test keys: All test keys are sent to the machine.

Selected entry only: You select from the adjacent list the item you
want for the key section and ordered/test.
When manufacturing ordered This option controls how test keys are manufactured in relation to ordered
and test keys keys

Mix according to key section and sort order: Ordered keys and test
keys are manufactured according to the order they are sorted in the
system. This is usually not a good choice as it mixes the keys you are
delivering to the customer with test keys.

Test keys before ordered keys: Test keys are produced first,
respecting the manufacturing order, then ordered keys.

Test keys after ordered keys: Ordered keys are produced first,
respecting the manufacturing order, then test keys.
Send doors to the machine Turn on to send doors as part of the data transfer to the machine.
Which doors do you want to All doors: All doors are sent to the machine.
manufacture
Selected entry only: You select from the adjacent list the item you
want for the part code.
Change key start point When "Selected entry only" is chosen, This button can be used to view the
keys for manufacturing and select the start point. This is useful for
resuming an interrupted job.
Change door start point When "Selected entry only" is chosen, This button can be used to view the
doors for manufacturing and select the start point. This is useful for

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 220 ProMaster Master Keying

resuming an interrupted job.

Marking model Choose the model you want to use from the list. All keys and doors sent
to the machine will use this marking model.

9.14.18 Manufacture: On-screen pinning

205
The output is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option View on-screen pinning.

· The output will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the View button adjacent to the option.

· Select your key cutting machine and click Next.

· Manufacturing behaviour varies depending on the machine. Some machines sent all the data in a single
operation. Some machines take many keys in a single operation but allow you to choose a batch size. Some
machines handle a single key only and you are prompted to send the next key when ready.
Options
Check the option then click on the settings link. After you change the output settings, your changes are
shown on the Job manufacture window and are remembered.

Option Description
Show lock finish Turn on to include the lock finish in the door information area.
Show lock part item number Turn on to include the lock "item number" in the door information area.
Show a line between information Turn on to show a line between each information item. This make
items improve readability.
Pinning font size Allows you to decide the font size used for the pinning information part of
the display. A larger size may be preferable for readability.
Sort order Choose how the doors will be sorted. Generally you should pick the same
sort order when producing labels.

Navigating the on-screen pinning

The information in the on-screen pinning window is much the same as that shown in the door pinning chart
report.
At the bottom of the window are controls for navigating.

Control Description
Prior Navigates back 1 door, to the prior door. The door number and quantity
of the prior door is shown on the button.
Next Navigates forward 1 door, to the next door. The door number and
quantity of the next door is shown on the button.
Seq, Go to Doors are allocated a sequence, according to the position in the job
according to the sort order selected. To go to a door in the job, enter
the sequence number and click Go to. This is useful if you know a door
you need to return to for checking.
Door, Go to To go to a door in the job where you know the door number, enter the
door number and click Go to. This is useful if you know a door you need

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 221

to return to for checking.

Set bookmark If you know a door that you may want to return to, you can click the Set
bookmark button to remember that door "Bookmark". The door
information is shown on the Bookmark button which then becomes
enabled.
Bookmark Returns the door you previously set as a bookmark.
Last seen As you navigate through the doors, the door furthest into the job that you
have seen is remembered and shown on the Last seen button. If you
return to an earlier door, you can click this button to return to the place
where you were up to.

Labels
The Print label button prints a label (or labels) for the current door.
The options are the same that are used for labels from the Manufacture Job window. See Settings: Print
209
door labels . The label settiongs may be accessed by right clicking the Print label button;

9.14.19 Manufacture: Save job to XML for door marking

Premium and Manufacturer edition only.
49
To enable XML exports you must turn on the the Application parameter "Allow "XML export" as a
manufacturing output"
205
The export is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Save marking data to XML file under Door manufacturing.

· The report will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Save button adjacent to the option.

Options

Option Description
Folder Choose the folder where you want the XML files created.
File name format Choose how the file will be named.
Export without prompting for When this option is on, and only if all settings are valid, the XML output
"Manufacture all selected" will be written without prompting when you click "Manufacture all
selected". This is useful for eliminating additional user choices during
manufacturing.
Spawn the following program If you want a program to be launched after the XML file is created, choose
that program by clicking the Select button. When the program is
launched, the full name of the XML file is passed as the first parameter to
the program.

By default, the output is written if version 8 format. Version 7 format can be enabled by turning on the
option Application parameter 49 "Use legacy format for "XML export" manufacturing output". Version
7 format does not support new features, and will not be enhanced in the future. Use version 7 format
only for compatibility with existing applications. Use version 8 for all new integration development.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 222 ProMaster Master Keying

9.14.20 Manufacture: Save job to XML for door assembly

Premium and Manufacturer edition only.

To enable XML exports you must turn on the the Application parameter 49 "Allow "XML export" as a
manufacturing output"
205
The export is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Save assembly data to XML file under Door manufacturing.

· The report will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Save button adjacent to the option.

Options

Option Description
Folder Choose the folder where you want the XML files created.
File name format Choose how the file will be named.
Export without prompting for When this option is on, and only if all settings are valid, the XML output
"Manufacture all selected" will be written without prompting when you click "Manufacture all
selected". This is useful for eliminating additional user choices during
manufacturing.
Spawn the following program If you want a program to be launched after the XML file is created, choose
that program by clicking the Select button. When the program is
launched, the full name of the XML file is passed as the first parameter to
the program.

By default, the output is written if version 8 format. Version 7 format can be enabled by turning on the
option Application parameter 49 "Use legacy format for "XML export" manufacturing output". Version
7 format does not support new features, and will not be enhanced in the future. Use version 7 format
only for compatibility with existing applications. Use version 8 for all new integration development.

9.14.21 Manufacture: Save job to XML for parts required

Premium and Manufacturer edition only.
49
To enable XML exports you must turn on the the Application parameter "Allow "XML export" as a
manufacturing output"
205
The export is accessed from the Job manufacturing window.
Getting started
· Turn on the option Save parts required data to XML file under Other manufacturing.

· The report will be included if you click Manufacture all selected.

· To perform this task individually, click on the Save button adjacent to the option.

Options

Option Description
Folder Choose the folder where you want the XML files created.
File name format Choose how the file will be named.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 223

Export without prompting for When this option is on, and only if all settings are valid, the XML output
"Manufacture all selected" will be written without prompting when you click "Manufacture all
selected". This is useful for eliminating additional user choices during
manufacturing.
Spawn the following program If you want a program to be launched after the XML file is created, choose
that program by clicking the Select button. When the program is
launched, the full name of the XML file is passed as the first parameter to
the program.

By default, the output is written if version 8 format. Version 7 format can be enabled by turning on the
option Application parameter 49 "Use legacy format for "XML export" manufacturing output". Version
7 format does not support new features, and will not be enhanced in the future. Use version 7 format
only for compatibility with existing applications. Use version 8 for all new integration development.

9.14.22 Manufacture: Publish to device

To start using mobile services you must first configure publishing (See Configuring publishing 80 ) and
configure devices (See Configuring devices 84 )
Publishing is available only when your registration support and maintenance is current.
205
The device publishing is accessed from the Job manufacturing window by clicking on the Publish to
device button.
Getting started
· Select the device to which the job is to be sent. The devices available are governed by the factory for the
job and the system type if those restrictions have been turned on in the publishing configuration.

· Choose how long the job is allow to be available on the publishing server.

· Choose how long the job is allow to be available on the device.

· Choose if you want to send doors, keys or both.

· Click Send to device to publish the job.

Other functionality
Click Device queue and job history to see jobs from this system that have been sent to the device.
If you are using publishing to re-key cylinders on site then you should consider:
(a) Make a separate job for only the re-keying and put it on a factory that is specific to the destination
device
(b) Configure publishing and devices to restrict the device to that factory
This makes it difficult to send the job to the wrong device and avoids sending key information if it was
not intended for the device.

9.14.23 Machine setup

The machine setup defines all machines that are attached to your computer.
The setting for each machine differ and are described in the following topics.
Getting started
There are four ways to get to the Machines window.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 224 ProMaster Master Keying

· From the main window, select the Setup and Admin menu, then select Machines

· From the Jobs window, click Options then Machines.

· From the Manufacture Job window, click Options then Machines.

· When manufacturing keys or doors, click the Machine setup button below the machine selection.

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your factories.

· When you add a machine, the first selection required is the machine type.

9.14.23.1 Machine setup - Silca (Unocode, Triax)

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.
Machine serial number: It is important that this matches the machine. If it is wrong then the machine will
not communicate. Ensure the machine is turned on and click Read from machine to retrieve the serial
number from your machine.
Read machine version: After completing the com port and serial number, this button will read the machine
version information and report it. This useful for getting the version information, but also verifying the
communication is functioning.

9.14.23.2 Machine setup - Silca Futura

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.

Description: Enter a description of the machine.

Settings
TCP/IP address: Enter the TCP/IP address used on the machine. You may need to seek assistance from
your network administrator.
Test: After entering the TCP/IP address, this button will communicate with the machine and report the
version number. This useful for getting the version information, but also verifying the communication is
functioning.

9.14.23.3 Machine setup - Silca Marker 2000

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 225

Machine serial number: It is important that this matches the machine. If it is wrong then the machine will
not communicate. Ensure the machine is turned on and click Read from machine to retrieve the serial
number from your machine.
Marker 2000 folder: Choose the folder where the Marker 2000 software and marking models are stored.
Often this is C:\Marcator
Read machine version: After completing the com port and serial number, this button will read the machine
version information and report it. This useful for getting the version information, but also verifying the
communication is functioning.

Marking tokens
Keys
The marking tokens are send with the following information.

Token Description
0 Key number, or Key stamping if different stamping is defined.
1 A description of the key and issue number
2 Blank
3 Key section
4 Issue number (if used by the system)
5 System number, or System stamping if different stamping is defined.

Doors
The marking tokens are send with the following information.

Token Description
0 Door stamping
1 Door number
2 Blank
3 Part code
4 Issue number (if used by the system)
5 System number, or System stamping if different stamping is defined.

9.14.23.4 Machine setup - Silca Protech

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the Protech files created.
Abus XY14 Card: For XY14 users, if you are using XY14 keys but the dimples are pre-cut, change the card
to 2658.
AL Bilock card: For Bilock users, 621 is the traditional card. The other card rounds the top of the peaks.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 226 ProMaster Master Keying

9.14.23.5 Machine setup - Silca QuattroCode

Identification

The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.

Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.
Machine serial number: It is important that this matches the machine. If it is wrong then the machine will
not communicate. Ensure the machine is turned on and click Read from machine to retrieve the serial
number from your machine.
Calibrate: Each haw muct be calibrated before it may be used. Click on the jaw you need, then click
Calibrate. Form the Calibrate Vice window, click Calibrate and follow the machine instructions. When
finished, click OK to save the calibration,
Read machine version: After completing the com port and serial number, this button will read the machine
version information and report it. This useful for getting the version information, but also verifying the
communication is functioning.

9.14.23.6 Machine setup - Keyline (All)

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
TCP/IP address: Enter the TCP/IP address used on the machine. You may need to seek assistance from
your network administrator.
TCP/IP port: If for any reason the machine is listening on a port other than 61770, change this value to
reflect your machine settings.
313
Search for machines: This buttin opens a window do search for machines. See Keyline machine search
.
Test: After entering the TCP/IP address, this button will open a diagnostics window. See Keyline machine
314
disgnostics .

9.14.23.7 Machine setup - Abloy LT106

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.8 Machine setup - Abloy LT120

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 227

Description: Enter a description of the machine.

Settings

TCP/IP address: Enter the TCP/IP address used on the machine. You may need to seek assistance from
your network administrator.
Test: After entering the TCP/IP address, this button will communicate with the machine and report the
version number and other information. This useful for getting the version information, but also verifying the
communication is functioning.

9.14.23.9 Machine setup - ALC Galaxy

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.

Description: Enter a description of the machine.

Settings
TCP/IP address: Enter the TCP/IP address used on the machine. You may need to seek assistance from
your network administrator.
Test: After entering the TCP/IP address, this button will communicate with the machine and report the
version number. This useful for getting the version information, but also verifying the communication is
functioning.

9.14.23.10 Machine setup - CYA

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.11 Machine setup - Gravograph

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.12 Machine setup - HPC Codemax

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 228 ProMaster Master Keying

Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.
Speed: Ensure that the speed matches the settings on your CodeMax machine.

Model: If you have the auto-angler machine, change this setting accordingly. This changes the data sent to
the machine to make the head rotate for Medeco keys.

9.14.23.13 Machine setup - Ilco EngraveIt Pro

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.

Settings
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.14 Machine setup - Ilco EZCode

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.
Machine serial number: Enter the machine serial number.
Read machine version: After completing the com port and serial number, this button will read the machine
version information and report it. This useful for getting the version information, but also verifying the
communication is functioning.

9.14.23.15 Machine setup - ITL

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.
Speed: Ensure that the speed matches the settings on your ITL machine.
Model: If you have 950 machine, change this setting accordingly. This makes ProMaster Master Keying wait
for you to move the carriage for a reset.
Timing: This controls how fast data is sent to the machine. The default of 5 is fine for most ITL machines,
but some need this to be slowed down. Slow it down too much and the downloads take longer than
necessary. The problems is, there is no way to know if a transfer to the machine was successful. The ITL
machine has a tiny wee brain and when it can't keep up it does some horrid things. The first thing you may
notice if this happens is that your key is not cut correctly (or may not cut at all). The other common
characteristic of this problem is that the standard flat widths in the ITL flat width table change (We change

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 229

only the user defined values, but the others will be overwritten if the machine fails to keep up with the data
transfer).

Wait for the machine to notify that reset is complete: Normally this should be on, but we have seen
some ITL machines that don't respond correctly. If you turn this option off, a small delay is used in to allow
them reset to complete instead of waiting for the machine notification.
Machine does not respond correctly: Normally this should be off, but we have seen some ITL machines
that do not acknowledge the data sent to the machine. If you turn this option off, the data transfer assumes
that the data was received.

9.14.23.16 Machine setup - JMA MultiMark

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.

9.14.23.17 Machine setup - Maromatic

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.18 Machine setup - Miracle

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.
Model: Select your machine model.
Note: The miracle performs an "approximate" cut for cylinder keys using a track cutter and you need to
be aware of the limitations of cutting this way.

9.14.23.19 Machine setup - MulTLock KC5

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 230 ProMaster Master Keying

Description: Enter a description of the machine.

Settings

Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.20 Machine setup - Orion ECM 200

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.

Settings
Com port: Select the communication port to which the machine is connected.
Speed: Ensure that the speed matches the settings on your ECM 200 machine.
Timing: This controls how fast data is sent to the machine. The default of 5 is fine for most ECM 200
machines, but some need this to be slowed down.

9.14.23.21 Machine setup - Orion Luna

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.22 Machine setup - Combination

Various "Combination" machines are available for keys that must be cut on one machine then another
machine (e.g. dimples followed by side cuts).
Select the combination machine applicable to your key type then select its two machines.
The machines must be defined before using them for a combination machine.

9.14.23.23 Machine setup - Generic key marker

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
General
File name: Choose how the file name will be generated.
File extension: Choose the file extension that will be used on the file.
Append the key section...: The output is produced as multiple files for each key section used, with the file
name modified io include the key section name.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 231

File format: Choose if you want the file written as ASCII (Non-ASCII characters, if any will be omitted), UTF-
8 (supports all characters and writes the UTF-8 preamble to the file).

Quantity and issues: There are 3 fields available in the Key Items, Quantity, Issue Number and Starting
Issue Number.

Value Output lines Quantity Issue number Starting issue

created number
One entry per key, 1 The quantity Not applicable. It is set to The starting issue
machine generates issue ordered "Starting issue number" number
numbers, quantity as
ordered
One entry per key issue, Quantity 1 First line has the "Starting Not applicable. It
PM8 generates issue issue number" and is set to "Starting
numbers, quantity 1 each subsequent lines are issue number" but
incremented makes no sense to
use.

File Start
Add the items you want to the list.
This is written once at the start of the file.
File Items
Add the items you want to the list.
At least 1 item must be chosen.
This is written for each key or each key issue depending on the value selected for "Quantity and issues".
The CutData and CutData reversed values are available only on Inline and Interchangeable Core design
modules and it is not recommended that you mark this on the key.
File End
Add the items you want to the list.

This is written once at the end of the file.

Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.23.24 Machine setup - Generic cylinder marker

Identification
The machine type is shown. This cannot be changed.
Description: Enter a description of the machine.
Settings
General
File name: Choose how the file name will be generated.
File extension: Choose the file extension that will be used on the file.
Append the part code...: The output is produced as multiple files for each part code used, with the file
name modified io include the part code.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 232 ProMaster Master Keying

File format: Choose if you want the file written as ASCII (Non-ASCII characters, if any will be omitted), UTF-
8 (supports all characters and writes the UTF-8 preamble to the file).

Quantity and issues: There are 3 fields available in the Door Items, Quantity, Issue Number and Starting
Issue Number.

Value Output lines Quantity Issue number Starting issue

created number
One entry per door, 1 The quantity Not applicable. It is set to The starting issue
machine generates issue ordered "Starting issue number" number
numbers, quantity as
ordered
One entry per door issue, Quantity 1 First line has the "Starting Not applicable. It
PM8 generates issue issue number" and is set to "Starting
numbers, quantity 1 each subsequent lines are issue number" but
incremented makes no sense to
use.

File Start
Add the items you want to the list.
This is written once at the start of the file.
File Items
Add the items you want to the list.
At least 1 item must be chosen.
This is written for each key or each key issue depending on the value selected for "Quantity and issues".
File End
Add the items you want to the list.
This is written once at the end of the file.
Folder: Choose the folder where you want the machine files created.

9.14.24 Machine job queue

All Keyline machines and also the Abloy LT120 machine allow the job queue to be viewed.
To remove jobs from the queue, select the jobs to delete and click Purge.
the queue may be updated by clicking the Refresh button.

9.15 Exporting data

9.15.1 Exporting system data to a csv file
Various types of system data may be exported and imported via csv files.
Getting started
· From the File menu, select Export then Export system data (CSV).

A simple wizard steps you through the process of choosing where the data will be written, choosing which
data to export and choosing export options.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 233

Multiple types of data may be exported at the same time. Each type of data is written to a separate file,
named according to the type of data.

When choosing the range of data to export, you may right click on the list for selection options. The types of
data are defined in logical groups allowing you to select or deselect the whole group in a single operation.
Notes
The fields exported depend on a variety of parameters. e.g. Key stamping will be exported only if it is enabled
in your application parameters. Signatory quantity required will be exported only if the system uses per-key or
per-door signatory restrictions.

9.15.2 Exporting systems analysis data

The Systems analysis data export asks you a number of questions and then exports data about your systems
that matches your selections. You may then use this data, for example in Excel, for marketing, business
planning etc.
Getting started
· From the File menu, choose Export then Export systems analysis data

Exporting data
Choose if you want data about systems, signatories or jobs.

Continue through the following steps, making selections to refine the data that will be exported.
For example, you may be interested in only some system yypes, a particular date range for jobs or only some
lock products.
Choose a file name for the CSV file that will be produced.
Finally, click Finish to perform the export.
Because of the wide range of choices available for this export, you may need to try a variety of options
to get just the data that you want.

9.16 Design modules

9.16.1 General information
9.16.1.1 Common system type parameters
This topic defines a umber of parameters used on system types and systems and explains their meaning.

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
After systems are created using the system type, this value cannot be
edited.
Minimum depth The minimum depth symbol allowed.
Maximum depth The maximum depth symbol allowed.
Deepest first cut The maximum depth symbol allowed in the cut nearest the key head.
Deepest last cut The maximum depth symbol allowed in the cut nearest the key tip.
Maximum variation The maximum depth symbol variation allowed between adjacent cuts.
Generally this is determined by the geometry of the lock system, but may

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 234 ProMaster Master Keying

be reduced if the step is considered to great, or increased if sacrificing the

edge of the higher cut is acceptable.
Minimum different cuts The minimum number of different depth symbols allowed on a code
Minimum total variation The minimum number of depth steps from the shallowest depth symbol to
the deepest depth symbol on the code.
Maximum alike adjacent The maximum number of the same cut permitted consecutively in a code.
Maximum alike total The maximum number of the same cut permitted in a code.
Disallow ramp up Disallows codes that ramp in single steps from a shallow cut at the key
head to a deep cut at the key tip.
Disallow ramp down Disallows codes that ramp in single steps from a deep cut at the key head
to a shallow cut at the key tip.
Safe from re-cutting Determines if codes must have a cut deeper than the TMK value, and
hence would not be able to be re-cut to create the TMK code.
Has coloured key heads Controls whether colours for key heads will be available while coding.
Depth step for design assistant The default step value when using the design assistant to generate a
system design.
Use anti-bump pins Determines if anti-bump pins are used in the pinning output.

9.16.1.2 Kaba Positional Keying Chart

The following chart shows the number of codes available for each combination of "positions permutated" vs
"positions available".
The optimal choices for each number of positions available to produce the most codes are highlighted.

Example
If you progress 2 positions through 9 available positions (referred to as 2 in 9), this will produce 36 codes.
Note however, unless there are any other factors involved then 2 in 9 is not an ideal choice, because:
(a) if you are progressing through 9 positions then you should progress 4 positions to yield 126 codes
(b) if you required only 36 codes then you should select fewer positions to progress through (perhaps 4 in 8 to
produce 70 codes, or 3 in 7 if 35 codes is enough for your purpose)

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 235

9.16.2 Abloy Disklock/Novel

9.16.2.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Abloy Disklock/Novel.
This design module implements the Abloy Disklock Pro and Abloy Novel lock systems.
For Abloy Disklock Pro, TMK values are user entered/generated and may be 9 disc, 11 disc or 9/11 disc
combined.
For Abloy Novel, TMK values are controlled by lists proved to you by the lock manufacturer and you choose an
appropriate list for your system size.

Key head colours are supported.

Key section families with multiple key sections are possible, but it is extremely unlikely to affect anyone
outside of Abloy factories and you should consider key section families to have a single key section and a
single keyway (in this case the keyway is the profile disc)
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented tip to head in keeping with Abloy convention.

9.16.2.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Use group 2 codes All lock systems.
Default value applied when creating new system designs. Group 2 codes,
when used with a standard progression, produce more codes but require
a fill disc kit. Without group 2 codes the systems you produce will be
much smaller but the parts requirement to keep stock of is somewhat
smaller.
Suppress profile cut on printout Removes the tip profile cut from each end of the key code on printouts.
Makes it easier to read when cutting keys on a manual machine.

Dealer cuts
For Disklock Pro only, Novel uses lists to control the dealer cuts.
You may select a key section and the 2 dealer cut values and click Add to add the combination to the list.
You may make dealer cut values for each key section.
The dealer cut values are used when generating a TMK value for a new system.

9.16.2.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK - Abloy Disklock PRo
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section.
The dealer cuts on the TMK should match those allocated to you by the lock manufacturer for the selected key
section.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 236 ProMaster Master Keying

If you have defined your dealer cuts (See System type setup 235
) then these will be used when creating the
TMK.

TMK and List - Abloy Novel

When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then select an appropriate list. After
selecting the list, click Create TMK to generate the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of
drop-down values.
From the list selection window you can open list management to split and join lists if you have permissions.
See Managing Abloy Novel lists 94

Choose an appropriate size list. If there is not an appropriate size list, split a larger one. Contact the
lock manufacturer for assistance.
Restrictions
Promote key section is not available for this design module.
Depth steps are not applicable to this design module, but do understand Group 2 codes and custom
progressions for limiting the codes produced.

9.16.2.4 Coding
Enter code - Abloy Novel
If you manually enter a code for a key, it must comply with the list selected for the system design.
Special pinning - Abloy Novel
Positions allowed in special pinning are limited to those that may be progressed in the list selected for the
system design.

9.16.3 Abloy Protec 1/2

9.16.3.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Abloy Protec.

This design module implements the Abloy Protec 1 and Abloy Protec 2 lock systems.
TMK values are controlled by lists proved to you by the lock manufacturer and you choose an appropriate list
for your system size.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible, but it is extremely unlikely to affect anyone
outside of Abloy factories and you should consider key section families to have a single key section and a
single keyway (in this case the keyway is the profile disc)
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented tip to head in keeping with Abloy convention.
Lists are labelled B, A, 0, 1... according to the number of positions that may be progressed. A "B" list is a
single code. An "A" list has one position that may be progressed (Denoted by "X"). A "o" list has two
positions that may be progressed. Etc, all the way up to a "7" list that has nine positions that can be
progressed.

9.16.3.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 237

System type defaults

Data field Description

Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs.
The maximum number of the same cut permitted in a code.
Deep cut required Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Determines if a code must have a deep cut value.
Disallow consecutive sets of 3 Default value applied when creating new system designs.
alike cuts Determines if combinations like ...333222... are permitted.
Use group 2 codes Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Group 2 codes, when used with a standard progression, produce more
codes but require a fill disc kit. Without group 2 codes the systems you
produce will be much smaller but the parts requirement to keep stock of is
somewhat smaller.
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Bias chamber assignment toward Determines how ProMaster Master Keying assigns progression positions
key tip when the design is created with the design assistant.
Suppress profile cut on printout Removes the tip profile cut from each end of the key code on printouts.
Makes it easier to read when cutting keys on a manual machine.

Pre-cuts to skip when manufacturing

You may select a key section and the pre-cut positions and click Add to add the combination to the list.
You may make pre-cut values for each key section.
The pre-cut values are used when sending data to the Silca Protech, Keyline SigmaPro and Silca UnoCode
399.
The default for each key section is "0XX", meaning that the 2 positions nearest the tip are cut on the
machine.
For example, if you change it to "000" then key on that key section are not cut in those positions (the cuts are
replaced with a "0" cut).

9.16.3.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK and List
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then select an appropriate list. After
selecting the list, click Create TMK to generate the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of
drop-down values.
From the list selection window you can open list management to split and join lists if you have permissions.
See Managing Abloy Protec lists 95
Choose an appropriate size list. If there is not an appropriate size list, split a larger one. Contact the
lock manufacturer for assistance.
Restrictions
Promote key section is not available for this design module.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 238 ProMaster Master Keying

Depth steps are not applicable to this design module, but do understand Group 2 codes and custom
progressions for limiting the codes produced.

9.16.3.4 Coding
Enter code
If you manually enter a code for a key, it must comply with the list selected for the system design.
Special pinning

Positions allowed in special pinning are limited to those that may be progressed in the list selected for the
system design.

9.16.4 Abloy Standard/Exec/Sentry

9.16.4.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Abloy Standard/Exec/Sentry.
This design module implements the Abloy Classic, Abloy Profile, Abloy Exec and Abloy Sentry lock systems.
TMK values are user entered/generated and may be 7 disc, 9 disc or 11 disc.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible, but it is extremely unlikely to affect anyone
outside of Abloy factories and you should consider key section families to have a single key section and a
single keyway (in this case the keyway is the profile disc)
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented tip to head in keeping with Abloy convention.

9.16.4.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs.
The maximum number of the same cut permitted in a code.
Maximum 5 cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs.
The maximum number of '5' cuts permitted in a code.
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deep cut required Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Determines if a code must have a deep cut value.
Disallow 00 at tip Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Determines if a double 0 cut is allowed at the tip of the key.
Disallow consecutive 3+3 alike Default value applied when creating new system designs.
cuts Determines if combinations like ...333222... are permitted.
Disallow consecutive 3+2+2 alike Default value applied when creating new system designs.
cuts Determines if combinations like ...3332211... are permitted.
Disallow consecutive 2+2+2 alike Default value applied when creating new system designs.
cuts Determines if combinations like ...332211... are permitted.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 239

Use group 2 codes Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Group 2 codes, when used with a standard progression, produce more
codes but require a fill disc kit. Without group 2 codes the systems you
produce will be much smaller but the parts requirement to keep stock of is
somewhat smaller.
Suppress profile cuts on printout Removes the profile cuts from each end of the key code on printouts.
Makes it easier to read when cutting keys on a manual machine.

9.16.4.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
There are no special considerations for the system design other than the appropriate rules.

9.16.4.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.5 ABUS XY14

9.16.5.1 Product description
General
This design module is called ABUS XY14.
This design module implements the Abus XY14 and Y14.
XY14 systems may have a mix of XY14, Y14 and X14 cylinders.
The X cuts are the dimple cuts and are treated as axis 2, whereas the Y cuts are the pin tumbler cuts and are
treated as axis 1.
TMK values are user entered/generated.

Key head colours are supported.

Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
When configuring cylinders, the "axis 1" and "axis 2" check boxes must be set correctly for each cylinder.

9.16.5.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 240 ProMaster Master Keying

233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow ramp up Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Disallow ramp down Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Allow X cut progression XY14 only.
Prohibits the progression of the X axis value when. See also the next item
about Default X axis cuts.

Default X axis cuts

For XY14 only, allows you to define values that will always be used for the X axis when generating a TMK.
This is useful if you use XY14, but you have keys pre-cut on the X axis (I.e. you cut the Y axis but do not cut
the X axis dimple cute)
You may select a key section and the cut values and click Add to add the combination to the list.
You may make X axis cut values for each key section.
The dealer cut values are used when generating a TMK value for a new system.

9.16.5.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
Depth steps

Depth steps for Axis 2 (The dimple cuts) is always represented by the character "1" when the axis 2 pins are
to be progressed. The manner in which the axis 2 pins are progressed is determined by then number of "A"
pins and also the designation of that position (hierarchy is progressed differently to selective).
The depths on the last position of Axis 1 are controlled by the geometry of the lock so some cut values are
unavailable.

9.16.5.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.6 ALC Bilock

9.16.6.1 Product description
General
This design module is called ALC Bilock.
This design module implements Bilock, Bilock QCC and Bilock CQCC.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 241

TMK values are user entered/generated.

Single or triple key head colours are supported.

Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Too many times we have seen systems where the control key is designated as a master key and is
assigned as the key above the TMK. This is wrong, so don't listen to anyone saying this. The control
key should be designated as a change key for QCC and as a control key for CQCC, and should have the
TMK as its key above (unless the system is more complex, having multiple branches with multiple
control keys)
Bilock CQCC
For QCC (the previous generation of Bilock) there was no need to distinguish between the control key and the
operating keys from a coding point of view.
With CQCC it is necessary to identify control keys because they affect the cylinder coding in a different way to
operating keys. For this reason, the key designation Control key must be used for the CQCC core removal
key. Do not use the Control key designation for control keys for QCC.
While you could mark the control key for QCC systems as designation Control key in QCC only systems with
no adverse effect, it is important it understand that in mixed QCC/CQCC systems the QCC keys must not have
the designation Control key.
It is necessary to distinguish between CQCC cylinders and QCC cylinders so that coding may be calculated
accordingly. When setting up cylinders for CQCC, select the value Bilock CQCC for the field Core type.
Failure to configure CQCC cylinders correctly will result in incorrect pinning being calculated.
For CQCC you may want to have multiple control keys on larger systems. Generally each cylinder would have
only one control key operating it, but it is possible to have multiple control keys operating a single CQCC
cylinder. If you do this then you must be aware of the effect it has on coding. For example, in one position the
operating cut may be "1" and the first control key cut "3", which results in a B3 pin being used. If you now
assign a second control key that has a cut "4" in that position (now making the coding requirement 1 shallow,
3 deep, 4 deep) the pin that is selected is "I" because of the 2 deep cuts and that there are no pins with
shallow cuts and more than one deep cut.

When coding CQCC, it is important to assign the control key first. If you don't then the operating keys
will show up as phantoms for the cylinder removal because the resultant coding will use pins with only
deep holes.
Bilock CQCC - 12 pin
In selecting your control key:
It must differ from any other operating key in one position, provided that position is in 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11
If that condition is not met then it must differ from any other operating key in two positions, provided those
positions are in 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11
If that condition is not met then it must differ from any other operating key in three positions, provided those
positions are in 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
If that condition is not met then it must differ from any other operating key in four positions.
CQCC 12 Pin: recommendation: For anything except huge systems, make it differ from the main
permutation in any 2 of the positions 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11. On huge systems, reduce that to 1.
Bilock CQCC - 8 pin
For a code to not remove the core in error, it must differ from the control code by at least one of the following
combinations of positions:

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 242 ProMaster Master Keying

Left 2 + Right 2
Left 3 + Right 3

Left 2 + Right 3
Left 3 + Right 2
Left 1 + Right 3
Left 3 + Right 1
Left 3 + Right 4

Left 4 + Right 3.
CQCC 8 Piin: There must be a blocking position on each side of the key and any combinations other
than those shown to not provide a positive block against core removal.

9.16.6.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Weak positions Determines which opposing positions, both with "4" cuts, will be
considered as a weak key.
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

Dealer cuts
You may select a key section and the dealer cut values and click Add to add the combination to the list.
You may make dealer cut values for each key section.
The dealer cut values are used when generating a TMK value for a new system.
For traditional Bilock, your dealer cut will consist of 2 values and the remainder are left as "x".
For Bilock CQCC this may be used also, by specifying dealer cut(s) where you want fixed values that will not
240
be coded that you may keep for the QCC key. See Product description for information about CQCC
positions.

9.16.6.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. The TMK value is checked to
ensure it matches your dealer pins (if defined).

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 243

9.16.6.4 Coding
CQCC Control key

When coding CQCC, it is important to assign the control key first. If you don't then the operating keys will
show up as phantoms for the cylinder removal because the resultant coding will use pins with only deep
holes.
240
Read the CQCC information here: Product description

9.16.7 ALC Galaxy

9.16.7.1 Product description
This design module is called ALC Galaxy.

This design module implements Galaxy Platinum.

TMK values are user entered/generated.
Control key values are user entered.
Single or dual key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.
Each key is handed (Left, centre or right) and has 5 cut values for the 5 fins on the key.
Too many times we have seen systems where the control key is designated as a master key and is
assigned as the key above the TMK. This is wrong, so don't listen to anyone saying this. The control
key should have the TMK as its key above (unless the system is more complex, having multiple
branches with multiple control keys)

9.16.7.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

9.16.7.3 Creating and modifying the system design

Control key
A Control code must be entered before a TMK may be generated.
TMK
The handing must be chosen before you click Create TMK.
Code progressions
The handing must be selected for each code progression.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 244 ProMaster Master Keying

9.16.7.4 Coding
Enter code

If you manually enter a code for a key, is uses the handing of the current code progression.
Control key
The control key code is assigned by selecting the control key and clicking Enter code. The code offered will
be the control code value specified in the system design, and you must choose the key section.
Assign the control key before other keys.

9.16.8 Assa Abloy KeyUltra

9.16.8.1 Product description
This design module is called Assa Abloy KeyUltra.
This design module implements the Assa Abloy UK KeyUltra product.
TMK values are user entered/generated.
Single or no key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Construction keying is supported - lost ball.

The key used depths 1 to 9, and B,C,D,E,F,G,H,J. The letter cuts correspond to depths 2 through 9 (there is
no letter cut the depth of a "1" cut). Letter cuts are wider and slot cut inside the flat of the cut, and use a
special pin "DuraPIN".
Each position in a code progression specifies if the TMK letter cut is to be used (and not progressed) of if a
number cut is to be used.

9.16.8.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 245

233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow ramp down Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Use anti-bump pins Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Anti-bump pin type Controls the gerneration of anti-bump pins.
Options are "Old" with "G" top pin and "New" with "M" and "N" bottom
pins.
233
Depth step for design assistant See Common system type parameters

9.16.8.3 Creating and modifying the system design

See System design 171
for general information.
Code progression letter cuts
Each code progression defines, in addition to the standard rules, a letter progression rule.
· In any position where the TMK is numeric, Letter cuts must contain the value N.

· In any position where the TMK is progressed, Letter cuts must contain the value N.

· In any position where the TMK is a letter, and it is not progressed, then normally the corresponding position
in Letter cuts will be L, however you may make it N so that the corresponding number cut is used in the
code progression.
Use anti-bump pins
When turned on, checking will take place during the system design to ensure that the use of anti-bump pins
may be possible.
Anti-bump will then be used in any cylinder where the use is possible and will always be placed as far back in
the cylinder as possible.

9.16.8.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.9 Assa Abloy Perk

9.16.9.1 Product description
This design module is called Assa Abloy Perk.
This design module implements the Assa Abloy UK Perk product. The product is released under other names
by other Assa Abloy companies.
TMK values are user entered/generated.
Single key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 246 ProMaster Master Keying

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

Construction keying is supported - lost ball.

The key used depths 1 to 7 on the first axis and 0/1 depths on the 2 profile pin axes.
There are particular values permitted for the profile pins and when used will be allocated to you by the lock
manufacturer. Your profile pins will match the pre-cut on the key blanks.
The minimum master pin available is "2", and "3" is the minimum wafer size allowed in position 6.

9.16.9.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Default top/side profile cuts The default value that will be used when generating the TMK.
This should be set to match the dealer assigned to you.

9.16.9.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, the profile pins must match your allocated dealer pin values, of be "00000-
000000" for for a system not using profile pins.

9.16.9.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.10 Assa Abloy Union

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 247

9.16.10.1 Product description

This design module is called Assa Abloy Union.

This design module implements the Assa Abloy Union product.

TMK values are user entered/generated.
Single or no key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Construction keying is supported - lost ball.

The key used depths 1 to 6, and A to F. Letter cuts are wider and dimple cut inside the flat of the cut, and
use a special pin.
Each position in a code progression specifies if the TMK letter cut is to be used (and not progressed) of if a
number cut is to be used.

9.16.10.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
233
Depth step for design assistant See Common system type parameters

9.16.10.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
Code progression letter cuts

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 248 ProMaster Master Keying

Each code progression defines, in addition to the standard rules, a letter progression rule.
· In any position where the TMK is numeric, Letter cuts must contain the value N.

· In any position where the TMK is progressed, Letter cuts must contain the value N.

· In any position where the TMK is a letter, and it is not progressed, then normally the corresponding position
in Letter cuts will be L, however you may make it N so that the corresponding number cut is used in the
code progression.

9.16.10.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.11 Assa USA

9.16.11.1 Product description
This design module is called Assa USA.
This design module implements Assa USA cylider types (Conventional, various LFIC, CAM, SFIC and Cliq).
TMK values are user entered/generated.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed. Cliq key sections are
supported.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip or tip to head depending on the choice you make in
the system type setup.
Assa convention is tip to head. For this design module the default setting is tip to head and it is
recommended tat you do not change this.

The data is always stored internally as head to tip. If you change the presentation direction in the
system type, it affects everywhere the key code and pinning is displayed. Changing the presentation in
the system type does not alter your data. However you must be certain to observe the presentation
direction and enter/read codes correctly. If you enter data in the reverse order then it is wrong, and
always be wrong. Entering data in the wrong order will result in incorrect calculations for deepest first
cut, ramp up, ramp down and some core removal calculations.
The depth symbols permitted are standard Assa UA depths (9 shallow to 1 deep).

9.16.11.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 249

Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Disallow ramp up Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow ramp down Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Display codes TIP -> HEAD Assa convention is tip to head. For this design module the default setting
is tip to head and it is recommended tat you do not change this.

Internally all codes for this design module are calculated and stored head
to tip. If you want the codes and pinning to display tip to head, turn this
displayed, Etc.
The setting for this option is shown on screen, on printouts Etc, so you
can seeoption on. It does not change any data, only the presentation of
data when printed, the order that the data is being presented.
233
Depth step for design assistant See Common system type parameters

9.16.11.3 Creating and modifying the system type

171
See System design for general information.

Cylinder types
When you first create a design, ProMaster Master Keying calculates the cylinder types used in the system and
sets the Cylinder types flags accordingly.
These flags are used to calculate the TMK and also for code progressions. If you want to ensure a system
design that allows for other cylinder types to be added you can change these flags before creating your TMK
and code progression.

9.16.11.4 Coding
Consideration must be given to the cylider types operated by each key and the rules of each cylinder type.

9.16.12 Chubb Detainer

9.16.12.1 Product description
This design module is called Chubb Detainer.
This design module implements the Chubb Detainer 3G110 product (old and new).

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 250 ProMaster Master Keying

TMK values are user entered/generated.

Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed, but this will never be used.

The key used depths 1 to 9.

There are 9 cuts on the key and 5 detainers in the lock. On screen the key code is shown as 5 cuts and on
manufacturing outputs the code is presented palindromically.
Various rules are applied to key codes according to manufacturer specifications.

9.16.12.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.

System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

9.16.12.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
There are no special considerations for the system design other than the appropriate rules.

9.16.12.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.13 EVVA 3KS/4KS

9.16.13.1 Product description
General
This design module is called EVVA 3KS/4KS.
This design module implements lock systems as listed below.
TMK values are user entered or may be generated by ProMaster Master Keying.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 251

Key head colours and special pinning is supported.

Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

Pinning charts are presented in the order required cylinder assembly (i.e. The single and double track sliders
are interwoven).
Pinning charts show the slider numbers and orientation.
Coding may be performed on the single track and double track. If you are in a market where the double track
is factory cut, be sure to set it to your dealer permutation and to not code on it.
Lock systems
The following lock systems are implemented:
· EVVA 3KS 0.5mm

· EVVA 3KS Plus 0.5mm

· EVVA 4KS 0.5mm

Sliders
Type 1 sliders
Usage: 3KS single track positions 1..6, 3KS plus single track positions 1..6, 4KS single track positions 1..5

Name Operates cuts orientation A Operates cuts orientation B

11 1 9
12 2 8
13 3 7
14 4 6
15 5
30 13 79
31 15 59
32 35 57
33 17 39
34 37
36 24 68
37 26 48
38 46
39 28
50 135 579
51 137 379
52 157 359
53 357
54 159
56 246 468
57 248 268
70 1357 3579
71 1359 1579

© 2019 WH Software Limited

252 ProMaster Master Keying

76 2468
90 13579

Type 2 sliders
Usage: 3KS double track positions 1..6, 3KS plus double track positions 1..5, 4KS double track positions 1..5

Name Operates cuts orientation A Operates cuts orientation B

21 1 7
22 2 6
23 3 5
24 4
40 13 57
41 15 37
42 35
43 17
46 24 46
47 26
60 135 357
61 137 157
66 246
80 1357

Type 3 sliders
Usage: 3KS plus double track position 6
Note: These are sometimes referred to C and D orientation

Name Operates cuts orientation A Operates cuts orientation B

25 1 4
26 2 3

Type 4 sliders
Usage: 4KS single track position 6

Name Operates cuts orientation G Operates cuts orientation H

12 2 8
13 3 7
14 4 6
15 5
32 35 57
34 37
36 24 68
37 26 48
38 46
39 28
53 357

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 253

56 246 468
57 248 268
76 2468

9.16.13.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum different cuts (Axis 1) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation (Axis 1) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent (Axis 1) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Maximum alike total (Axis 1) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts (Axis 2) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation (Axis 2) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent (Axis 2) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total (Axis 2) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

Axis 2 cuts
Allows you to define values that will always be used for axis 2 when generating a TMK.
This is useful if you cut only axis 1 and your keys are pre-cut on axis 2.
You may select a key section and the cut values and click Add to add the combination to the list.
You may make axis 2 cut values for each key section.
The axis 2 cut values are used when generating a TMK value for a new system.

9.16.13.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
Depth steps
Unless you are creating a keyed to differ system, depths steps must be 2 so key codes align with the available
sliders.
Precut Axis 2 (Double track)

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 254 ProMaster Master Keying

The default value for Axis 2 cuts may be defined for each key section in the system type setup (See System
type setup 253 ). You may use any value for Axis 2, however as only Axis 1 is cut on your key cutting machine,
any Axis 2 value that differs from the keys you stock will require ordering additional stock.
If you order key blanks without axis 2 precut, then treate axis 2 like axis1 and code as you please.

9.16.13.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.14 EVVA DPE/DPS/EPS

9.16.14.1 Product description
General

This design module is called EVVA DPE (Australia DPS, EPS).

This design module implements lock systems DPE, Australia DPS, EPS.
TMK values are user entered or may be generated by ProMaster Master Keying.
Key head colours and special pinning is supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Pinning charts show the slider numbers.

9.16.14.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest last cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 255

Disallow ramp up Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Disallow ramp down Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
233
Depth step for design assistant - See Common system type parameters
hierarchy keys
233
Depth step for design assistant - See Common system type parameters
selective keys

9.16.14.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
There are no special considerations for the system design other than the appropriate rules.

9.16.14.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.15 Inline
9.16.15.1 Product description
This design module is called Inline.
This design module implements the a wide variety of flat key products, and a few special lock systems.
TMK values are user entered/generated.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

Construction keying is supported - lost ball and half key.
The depth symbols permitted are determined by the depth/space card chosen when creating the system type.

9.16.15.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 256 ProMaster Master Keying

233
system type parameters
Deepest last cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow ramp up Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow ramp down Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum wafer size The depth step of the smallest master pin.
Differ from TMK less < minimum If this option is on, and a code differs from the TMK by less than the
is bad code Minimum wafer size then is is marks as a bad code. If this option is off
then Minimum wafer size is not considered when calculating the bad
code reason for a key.
233
Depth step for design assistant See Common system type parameters

Bottom pin names

This is seldom required. If it is not required then don't put in any values. This allows you to alter the name
for each size bottom pin when it is output to pinning charts, on-screen pinning, Etc..
Wafer names
This is seldom required. If it is not required then don't put in any values. This allows you to alter the name
for each size master pin when it is output to pinning charts, on-screen pinning, Etc.
If you make a mistake in the bottom pin names or the wafer names, your pinning chart will display
incorrectly, the product you assemble will be wrong, Etc. Check carefully before making any changes
to pin names.

9.16.15.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.

9.16.15.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.16 Interchangeable Core

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 257

9.16.16.1 Product description

This design module is called Interchangeable core.

This design module implements a wide variety of flat key products with SFIC and LFIC cylinders.
TMK values are user entered/generated.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip or tip to head depending on the choice you make in
the system type setup.

The data is always stored internally as head to tip. If you change the presentation direction in the
system type, it affects everywhere the key code and pinning is displayed. Changing the presentation in
the system type does not alter your data. However you must be certain to observe the presentation
direction and enter/read codes correctly. If you enter data in the reverse order then it is wrong, and
always will be wrong. Entering data in the wrong order will result in incorrect calculations for deepest
first cut, ramp up, ramp down and some core removal calculations.
The depth symbols permitted are determined by the depth/space card chosen when creating the system type.

9.16.16.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow ramp up Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow ramp down Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 258 ProMaster Master Keying

Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Display codes TIP -> HEAD Internally all codes for this design module are calculated and stored head
to tip. If you want the codes and pinning to display tip to head, turn this
option on. It does not change any data, only the presentation of data
when printed, displayed, Etc.
The setting for this option is shown on screen, on printouts Etc, so you
can see the order that the data is being presented.

Note that if you have entered codes in the wrong manner, then
changing this won't actually fix your data, simply reverse its
display.

Conventional cylinder stack This is the stack height used for any keys that are not operated by a
height control key.
Available on some lock systems supported by this design module - others
the value is fixed according to the lock system.
This is not used by the 4 Kaba Peaks locks systems - they use the core
type on the cylinder to determine the stack height.
233
Depth step for design assistant See Common system type parameters

9.16.16.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.

9.16.16.4 Coding
Consideration must be given to the rules of the lock system being used.
Notes for Kaba Peaks
The 4 Kaba Peaks lock systems require that the correct cylinders are used. On cylinders the core type should
be set to the appropriate core type. This controls the core removal ability (SFIC, LFIC) as well as the stack
heights and split driver pins.

9.16.17 Kaba ACE

9.16.17.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Kaba ACE.
This design module implements the Kaba ACE lock system.
TMK values are selected from a list provided by the lock manufacturer. Make an appropriate selection from
that list for the size of your system. The lists are imported from a file provided to you. See Managing Kaba
ACE lists 96 .
Key head colours are supported.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
All 4 rotor-stators (BP1 to BP4) may be used as allowed by the list you select.
The blockcode cuts are in positions L5S and R11S and those positions are unavailable for coding.
Key codes are shown in the order: L5S, L6S, EVEN, ODD, R5S, R6S
Each door (rotor stator) has 3 positions, and each must be coded on the keys that operate the door.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 259

Pinning charts are presented in the order required for the rotor-stator loading machine.
Pinning charts show the location for mushroom/hardened pins and Titlis springs. Where blind pins are
required, these are shown by the symbol B. Where blind pins are not required, these are shown as a dash.
Rotor Stator Charts

Rotor Stator Pos 1 Pos 2 Pos 3

LOD L5S ODD L6S
ROD R6S ODD R5S
LE L5S EVEN L6S
RE R6S EVEN R5S

9.16.17.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults
There are no options required for this design module.

9.16.17.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
Select a list from the available ones. Consider the capacity of the list to ensure it has sufficient capacity for
now and the future but is not wasteful.
If you have a system that is keyed-to-differ and you want to use multiple serial permutations from the list,
click the KD System button instead of selecting the TMK list.
The available rotors are shown.
Calculator
A calculator is provided to assist in determining the outcome for any combination progressed and rotated
positions. The calculator does not change your code progression (when using the coding tree), but can be
used to help you understand the possible outcomes.
Code progression
Code progression is not required for using the coding grid, but is for using the coding tree.
The Mode specifies how a position is treated
0 = No special mode, the position may have a designation
X = The position is to be blank. If a position is blank then the whole segment must be blank. That segment
of the code is not generated in the code progression.
3/4 = Force the position to be progressed to a 3/4. This is for advanced coding only.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 260 ProMaster Master Keying

The Designation can be set for any suitable positions where the mode is "0". With Kaba coding you need to
specify which chambers to use for each designation and also the number of positions to rotate across. E.g. To
progress 3 positions over 7 for change keys, the following designations would be used ccccCCC.
On each key axis (A, B and C) you may progress only the left or the right segment. It is not possible to make a
cylinder that used left and right (or even and odd) in the same axis, so such a code progression would not
make sense.
About KD Systems
KD systems contain multiple keys which are never operating the same door. Or put another way, each door
mush have only one key operating it. The coding of these systems requires you to choose that is a KD
system, then in the coding there is an option that (a) Assignes serial perm codes to the keys and (b) changes
the key number of each key to the Kaba system number associated with that serial perm code.
When you make a Keyed-to-differ system by clicking the KD System button when creating the design then
the behaviour of the coding changes.
· It is not possible to create a code progression.

· The coding tree does not show any values.

· The coding grid is disabled.

· Functionality to enter codes manually, remove codes and remove unordered codes are not available.

· There is a new option in each coding screen on the pop-up menu from the list of keys. This option is called
260
Assign serial perm codes and Kaba system number. See Coding for more information.

9.16.17.4 Coding
188
For general information about the coding grid see Coding using the kaba coding grid .
Rotor selection
Whenever possible, ProMaster Master Keying will determine the correct rotor automatically.
If the coding is wrong, no rotor will be possible.

If the combination of keys produces multiple rotor possibilities, you will be asked to make a rotor selection for
those doors.
Each door is shown, and for each segment the following apply:
Yellow key = the segment is used on all keys and is the same on each.
Purple key = the segment is used on all keys and is not the same on each, because there is variation in the
coding.
To the right is the rotor currently assigned to the door. If a previously assigned rotor is no longer suitable
then it will be removed.
At the top of the screen are a series of buttons, named after the rotors (and they show you which segments
of the code are used). Any rotors that are not suitable for the selected door are disabled. Click on the rotor
that you want for the door.
The bottom of the screen shows the keys that operate the selected door.
After you click OK, the calculation will continue with the rotors that you selected.
Coding KD systems
259
See Creating and modifying the system design for an overview of hos KD systems are created.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 261

The only functionality available within the coding windows for KD systems is the right-click pop-up menu
option on the list of keys called Assign serial perm codes and Kaba system number.

When you add keys to a KD system, the naming of the keys is not important as the key number is
altered during the coding process to match the Kaba serial number associated with the code that is
assigned to each key,
Do not attempt to assign real Kaba serial numbers to keys when you create them. Thses will not be
used when coding is performed and may result in a naming conflict.
In either coding window, perform the KD system coding by choosing the option described above. This is what
happens:
· For each key that not coded, ProMaster Master Keying gets an unused serial permutation and assigns it to
the key, and changes the key number to the corresponding Kaba serial number.
· The currently selected colour is assigned to keys during coding - ensure you choose the colour you want
prior to choosing to assign serial perm codes.
· The pinning is calculated.

· The serial perm list value that was assigned is marked as used.

If you remove a key that has been coded, or remove the coding for a coded system, the allocated
serial perm codes are not released. See Managing Kaba ACE lists 96 for the procedure to retrieve the
previously-allocated codes and make them available again.

9.16.18 Kaba experT

9.16.18.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Kaba Expert.
This design module implements the Kaba Expert lock system.
TMK values are user entered and you must select them from the list provided to you as a Kaba Expert dealer
and make an appropriate selection from that list for the size of your system.

Key head colours are supported.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
All 16 rotor-stators (E01 to E16) may be used but you should comply with information with the TMK about
which rotor-stators are permitted.
The dealer pre-cuts occupy L6S and R5S and those positions are unavailable for coding.
Key codes are shown in the order: L5S, L6S, L5C, L6C, R5S, R6S, R5C, R6C
Each door (rotor stator) has 4 positions, and each must be coded on the keys that operate the door.
Pinning charts are presented in the order required for the rotor-stator loading machine.
Pinning charts show the location for hardened pins. Where blind pins are required, these are shown by the
symbol B. Where blind pins are not required, these are shown as a dash.
Control keys are allowed. Control keys may not be ordered on the same job as other keys. Cutting the
control key is not possible on standard key cutting machines, including the manual machine.
Rotor Stator Charts

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 262 ProMaster Master Keying

Rotor Stator Pos 1 Pos 2 Pos 3 Pos 4

E01 L5S L6S L5C L6C
E02 R6S L6S L5C R5C
E03 R6S R5S R6C R5C
E04 L5S R5S R6C L6C
E05 L5S L6S L5C R5C
E06 R6S L6S L5C L6C
E07 L5S R5S R6C R5C
E08 R6S R5S R6C L6C
E09 L5S L6S R6C L6C
E10 R6S L6S R6C R5C
E11 L5S R5S L5C R5C
E12 R6S R5S L5C L6C
E13 L5S L6S R6C R5C
E14 R6S L6S R6C L6C
E15 L5S R5S L5C L6C
E16 R6S R5S L5C R5C

9.16.18.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults
Two fields (L6S and R5S) allow you to enter your dealer cuts. They are used when creating a system design
to automatically complete those fields in the TMK.

9.16.18.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
Enter a TMK from your Kaba book of permitted TMK values and mark the code as used in your book.
Dealer pins
262
The TMK is checked to verify its compliance with your dealer pins (See System type setup ).
Factory system
If you specify that the system is a factory system, then coding is allowed through the dealer pins. Don't do
this unless it is supplied by a Kaba factory and progresses through the dealer positions.
Calculator
A calculator is provided to assist in determining the outcome for any combination progressed and rotated
positions. The calculator does not change your code progression (when using the coding tree), but can be
used to help you understand the possible outcomes.
Code progression

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 263

Code progression is not required for using the coding grid, but is for using the coding tree.
The Mode specifies how a position is treated

0 = No special mode, the position may have a designation

X = The position is to be blank. If a position is blank then the whole segment must be blank. That segment
of the code is not generated in the code progression.
4 = Force the position to be progressed to a 4. This is for advanced coding only.
The Designation can be set for any suitable positions where the mode is "0". With Kaba coding you need to
specify which chambers to use for each designation and also the number of positions to rotate across. E.g. To
progress 3 positions over 7 for change keys, the following designations would be used ccccCCC.
On each key axis (A, B, C and D) you may progress only the left or the right segment. It is not possible to
make a cylinder that used left and right in the same axis, so such a code progression would not make sense.

9.16.18.4 Coding
188
For general information about the coding grid see Coding using the kaba coding grid .
Rotor selection
Whenever possible, ProMaster Master Keying will determine the correct rotor automatically.
If the coding is wrong, no rotor will be possible.
If the combination of keys produces multiple rotor possibilities, you will be asked to make a rotor selection for
those doors.
Each door is shown, and for each segment the following apply:

Yellow key = the segment is used on all keys and is the same on each.
Purple key = the segment is used on all keys and is not the same on each, because there is variation in the
coding.
To the right is the rotor currently assigned to the door. If a previously assigned rotor is no longer suitable
then it will be removed.
At the top of the screen are a series of buttons, named after the rotors (and they show you which segments
of the code are used). Any rotors that are not suitable for the selected door are disabled. Click on the rotor
that you want for the door.
The bottom of the screen shows the keys that operate the selected door.
After you click OK, the calculation will continue with the rotors that you selected.

9.16.19 Kaba experT Plus

9.16.19.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Kaba Expert Plus.
This design module implements the Kaba Expert Plus lock system.
TMK values are selected from a list provided by the lock manufacturer. Make an appropriate selection from
that list for the size of your system. The lists are imported from a file provided to you. See Managing Kaba
Expert Plus lists 96 .

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 264 ProMaster Master Keying

Key head colours are supported.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

All 16 rotor-stators (P21 to P36) may be used as allowed by the list you select.
The dealer pre-cuts occupy L5S and R6S and those positions are unavailable for coding.
Key codes are shown in the order: L5S, L6S, L5C, L6C, R5S, R6S, R5C, R6C
Each door (rotor stator) has 4 positions, and each must be coded on the keys that operate the door.
Pinning charts are presented in the order required for the rotor-stator loading machine.

Pinning charts show the location for hardened pins. Where blind pins are required, these are shown by the
symbol B. Where blind pins are not required, these are shown as a dash.
Control keys are allowed. Control keys may not be ordered on the same job as other keys. Cutting the
control key is not possible on standard key cutting machines, including the manual machine.
Rotor Stator Charts

Rotor Stator Pos 1 Pos 2 Pos 3 Pos 4

P21 L5S L6S L5C L6C
P22 R6S R5S R6C R5C
P23 R6S L6S R6C R5C
P24 L5S R5S L5C L6C
P25 L5S L6S R6C L6C
P26 R6S R5S L5C R5C
P27 R6S L6S L5C R5C
P28 L5S R5S R6C L6C
P29 L5S L6S R6C R5C
P30 R6S R5S L5C L6C
P31 R6S L6S L5C L6C
P32 L5S R5S R6C R5C
P33 L5S L6S L5C R5C
P34 R6S R5S R6C L6C
P35 R6S L6S R6C L6C
P36 L5S R5S L5C R5C

9.16.19.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults
There are no options required for this design module.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 265

9.16.19.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.

TMK
Select a list from the available ones. Consider the capacity of the list to ensure it has sufficient capacity for
now and the future but is not wasteful.
The available rotors are shown.
Calculator
A calculator is provided to assist in determining the outcome for any combination progressed and rotated
positions. The calculator does not change your code progression (when using the coding tree), but can be
used to help you understand the possible outcomes.
Code progression
Code progression is not required for using the coding grid, but is for using the coding tree.
The Mode specifies how a position is treated
0 = No special mode, the position may have a designation
X = The position is to be blank. If a position is blank then the whole segment must be blank. That segment
of the code is not generated in the code progression.
4 = Force the position to be progressed to a 4. This is for advanced coding only.
The Designation can be set for any suitable positions where the mode is "0". With Kaba coding you need to
specify which chambers to use for each designation and also the number of positions to rotate across. E.g. To
progress 3 positions over 7 for change keys, the following designations would be used ccccCCC.
On each key axis (A, B, C and D) you may progress only the left or the right segment. It is not possible to
make a cylinder that used left and right in the same axis, so such a code progression would not make sense.

9.16.19.4 Coding
188
For general information about the coding grid see Coding using the kaba coding grid .
Rotor selection
Whenever possible, ProMaster Master Keying will determine the correct rotor automatically.
If the coding is wrong, no rotor will be possible.
If the combination of keys produces multiple rotor possibilities, you will be asked to make a rotor selection for
those doors.
Each door is shown, and for each segment the following apply:
Yellow key = the segment is used on all keys and is the same on each.
Purple key = the segment is used on all keys and is not the same on each, because there is variation in the
coding.
To the right is the rotor currently assigned to the door. If a previously assigned rotor is no longer suitable
then it will be removed.
At the top of the screen are a series of buttons, named after the rotors (and they show you which segments
of the code are used). Any rotors that are not suitable for the selected door are disabled. Click on the rotor
that you want for the door.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 266 ProMaster Master Keying

The bottom of the screen shows the keys that operate the selected door.
After you click OK, the calculation will continue with the rotors that you selected.

9.16.20 Kaba Gemini

9.16.20.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Kaba Gemini.
This design module implements the Kaba Gemini lock system.

TMK values are user entered.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Key codes are shown in the order: L5S, L6S, EVEN, ODD, R5S, R6S
Each door (rotor stator) has 3 positions, and each must be coded on the keys that operate the door.
Pinning charts are presented in the order required for the rotor-stator loading machine.
Rotor Stator Charts

Rotor Stator Pos 1 Pos 2 Pos 3

GA L6S EVEN L5S
GB R5S EVEN R6S
GC L6S ODD L5S
GD R5S ODD R6S
GL L6S EVEN R6S

9.16.20.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults
There are no options required for this design module.

9.16.20.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
Enter a TMK from your Kaba book of permitted TMK values and mark the code as used in your book.
Calculator
A calculator is provided to assist in determining the outcome for any combination progressed and rotated
positions. The calculator does not change your code progression (when using the coding tree), but can be
used to help you understand the possible outcomes.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 267

Code progression
Code progression is not required for using the coding grid, but is for using the coding tree.

The Mode specifies how a position is treated

0 = No special mode, the position may have a designation
X = The position is to be blank. If a position is blank then the whole segment must be blank. That segment
of the code is not generated in the code progression.
3/4 = Force the position to be progressed to a 3/4. This is for advanced coding only.

The Designation can be set for any suitable positions where the mode is "0". With Kaba coding you need to
specify which chambers to use for each designation and also the number of positions to rotate across. E.g. To
progress 3 positions over 7 for change keys, the following designations would be used ccccCCC.
On each key axis (A, B and C) you may progress only the left or the right segment. It is not possible to make a
cylinder that used left and right (or even and odd) in the same axis, so such a code progression would not
make sense.

9.16.20.4 Coding
188
For general information about the coding grid see Coding using the kaba coding grid .
Rotor selection
Whenever possible, ProMaster Master Keying will determine the correct rotor automatically.
If the coding is wrong, no rotor will be possible.
If the combination of keys produces multiple rotor possibilities, you will be asked to make a rotor selection for
those doors.
Each door is shown, and for each segment the following apply:

Yellow key = the segment is used on all keys and is the same on each.
Purple key = the segment is used on all keys and is not the same on each, because there is variation in the
coding.
To the right is the rotor currently assigned to the door. If a previously assigned rotor is no longer suitable
then it will be removed.
At the top of the screen are a series of buttons, named after the rotors (and they show you which segments
of the code are used). Any rotors that are not suitable for the selected door are disabled. Click on the rotor
that you want for the door.
The bottom of the screen shows the keys that operate the selected door.
After you click OK, the calculation will continue with the rotors that you selected.

9.16.21 Kaba Quattro

9.16.21.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Kaba Quattro.
This design module implements the Kaba Quattro lock system.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 268 ProMaster Master Keying

TMK values are user entered and you must select them from the list provided to you as a Kaba Quattro dealer
and make an appropriate selection from that list for the size of your system.

Key head colours are supported.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
All 14 rotor-stators may be used but you should comply with information with the TMK about which rotor-
stators are permitted.
The dealer pre-cuts occupy L5C and R6C and those positions are unavailable for coding.

Key codes are shown in the order: L5S, L6S, L5C, L6C, R5S, R6S, R5C, R6C
Each door (rotor stator) has 4 positions, and each must be coded on the keys that operate the door.
Pinning charts are presented in the order required for the rotor-stator loading machine.
Pinning charts show the location for hardened pins. Where blind pins are required, these are shown by the
symbol B. Where blind pins are not required, these are shown as a dash.
Rotor Stator Charts

Rotor Stator Pos 1 Pos 2 Pos 3 Pos 4

QA L5S L6S L5C L6C
QB R6S R5S L5C L6C
QC L5S L6S L5C R5C
QD R6S R5S L5C R5C
QE R6S R5S R6C R5C
QF L5S L6S R6C R5C
QG L5S L6S R6C L6C
QH R6S R5S R6C L6C
QJ L5S R5S L5C L6C
QK R6S L6S L5C L6C
QL L5S R5S R6C R5C
QM L5S R5S L5C R5C
QN R6S L6S R6C L6C
QR R6S L6S L5C R5C

9.16.21.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults
Two fields (L5C and R6C) allow you to enter your dealer cuts. They are used when creating a system design
to automatically complete those fields in the TMK.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 269

9.16.21.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.

TMK
Enter a TMK from your Kaba book of permitted TMK values and mark the code as used in your book.
Dealer pins
262
The TMK is checked to verify its compliance with your dealer pins (See System type setup ).
Factory system
If you specify that the system is a factory system, then coding is allowed through the dealer pins. Don't do
this unless it is supplied by a Kaba factory and progresses through the dealer positions.
Calculator
A calculator is provided to assist in determining the outcome for any combination progressed and rotated
positions. The calculator does not change your code progression (when using the coding tree), but can be
used to help you understand the possible outcomes.
Code progression
Code progression is not required for using the coding grid, but is for using the coding tree.
The Mode specifies how a position is treated
0 = No special mode, the position may have a designation
X = The position is to be blank. If a position is blank then the whole segment must be blank. That segment
of the code is not generated in the code progression.
3/4 = Force the position to be progressed to a 3/4. This is for advanced coding only.
The Designation can be set for any suitable positions where the mode is "0". With Kaba coding you need to
specify which chambers to use for each designation and also the number of positions to rotate across. E.g. To
progress 3 positions over 7 for change keys, the following designations would be used ccccCCC.
On each key axis (A, B, C and D) you may progress only the left or the right segment. It is not possible to
make a cylinder that used left and right in the same axis, so such a code progression would not make sense.

9.16.21.4 Coding
188
For general information about the coding grid see Coding using the kaba coding grid .
Rotor selection
Whenever possible, ProMaster Master Keying will determine the correct rotor automatically.
If the coding is wrong, no rotor will be possible.
If the combination of keys produces multiple rotor possibilities, you will be asked to make a rotor selection for
those doors.
Each door is shown, and for each segment the following apply:
Yellow key = the segment is used on all keys and is the same on each.
Purple key = the segment is used on all keys and is not the same on each, because there is variation in the
coding.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 270 ProMaster Master Keying

To the right is the rotor currently assigned to the door. If a previously assigned rotor is no longer suitable
then it will be removed.

At the top of the screen are a series of buttons, named after the rotors (and they show you which segments
of the code are used). Any rotors that are not suitable for the selected door are disabled. Click on the rotor
that you want for the door.
The bottom of the screen shows the keys that operate the selected door.
After you click OK, the calculation will continue with the rotors that you selected.

9.16.22 Lockwood MT5/MT5+

9.16.22.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Lockwood MT5/MT5+.
This design module implements the Lockwood MT5 and Lockwood MT5+ lock systems.
TMK values are controlled by lists proved to you by the lock manufacturer.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

9.16.22.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Maximum alike adjacent Axis 1 only.
Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Axis 1 only.
Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Use pointed drivers (S1/S2) Replaces 1 or 2 "1+" master pins with an S1 or S2 driver instead of the
standard driver.
This option should remain on.
Turn it off only if you do not have S1/S2 drivers available, but note that
cylinders may manfunction with 1+ master pins so it is preferable to omit
the 1+ master pins where possible and use the pointed driver.
Maximum alike adjacent (Finger Lock system MT5+ only. Axis 2 only.
pins) Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total (Finger pins) Lock system MT5+ only. Axis 2 only.
Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 271

9.16.22.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK and List
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then select an appropriate list. After
selecting the list, click Create TMK to generate the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of
drop-down values.
Restrictions
Promote key section is not available for this design module.
Depth steps are not applicable to this design module as the manner in which progressions are generated are
carefully controlled to minimise cross keying issues. codes produced.

9.16.22.4 Coding
Enter code
If you manually enter a code for a key, it must comply with the list selected for the system design.
Special pinning
Positions allowed in special pinning are limited to those that may be progressed in the list selected for the
system design.
Driver pin calculation
The driver pin calculation uses the cylinder "core type" to determine the correct pin to use.

If the core type is neither "Lockwood MT5/MT5+ top pin 22" nor "Lockwood MT5/MT5+ top pin 29" then a
question mark is used inthe counter pin name to indacate that cylinders are not configured correctly.
Pointed drivers S1/S2
Pointed drivers S1 and S2 are used to replace a single 1+ or double 1+ master pins respectively.
Examples for 29 size cylinder:

Bottom pin Master pins Master Driver pin Notes

Original pins
Changed
Z+ 1+ S19 S1 driver pin replaces the 1+ master pin.
Z+ 1+1+ S29 S2 driver pin replaces two 1+ master pins.
Z+ 1+1+1+ 1+ S29 S2 driver pin replaces two 1+ master pins
First 1+ pin remains.
Z+ 1+2+ 1+2+ C29 Standard driver pin.
Cannot use S1 because 1+ pin is not by the driver pin.

9.16.23 Lockwood Twin

9.16.23.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Lockwood Twin.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 272 ProMaster Master Keying

This design module implements the Lockwood Twin lock system.

Key head colours are supported.

Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Construction keying is supported - lost ball and half key.

9.16.23.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.

System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

Dealer cuts
Allows you to define values that will always be used for the side cuts when generating a TMK.
You may select a key section and the cut values and click Add to add the combination to the list.
You may make side cut values for each key section.
The side cut values are used when generating a TMK value for a new system.

9.16.23.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. The side pins are set
automatically from your dealer cuts (if defined).

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 273

9.16.23.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.24 Medeco Biaxial 10

9.16.24.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Medeco Biaxial 10.
This design module implements the Medeco Biaxial 10 series lock system including M3 and M4.

Key head colours are supported.

Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Removable core is supported (Medeco, Schlage long key and Yale long key methods). Multiple methods may
be mixed in a single system.
Special pinning
Empty positions may be specified but it is not recommended.
Control keys
The correct configuration of core removal type on key sections and core type on cylinders is crucial for
correct pinning calculations and phantom calculations.
Failure to configure these values correctly will result in incorrect pinning being calculated.

Key sections
When configuring key sections, the core removal value for each key section must be set correctly. For
Medeco-style core removal, a standard key section is used, but for Schlage long key or Yale long key the key
sections for these must have their core removal type set (I.e. "Schlage long key" or "Yale long key").
Cylinders
When configuring cylinders that use either the Schlage or Yale method, the core type on the cylinder must
be set accordingly

9.16.24.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 274 ProMaster Master Keying

233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Relax MACS from 4332 to 4442 Determines the permitted maximum adjacent depths which are
determined from the forward or aft orientation of the adjacent cuts.
Use more restrictive factory rules Controls the combinations of double angles and adjacent angles that are
permitted. When turned on, there are fewer combinations that are
allowed. For locksmith generated systems this option would normally be
turned off.
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

Side cuts - M4 system types

Allows you to define values that will always be used for side cuts when generating a TMK.
You may select a key section and the side cut value and click Add to add the combination to the list.
You may make side cut values for each key section.
The side cut values are used when generating a TMK value for a new system.

9.16.24.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. You must choose the depth and
angle or double angle for each position. For M4 product you must select the side cuts.

Code progression
For each code progression, in each position, you choose the angle (assuming the corresponding TMK value
was a double angle otherwise there is only one choice) and also the progression type.
The progression type is either "D" for depth or "A" for angle and depth.
If the angle is a single angle, then the only possible choice for progression type is "D".
If the angle is a double angle, then you may choose "D" or "A".
Here's an example of how the progression is generated.
If TMK = 3KD and progression type "D", then values generated are 1KD, 2KD, 4KD, 5KD, 6KD
If TMK = 3KD and progression type "A", then values generated are 1K, 1D, 2K, 2D, 4K, 4D, 5K, 5D, 6K, 6D
So, in this example, the first progression is good for making masters with double angles, while the second
method produces 10 change keys in a single operation.
Code progression - M4
The sided cuts must be selected for each code progression. Normally this will be the same as the TMK side
cuts.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 275

KD System
If you want to make a keyed-to-differ system where all codes are entered manually, then after you click
Create TMK, click Make KD system.
A pseudo TMK is assigned, and no code progression is possible.
In this type of keyed-to-differ system, each key code must be entered manually and because it is not a
master-key hierarchy, you must ensure that the keying is correct. This is intended for storing codes for
Medeco padlocks etc. without making a separate system for each padlock.
KD System is not available on M4 product.

Restrictions
Depth steps are not applicable to this design module.

9.16.24.4 Coding
Control keys
If a control key is for Medeco style removal, then the key is assigned a normal key section and normal code.
If a control key is for Schlage or Yale long key removable core cylinders then you must choose the appropriate
key section for the key when assigning its code.

9.16.25 Medeco Biaxial 60

9.16.25.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Medeco Biaxial 60.
This design module implements the Medeco Biaxial 60 series lock system.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

Removable core is supported.
Special pinning
Empty positions may be specified.
Control keys
The control key is assigned a code that is 1 cut shorter than the operating codes.

9.16.25.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 276 ProMaster Master Keying

233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Use more restrictive factory rules Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Controls the combinations of double angles and adjacent angles that are
permitted. When turned on, there are fewer combinations that are
allowed. For locksmith generated systems this option would normally be
turned off.
Disallow code with all centre cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Determines if codes with all centre cuts are permitted.
Disallow progress to centre cut Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Determines if the TMK cut can be progressed to a centre cut or not.
Disallow bump codes Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Certain codes are known to be used for bumping locks. This option allows
those codes to be excluded.
Disallow stair codes Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Disallows codes that ramp from a deep cut at the key head to a shallow
cut at the key tip.
Disallow progress to defined TMK Default value applied when creating new system designs.
code Disallows generation of codes defined in the "Defined TMK codes"
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

Defined TMK codes

Allows you to define codes that are to be prohibited for codes derived from the TMK.
The reason for these codes to be excluded is that they are the best codes for generating large master key
systems and are kept for TMK codes.
If you wish to use this feature, ask the lock manufacturer for appropriate values.

9.16.25.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. You must choose the depth and
angle or double angle for each position.
Code progression
For each code progression, in each position, you choose the angle (assuming the corresponding TMK value
was a double angle otherwise there is only one choice). Normally this would be the same as the TMK angle.
KD System

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 277

If you want to make a keyed-to-differ system where all codes are entered manually, then after you click
Create TMK, click Make KD system.

A pseudo TMK is assigned, and no code progression is possible.

In this type of keyed-to-differ system, each key code must be entered manually and because it is not a
master-key hierarchy, you must ensure that the keying is correct. This is intended for storing codes for
Medeco padlocks etc. without making a separate system for each padlock
Restrictions
Depth steps are not applicable to this design module.

9.16.25.4 Coding
Control keys

Select the control key and click Enter code. The code entered is 1 position shorter than the TMK.

9.16.26 Medeco Original 10

9.16.26.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Medeco Original 10.
This design module implements the Medeco Original 10 series lock system.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Removable core is supported (Medeco, Schlage long key and Yale long key methods). Multiple methods may
be mixed in a single system.
Control keys
The correct configuration of core removal type on key sections and core type on cylinders is crucial for
correct pinning calculations and phantom calculations.
Failure to configure these values correctly will result in incorrect pinning being calculated.
Key sections
When configuring key sections, the core removal value for each key section must be set correctly. For
Medeco-style core removal, a standard key section is used, but for Schlage long key or Yale long key the key
sections for these must have their core removal type set (I.e. "Schlage long key" or "Yale long key").
Cylinders
When configuring cylinders that use either the Schlage or Yale method, the core type on the cylinder must
be set accordingly

9.16.26.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 278 ProMaster Master Keying

System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

9.16.26.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. You must choose the depth and
angle for each position.
Code progression
For each code progression, in each position, you choose the angle. It is hard to imagine why this would ever
be different from the corresponding TMK angle.

Restrictions
Depth steps are not applicable to this design module.

9.16.26.4 Coding
Control keys
If a control key is for Medeco style removal, then the key is assigned a normal key section and normal code.
If a control key is for Schlage or Yale long key removable core cylinders then you must choose the appropriate
key section for the key when assigning its code.

9.16.27 Medeco Original 60

9.16.27.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Medeco Original 60.
This design module implements the Medeco Originl 60 series lock system.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 279

Key head colours are supported.

Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.

Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

Removable core is supported.
Special pinning
Empty positions may be specified.
Control keys

The control key is assigned a code that is 1 cut shorter than the operating codes.

9.16.27.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

No of cuts The number of cuts on the key.
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Disallow code with all centre cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Determines if codes with all centre cuts are permitted.
Disallow bump codes Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Certain codes are known to be used for bumping locks. This option allows
those codes to be excluded.
Disallow stair codes Default value applied when creating new system designs.
Disallows codes that ramp from a deep cut at the key head to a shallow
cut at the key tip.
Disallow progress to defined TMK Default value applied when creating new system designs.
code Disallows generation of codes defined in the "Defined TMK codes"
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

Defined TMK codes

Allows you to define codes that are to be prohibited for codes derived from the TMK.
The reason for these codes to be excluded is that they are the best codes for generating large master key
systems and are kept for TMK codes.
If you wish to use this feature, ask the lock manufacturer for appropriate values.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 280 ProMaster Master Keying

9.16.27.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.

TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. You must choose the depth and
angle for each position.
Code progression
For each code progression, in each position, you choose the angle. It is hard to imagine why this would ever
be different from the corresponding TMK angle.

KD System
If you want to make a keyed-to-differ system where all codes are entered manually, then after you click
Create TMK, click Make KD system.
A pseudo TMK is assigned, and no code progression is possible.
In this type of keyed-to-differ system, each key code must be entered manually and because it is not a
master-key hierarchy, you must ensure that the keying is correct. This is intended for storing codes for
Medeco padlocks etc. without making a separate system for each padlock
Restrictions
Depth steps are not applicable to this design module.

9.16.27.4 Coding
Control keys
Select the control key and click Enter code. The code entered is 1 position shorter than the TMK.

9.16.28 MLA Binary Plus

9.16.28.1 Product description
General
This design module is called MLA Binary Plus.
This design module implements the Master Locksmiths Association Binary Plus lock system.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

9.16.28.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 281

Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest last cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

9.16.28.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
Code progression side pins
Each code progression defines, in addition to the standard rules, side pins.
The following values are allowed for side pins:
· S = Side pin

· T = Trap pin

· x = Neither side not trap pin.

9.16.28.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.29 MLA DC1

9.16.29.1 Product description
General
This design module is called MLA DC1.
This design module implements the Master Locksmiths Association DC1 lock system.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 282 ProMaster Master Keying

9.16.29.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.

System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Deepest last cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
system type parameters 233
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Has coloured key heads Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
233
Depth step for design assistant See Common system type parameters

9.16.29.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. You must choose the depth and
anti-bump for each position.
The following values are allowed for anti bump:
· X = Normal pin

· B = Anti-bump pin

· D = Deep pin

9.16.29.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 283

9.16.30 Mottura Champions

9.16.30.1 Product description
This design module is called Mottura Champions.
This design module implements the lock systems C10, C28, C9, C30, C31, C38, C39, C43, C49, CM7, CP3,
CP4, CP8.
TMK values are user entered/generated.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections and multiple keyways are allowed.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

Construction keying is supported - lost ball.

9.16.30.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults
Options available and the range of values for each option are determined by the lock system selected.

9.16.30.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.

9.16.30.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.30.5 Recognition codes

Recognition codes are assigned to doors, keys and the system upon manufacturing and according to the
naming convention and algorithm required by the manufacturer.
The highest used recognition code for each 6 character prefix is remembered. In the event that these need to
be modified then this functionality may be used.
Getting started
· You must be logged in with a system open.

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Mottura Champions recognition codes.

Making a change
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your recognition codes.

Notes
When you save a recognition code, the value is validated to ensure it meets the algorithm required by the
manufacturer.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 284 ProMaster Master Keying

9.16.31 Sargent DG2

9.16.31.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Sargent DG1.
This design module implements the Sargent DG2/DG3 lock systems.
Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.
Removable core is supported (Sargent methods).

9.16.31.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum depth Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Deepest first cut Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

9.16.31.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.
TMK
When creating the system design, you must first select the key section, then click Create TMK to generate
the TMK, or select the values you want on the TMK line of drop-down values. You must choose the depth and
angle for each position.
The 6th position (nearest the tip) uses a conical pin and the angle on this position must be "C".
Code progression
For each code progression, in each position, you choose the angle. It is hard to imagine why this would ever
be different from the corresponding TMK angle.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Using ProMaster Master Keying 285

Restrictions
Depth steps are not applicable to this design module.

9.16.31.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

9.16.32 Tokoz Pro

9.16.32.1 Product description
General
This design module is called Sargent Tokoz Pro.

This design module implements the Tokoz Pro lock system.

Key head colours are supported.
Key section families with multiple key sections are possible.
Key codes and cylinder pinning are presented head to tip.

9.16.32.2 System type setup

See System types 87 for general information about setting up system types. This topic covers values specific
to this design module.
System type defaults

Data field Description

Minimum different cuts Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Minimum total variation Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike adjacent Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Maximum alike total Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters
Safe from re-cutting Default value applied when creating new system designs. See Common
233
system type parameters

9.16.32.3 Creating and modifying the system design

171
See System design for general information.

9.16.32.4 Coding
There are no special considerations.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Appendix

Part

10
 288 ProMaster Master Keying

10 Appendix

10.1 Diagnostic functions

10.1.1 Diagnose database connection
If you are unable to connect to the ProMaster Master Keying database, you may gain some insight into the
problem by running the diagnose connection routines.
Getting started
On the main ProMaster Master Keying window, select the Environment you are unable to connect to.

· From the Tools menu, select the item Diagnose database connection

At the top your connection details are shown, so the first thing you should determine is if this information is
correct.
Running a test
To perform a test, first highlight the test that you want, then click the Test button. The results of the test are
displayed at the bottom of the window, and when a test is completed successfully the test is flagged with a
check mark.
The tests
Resolve host
This test takes the host name and resolves it to an IP Address. If the host name is already an IP Address (e.g.
127.0.0.1) then the Resolve host test will indicate that the host name does not need to be resolved. In all
other cases, the test should resolve the host name to the IP Address of the machine that is hosting the
database. If the name cannot be resolved, first check that the host name is correct, then address the name
resolution issue with your computer network support person.
Ping host
This test attempts to ping the host. While a successful outcome for this test is useful in knowing that
communication is possible, a failed test does not necessarily indicate a problem as the host machine may be
configured to not respond to ping requests, or another network appliance may be blocking the ping (ICMP)
requests.
Test port
This test attempts to open a socket on the host machine on the port specified in the Server name, or that
resolved from the service port name if a service port name was specified. This test must succeed otherwise
there is a problem. The success of this test does not however indicate that the Firebird database engine is the
process that responded to the test, and in rare cases the socket connection request may be answered by
another process that has hijacked the database port on the host machine.
Test database connection
This is the definitive test. If this test passes then ProMaster Master Keying should connect to the database,
whereas if this test fails then ProMaster Master Keying will fail to operate. Any error messages returned from
this test are indicators of the source of any problems.

10.1.2 Fixing internal numbering

Internally, ProMaster Master Keying tracks and identifies data in a way that is not visible to the user.
If the need arises during a technical support incident, you may be asked to perform the following operation.
Getting started

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 289

· You must be logged in as the admin user

· From the Tools menu, select Synchronize internal numbering

· Click the OK button to proceed.

The operation may take a small amount of time, dependent on the amount of data in your database.
Never run this process while other users are using ProMaster Master Keying. Run this process only if
you are asked to by WH Software Limited support staff.

10.2 File formats used by ProMaster Master Keying

This section gives an overview of the CSV file format and describes each of the CSV files that are used for
importing data.

10.2.1 CSV file format definition

Wherever data may be imported into ProMaster Master Keying from a Comma Separated File (CSV), the
contents expected within the file vary according to the type of data and that is discussed in the applicable
topic. This topic discusses the physical structure of a CSV file and therefore this section forms an integral part
of the learning for any CSV import.
File Format
The CSV file follows standard CSV file conventions with regard to its physical structure.
That is:
· Each line in the file contains a single record.

· Each line in the file is terminated by a Carriage Return and Line Feed pair of characters.

· Within each record (line) fields are delimited (separated) by using a single comma.

· A delimiting comma must not appear after the final field in each line.

· Each line must contain the same number of fields.

· Any field that contains a comma (,) or quotation mark (") must be quoted according to standard quoting
rules (The field is prefixed and suffixed with a quotation mark, and any quotation mark is repeated)
· Additionally, each line must contain the same number of fields as the first line of the file. Exercise caution
using programs like Excel that will modify a perfectly readable csv file and remove trailing delimiters
thereby making a different number of fields on each line. Before saving from Excel, the addition of a
column containing arbitrary data (e.g. a single letter) as the rightmost column avoids this problem in Excel
and when importing the data file into ProMaster Master Keying that rightmost column can be ignored just
like any other column that you do not require.
ProMaster Master Keying is Unicode capable and will detect the file format being imported if it includes
the standard preamble characters to designate the file as UTF-8, UTF-16BE or UTF16LE. If the
preamble characters are not present for one of these three formats then the data file will be treated as
an ASCII file.

ProMaster Master Keying exports CSV data in UTF-8 format (including the preamble) unless the export
is for a specific purpose where only ASCII would be possible.
File Names
CSV files should always be supplied with:

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 290 ProMaster Master Keying

· A file name that clearly describes the file contents

· The file extension being .csv

Headings
It is common when using CSV files for the first line in the file to contain field or column heading that describe
the data on the subsequent lines.
ProMaster Master Keying will accept a file with or without the first line containing headings, however it is
strongly recommended that the file does contain these headings as it effectively documents the data that is
contained within the file and also ProMaster Master Keying will read these headings to automatically
determine the contents of each field. This is particularly important as ProMaster Master Keying does not
mandate the order in which fields appear in the CSV file.
Omitting the headings means that the person importing the data into ProMaster Master Keying will do so with
less certainty about the fields being imported.

10.2.2 Global data file formats

10.2.2.1 Branch address import (CSV) file format
ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing branch address data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.

Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Name Character (100) Yes description Unique.
Contact Character (50) No contactname
Phone Character (20) No contactphone
Fax Character (20) No contactfax
Email Character (250) No contactemail
Postal address 1 Character (30) No postaladdress1
Postal address 2 Character (30) No postaladdress2
Postal address 3 Character (30) No postaladdress3
Postal address 4 Character (30) No postaladdress4
Postal city Character (30) No postalcity
Postal state Character (5) No postalstate
Postal post code Character (10) No postalpostcode

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 291

Postal country Character (30) No postalcountry

Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress1
1
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress2
2
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress3
3
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress4
4
Physical city Character (30) No physicalcity
Physical state Character (5) No physicalstate
Physical post
Character (10) No physicalpostcode
code
Physical country Character (30) No physicalcountry

10.2.2.2 Client import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing client data that is supplied in a comma separated
values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.

Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Name Character (200) Yes clientname Unique.
Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
'False', '0', 'N',
Active 'No' and True No isactive
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'
Code Character (20) No clientcode Unique if provided.
Description Character (100) No description
Contact Character (50) No contactname
Phone Character (20) No contactphone
Mobile Character (20) No contactmobile

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 292 ProMaster Master Keying

Fax Character (20) No contactfax

Email Character (250) No contactemail
Contact 2 Character (50) No contactname2
Phone 2 Character (20) No contactphone2
Mobile 2 Character (20) No contactmobile2
Fax 2 Character (20) No contactfax2
Email 2 Character (250) No contactemail2
Postal address 1 Character (30) No postaladdress1
Postal address 2 Character (30) No postaladdress2
Postal address 3 Character (30) No postaladdress3
Postal address 4 Character (30) No postaladdress4
Postal city Character (30) No postalcity
Postal state Character (5) No postalstate
Postal post code Character (10) No postalpostcode
Postal country Character (30) No postalcountry
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress1
1
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress2
2
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress3
3
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress4
4
Physical city Character (30) No physicalcity
Physical state Character (5) No physicalstate
Physical post
Character (10) No physicalpostcode
code
Physical country Character (30) No physicalcountry

10.2.2.3 Cylinder import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing cylinder data that is supplied in a comma separated
values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 293

The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30),
Part code Yes lockpartnumber Unique.
upper case
Item number Character (100) No itemnumber
Description Character (200) Yes description
Brand Character (100) Yes brand
Finish Character (100) No finish
Cylinder style Character (30) No cylinderstyle
C=Cylinder
Part type Character (1) Yes parttype
D=Double cylinder
0=Standard
1=Schlage long key
2= Yale long key
3=Bilock CQCC
4=Kwikset
5-Kaba Expert I/C
6=Kaba Peaks SFIC
7=Kaba Peaks LFIC
8=Kaba Peaks Mortice/Rim
9=Kaba Peaks Key-In-Knob
10=Assa Assa/Yale/CorbinRusswin LFIC
11=Assa Sargent LFIC
12=Assa Schlage LFIC
13=Assa CAM
14=Assa SFIC
Core type Numeric No ictype
15=Assa Standard CLIQ
16=Assa Assa/Yale/CorbinRusswin LFIC
CLIQ
17=Assa Sargent LFIC CLIQ
18=Assa Schlage LFIC CLIQ
19=Assa CAM CLIQ
20=Assa Directional CW
21=Assa Directional CC
22=Assa Directional WL (Limited rotation)
23=Assa Directional CL (Limited rotation)
24=Medeco KeyMark X4 12-Stack
25=Medeco KeyMark X4 19-Stack
26=Medeco KeyMark X4 17-Stack
27=Lockwood MT5/MT5+ top pin 22
28=Lockwood MT5/MT5+ top pin 29
Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
'False', '0', 'N',
Uses axis 1 'No' and True No usesaxis1
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'
Boolean, see
Uses axis 2 No usesaxis2
above.
Boolean, see
Uses axis 3 No usesaxis3
above.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 294 ProMaster Master Keying

Boolean, see
Uses axis 4 No usesaxis4
above.
Boolean, see
Uses axis 5 No usesaxis5
above.
Boolean, see
Uses axis 6 No usesaxis6
above.
Boolean, see
Uses axis 7 No usesaxis7
above.
Boolean, see
Uses axis 8 No usesaxis8
above.
Boolean, see
Uses axis 9 No usesaxis9
above.
Boolean, see
Uses axis 10 No usesaxis10
above.
Boolean, see
Active No isactive
above.
Boolean, see
Complete No complete
above.

10.2.2.4 Cylinder driver pin import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing cylinder driver pin data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.

Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30), Part code + stack height Unique.
Part code Yes partcode
upper case Must be an existing cylinder part code.
Stack height Numeric (0 to 35) Yes stackheight
Pin name Character (2) Yes driverpin Characters 0..9, A..Z allowed

10.2.2.5 Cylinder picture import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing cylinder picture data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 295

Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields

The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30), Unique. Must exist be an existing cylinder
Part code Yes partcode
upper case part code.
Only the file name, must not include a folder
Filename Character Yes filename
name

The folder from where the pictures are loaded is the folder that contains the CSV file you are importing
and then a sub folder CylinderPicture
Picture requirements
Minimum width 10, Maximum width 800, Minimum height 10, Maximum height 800
File type JPG or PNG

10.2.2.6 Cylinder sub assembly import (CSV) file format

Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your ProMaster Master Keying license.
ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing cylinder assembly data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Part code + system type + component type
Character (30),
Cylinder Yes lockpartnumber Unique.
upper case
Must be an existing cylinder entry.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 296 ProMaster Master Keying

System type Character (100) yes systemtype System type must exist.
Component type Character (100) yes componenttype Sub assembly component type must exist.
Part code Character (30) yes partcode
Quantity Numeric, 1 to 999 Yes quantity
Location Character (50) Yes location

10.2.2.7 Cylinder sub assembly picture import (CSV) file format

Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your ProMaster Master Keying license.
ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing cylinder assembly picture data that is supplied in a
comma separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30), Part code + system type Unique.
Part code Yes partcode
upper case Must be an existing cylinder assembly entry.
System type Character (100) Yes systemtype
Only the file name, must not include a folder
Filename Character Yes filename
name

The folder from where the pictures are loaded is the folder that contains the CSV file you are importing
and then a sub folder CylinderSubAssemblyPicture
Picture requirements
Minimum width 10, Maximum width 1000, Minimum height 10, Maximum height 800
File type JPG or PNG

10.2.2.8 Cylinder sub assembly video URL import (CSV) file format
Manufacturer edition only. Cylinder sub assembly feature must be in your ProMaster Master Keying license.
ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing cylinder assembly video URL data that is supplied in
a comma separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 297

the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.

The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30), Part code + system type Unique.
Part code Yes partcode
upper case Must be an existing cylinder assembly entry.
System type Character (100) Yes systemtype
Filename Character (1000) Yes url

10.2.2.9 Door hardware type import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing door hardware type data that is supplied in a
comma separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.

Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (100),
Description Yes description Unique
upper case

10.2.2.10 Door hardware import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing door hardware data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 298 ProMaster Master Keying

For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.

Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30),
Part code Yes partcode Unique.
upper case
Description Character (200) Yes description
Brand Character (100) Yes brand
Finish Character (100) No finish
Length not important, remapped during
Hardware type Character Yes doorhardwaretype
import
manufacturerpartc
Item number Character (30) No
ode
Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
'False', '0', 'N',
Active 'No' and True No isactive
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'

10.2.2.11 Factory import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing factory data that is supplied in a comma separated
values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Name Character (100) Yes clientname Unique.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 299

Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
'False', '0', 'N',
Active 'No' and True No isactive
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'
Code Character (20) No clientcode Unique if provided.
Contact Character (50) No contactname
Phone Character (20) No contactphone
Fax Character (20) No contactfax
Email Character (250) No contactemail
Contact 2 Character (50) No contactname2
Phone 2 Character (20) No contactphone2
Fax 2 Character (20) No contactfax2
Email 2 Character (250) No contactemail2
Postal address 1 Character (30) No postaladdress1
Postal address 2 Character (30) No postaladdress2
Postal address 3 Character (30) No postaladdress3
Postal address 4 Character (30) No postaladdress4
Postal city Character (30) No postalcity
Postal state Character (5) No postalstate
Postal post code Character (10) No postalpostcode
Postal country Character (30) No postalcountry
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress1
1
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress2
2
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress3
3
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress4
4
Physical city Character (30) No physicalcity
Physical state Character (5) No physicalstate
Physical post
Character (10) No physicalpostcode
code
Physical country Character (30) No physicalcountry

10.2.2.12 Key colour import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing key colour data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 300 ProMaster Master Keying

the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.

The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Colour Character (30) Yes colour Unique.
Required when short colour is mandatory,
and that is determined by the design
Short colour Character (10) No shortcolour module. For design modules that support
multiple colours per key the short colour is
mandatory.

10.2.2.13 Keying type import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing keying type data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.

Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (20),
Ref Yes ref Unique.
upper case
Description Character (200) Yes description
Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
'False', '0', 'N',
Construction 'No' and True No construction
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 301

Boolean, see ignoreduplicatet

Ignore dup TMK No
above mk

10.2.2.14 Lockshop import (CSV) file format

Manufacturer edition only.
ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing lock-shop data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .

Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Name Character (100) Yes clientname Unique.
Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
'False', '0', 'N',
Active 'No' and True No isactive
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'
Code Character (20) No clientcode Unique if provided.
Contact Character (50) No contactname
Phone Character (20) No contactphone
Mobile Character (20) No contactmobile
Fax Character (20) No contactfax
Email Character (250) No contactemail
Contact 2 Character (50) No contactname2
Phone 2 Character (20) No contactphone2
Mobile 2 Character (20) No contactmobile2
Fax 2 Character (20) No contactfax2
Email 2 Character (250) No contactemail2
Postal address 1 Character (30) No postaladdress1
Postal address 2 Character (30) No postaladdress2
Postal address 3 Character (30) No postaladdress3

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 302 ProMaster Master Keying

Postal address 4 Character (30) No postaladdress4

Postal city Character (30) No postalcity
Postal state Character (5) No postalstate
Postal post code Character (10) No postalpostcode
Postal country Character (30) No postalcountry
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress1
1
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress2
2
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress3
3
Physical address
Character (30) No physicaladdress4
4
Physical city Character (30) No physicalcity
Physical state Character (5) No physicalstate
Physical post
Character (10) No physicalpostcode
code
Physical country Character (30) No physicalcountry
Boolean, see
Key cutting agent Yes keycuttingagent
above
Boolean, see
Export system Yes exportsystem
above

10.2.2.15 Lock import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing lock data that is supplied in a comma separated
values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .

Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (39),
Part code Yes lockpartnumber Unique.
upper case
Item number Character (100) No itemnumber
Description Character (200) Yes description

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 303

Brand Character (100) Yes brand

Finish Character (100) No finish
Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
Parts list, lock 'False', '0', 'N',
partslistlockinchu
part includes 'No' and True No
descylinder
cylinders being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'
Boolean, see
Active No isactive
above.
Boolean, see
Complete No complete
above.

10.2.2.16 Lock cylinder import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing lock cylinder data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.

Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30), Part code + position + part type Unique.
Part code Yes partcode
upper case Must be an existing lock part code.
Position Numeric, 1..100 lockcylinderrank Corresponds to system types.
E=External cylinder
Part type Character (1) Yes parttype I=Internal cylinder
D=Double cylinder
Must be an existing cylinder part code.
Cylinder part Character (30), cylinderpartnum If part type = 'D' then must be double
Yes
code upper case ber cylinder part code, else if part type 'E' or 'I'
then a cylinder part code.

10.2.2.17 Lock picture import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing lock picture data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 304 ProMaster Master Keying

289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings

The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.

Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (30), Unique. Must exist be an existing lock part
Part code Yes partcode
upper case code.
Only the file name, must not include a folder
Filename Character Yes filename
name

The folder from where the pictures are loaded is the folder that contains the CSV file you are importing
and then a sub folder CylinderPicture (I.e. The same folder used for cylinder pictures)
Picture requirements
Minimum width 10, Maximum width 800, Minimum height 10, Maximum height 800
File type JPG or PNG

10.2.3 System data file formats

10.2.3.1 Door import (CSV) file format
ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing door data that is supplied in a comma separated
values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (20),
Door Yes doornumber Unique.
upper case

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 305

Character (20), Required when adding doors.

Stamping Yes* stamping
upper case Not required for updating doors.
Description Character (200) No doordescription
Area Character (200) No area
Stage Character (50) No stage
Required for keyed doors, blank for non-
Lock Character Yes* lockpartnumber
keyed doors
Boolean, False
being one of 'F',
'False', '0', 'N',
Non keyed 'No' and True No nonkeyed Defaults to False
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'
Door height Character (20) No doorheight
Door width Character (20) No doorwidth
Door thickness Character (20) No doorthickness
Signatories Numeric, 0..999 No signatories
Notes Character (200) No notes
Specific pinning instructions for
Pinning Note Character (200) No pinningnotes
manufacturing. Not normally used.
Different keying Boolean, see differentkeyingsid
No Must be false if non-keyed
side 2 above e2

10.2.3.2 Door renaming import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing door renaming data that is supplied in a comma
separated values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .

Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (20), Unique.
Door Yes doornumber
upper case The existing door number.
Character (20),
New door Yes newdoornumber Unique.
upper case

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 306 ProMaster Master Keying

The new door number. Must not already

exist for a door.

10.2.3.3 Key import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing key data that is supplied in a comma separated
values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings

The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (20),
Key Yes keynumber Unique.
upper case
Description Character (200) No keydescription
Category Character (50) No category
Must be the key number of a master key
Character (20),
Key above No keyabove that already exists within this system, or is
upper case
in the file being imported.
Must be one of the following values:

M = Master Key
S = Selective Key
C = Change Key
B = Construction
Z = Control
Designation Character (1) Yes* designation Other designations may not be imported.
B and Z must be used only on appropriate
design modules.

Not required for update

Required for adding keys unless application
parameter is set to allow keys without
designation.
Part code Character (30) No partcode
available only if your ProMaster Master
Stamping Character (20) No stamping
Keying is configured to use key stampings
Boolean, False
Ship separate No shipseparate
being one of 'F',

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 307

'False', '0', 'N',

'No' and True
being one of 'T',
'True', '1', 'Y',
'Yes'
Boolean, see
Disabled No disabled
above
Signatories Numeric, 0..999 No signatories

10.2.3.4 Keying import (CSV) file format

ProMaster Master Keying provides a wizard for importing keying data that is supplied in a comma separated
values (CSV) file. This topic explains the file contents required.
289
For information about the physical structure of a CSV file, read the topic CSV file format definition .
Headings
The table below shows one heading that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for automatically determining
the contents of each field. For each field there are several variations that are checked.
For example, to determine a field containing the Part Code from the heading, the following headings are
matched: part code, partcode, part, code, part no, partno, sku, article.
Additionally, headings are matched in a case insensitive manner.
Fields
The order of the fields within the CSV file is not important as the ProMaster Master Keying CSV import wizard
provides a powerful interface for selecting the source of each item of data.
The following table list all the fields that ProMaster Master Keying will accept for this import.

Field Name Type/ Max Len Reqd Heading Notes

Character (20),
Key Yes keynumber
upper case
Character (20), Required if importing by door number.
Door number Yes* doornumber
upper case Not required if importing by stamping.
If not used, defaults to E for external.
Values allowed are:
E = External
I = Internal
Position Character (1) No positiontype
External is the normal keying for a door.
Internal keying is permitted only when the
door is flagged as having different internal
keying.
Character (20), Required if importing by stamping.
Stamping Yes* stamping
upper case Not required if importing by door number.

10.3 Miscellaneous information

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 308 ProMaster Master Keying

10.3.1 Excel template definition

107
When importing or exporting systems from Excel (See Creating a system from Excel , Importing a system
109 114
extension from Excel , Exporting to Excel) , part of the process it to choose the template definition that
matches the Excel file you are working with.
There is a standard template called "Default" that matches the empty Excel files shipped with ProMaster
Master Keying. In all likelihood this is all that most users will use.
You may make your own Excel files, and then use the template definitions to create a definition that matches
your Excel file. There are some reasons why you may want to create your own Excel files (and thus a
corresponding template definition, such as wanting to omit some key of door fields. You may make multiple
definitions to match several Excel files if you wish.

Invoking the Excel template definition editor

From any of the three places where Excel files can be exported or imported, right click on the drop down list
of template definitions to add, edit or delete. Edit and delete operate on the currently selected item in the list.
The editor
The editor has 4 tabs.
Client
The various locations for each data field can be configured. Client name is required but the other fields may
be set to the blank value meaning they will not be exported or imported.
System
The various locations for each data field can be configured. System description is required but the other
fields may be set to the blank value meaning they will not be exported or imported.
Doors
The door start row is the row number in Excel containing the first door. The only mandatory field is the
door number column.
Keys
The key start column is the column in Excel containing the first key. The only mandatory row is the key
number row.

10.3.2 Image editor

ProMaster Master Keying includes an image editor that allows you to tweak pictures. The image editor is not a
drawing tool.
The image editor is used for lock photos and document images.
Invoking the image editor
There are several ways in which the image editor is invoked:
· After you load a picture it is displayed in the image editor.

· After you acquire an image from your scanner it is displayed in the image editor.

· After you paste an image from the clipboard it is displayed in the image editor.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 309

· After you click an Edit image button.

Resize image

When the image editor is loaded as a result of a new image being loaded (load, scanner or paste from
clipboard), the size of the image is checked.
If the image dimensions exceed the preferred size pre-set for that image purpose then you are prompted to
resize them image. As you will not be allowed to save the image unless it is within the maximum allowed
dimensions, then you should proceed with the image resize.
Options are provided to:

· Allow the width and height to be set. The image aspect ratio is maintained.

· Quickly set the Preferred size.

The status bar at the bottom of the image editor shows you the image dimensions and the image format.
Toolbar options

Option Description
Editing | Undo Undo the last change you made to the picture.
Editing | Redo Reapply the last undo you made to the picture.
Undo all changes you have made to the picture, reverting to the picture
Editing | Reload
you started with.
Select | Select all Selects the whole image
Select | Select none Removes the selection
Select | Select rectangle tool Use the mouse to make a selection on the image.
Select | Select ellipse tool Use the mouse to make a selection on the image.
Select | Select lasso tool Use the mouse to make a freehand selection on the image.
Use the mouse to make a selection on the image. This tools works best
Select | Select magic wand tool
with pictures with clearly defined areas.
Image | Flip horizontal Flip the picture horizontally.
Image | Flip vertical Flip the picture vertically.
Image | Rotate left 90 Rotate the picture left by 90 degrees.
Image | Rotate right 90 Rotate the picture right by 90 degrees.
Image | Decrease brightness Decrease the brightness of the picture.
Image | Increase brightness Increase the brightness of the picture.
Image | Decrease contrast Decrease the contrast of the picture.
Image | Increase contrast Increase the contrast of the picture.
Image | Sharpen Sharpen the picture.
Image | Blur Blur the picture.
Crop the picture, leaving just the area you have selected with your
Image | Crop
mouse.
Image | Clear selection Clears the area you have selected with your mouse.
Zoom | Full size Show the picture at 100% resolution.
Zoom | Fit to screen Show the picture sized to fit the window
View | Zoom in Show the picture larger.
View | Zoom out Show the picture smaller.

General use

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 310 ProMaster Master Keying

More often than not, the tasks you will be performing in the Image Editor are:
· Crop To Selection (For pictures where you want to remove the surrounding white space)

· Resize (To ensure the picture is the preferred size)

When you have finished your changes, click OK to save the picture.

10.3.3 Take photo

From signatories and client signatories, the signatory photo may be captured from a web cam (as well as
being able to be loaded from an image).
To take a photo while editing the signatory, click on the Photo tab then on Camera.
The Camera and Size lists show attached cameras and suitable size resolutions offered by the camera.

When you Connect to the camera the live camera view is shown. Click OK to take the photo when ready.
If you want to change Size or Camera, you must first Disconnect.

10.3.4 Previewing reports

For many reports you may do a screen preview rather than sending them to your printer. This is useful for
checking that the report is producing the results that you expect before you commit to printing it.
Zooming
The buttons provide three zoom settings (Whole page, Zoom to page width, Zoom to 100%) or you may enter
a specific zoom value in the edit box.
Navigating
For multi-page reports, buttons are available for moving between pages, or use standard keyboard navigation
(Ctrl+PgDn, Ctrl+PgUp, Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+End) or the mouse wheel.

Page Layout
Four buttons are available to change the way the pages are presented (Single page, Two pages side-by-side,
Continuous and Two pages side-by-side continuous). The side-by-side layouts are useful for seeing two
pages at a time on a larger display. In the continuous views the mouse wheel scrolls down the page(s)
instead of jumping between pages as it does for a single page view.

10.3.5 Sending reports by email

Many reports may be sent by email rather than sending them to your printer.
When reports are sent by email, they are first generated as Adobe PDF files, then sent as attachments on the
email.
There is an application parameter 49 that determines if PDF files are generated using Unicode. Unicode is
the default behaviour and should be changed only with a very good reason. Changing this parameter to ANSI
will produce smaller PDF files, but any non-ASCII characters will then not appear correctly in the PDF.
49
By default, PDF files are encrypted to disallow changes to them. There is an application parameter that
turns off encryption.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 311

10.3.6 Forgotten admin password

If you have forgotten your admin password, you may reset it by entering your registration code.

Getting started
On the main ProMaster Master Keying window, select the Environment you are unable to connect to.
· From the Tools menu, select the item Reset Admin password

Resetting password
Enter your registration code
Enter the new password you want and confirm it by repeating it.

Click OK.
The registration code must be for the product registration used in this database. It does not have to
be the current registration code (e.g. You have renewed support and updates, but not entered the new
registration code), but it must be the same product registration that is in use for the database.

10.3.7 Unlocking the console

If ProMaster Master Keying has been configured in the Application Parameters to lock the console after a time
of inactivity, then one of two things will happen.
· If ProMaster Master Keying is at the main window, then you will be logged out.

· If you have a window open where you may be performing a task, then ProMaster Master Keying locks the
console. To unlock the console, the user who is logged in must enter their password, or alternatively, the
holder of the admin password may perform an admin unlock.
The admin unlock is useful for times where the user has disappeared, and the admin wishes to unlock
the ProMaster Master Keying and log the user out.

10.3.8 Data locks

Premium and Manufacturer editions.

When users are working on data, a lock is granted to the user and that prohibits other users from changing
the same data until the first user is finished.
System data is locked at the system level, whereas global data is usually locked at the record level.
Getting started
· You must be logged in as the admin user

· From the Setup and Admin menu, select Show user data locks

The data locks are shown.

10.3.9 Custom reports

The custom report writer is available in several places.
Overview
General reports
Available in premium and manufacturer editions.
Required custom reporting license.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

312 ProMaster Master Keying

These reports are for administration purposes, and do not have any system or job context.
You must write the queries to return the data required by the report.

Designer location: Setup and Admin menu then Design custom reports - general.
Run location: Admin Reports menu then Custom reports - general.
System reports
Available in premium and manufacturer editions.
Required custom reporting license.

These reports are for system purposes, and provide the system context as a parameter.
You must write the queries to return the data required by the report.
Designer location: Setup and Admin menu then Design custom reports - system.
Run location: Reports menu then Custom reports - system.
Job reports
Available in premium and manufacturer editions.
Required custom reporting license.
These reports are for job purposes, and provide the system and job contexts as parameters.
You must write the queries to return the data required by the report.
Designer location: Manufacture Job screen click the Design button.
Run location: Manufacture Job screen select the report(s) then click Print or Print preview.
Job labels - shipping
Available in all editions.
Included in standard license.
Allows you to define your own label layouts, and own label size.

The data required is provided, so all you must do is lay out the labels.
Designer location: Manufacture Job screen check Print shipping labels and click the Design labels
button.
Run location: Manufacture Job screen check Print shipping labels and select the desired layout from the
list before printing.
Job labels - keys
Available in all editions.
Included in standard license.
Allows you to define your own label layouts, and own label size.
The data required is provided, so all you must do is lay out the labels.
Designer location: Manufacture Job screen check Print key labels and click the Settings and click the
Design labels button.
Run location: Manufacture Job screen check Print key labels and click the Settings and select the
desired layout from the list and click OK.
Job labels - doors

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Appendix 313

Available in all editions.

Included in standard license.

Allows you to define your own label layouts, and own label size.
The data required is provided, so all you must do is lay out the labels.
Designer location: Manufacture Job screen check Print door labels and click the Settings and click the
Design labels button.
Run location: Manufacture Job screen check Print door labels and click the Settings and select the
desired layout from the list and click OK.
About designing reports and labels
· Use the Add, Remove and Edit buttons to set up your reports or labels.

Each report must have a description and that description appears in the report or label selection.
If a report is not active, it will not be available for printing.
Click the Edit report button to open the report designer.
Special fields
There are some fields you may use the report layouts that automatically populate, or behave in a special
manner.
All the custom fields must be the correct field type and named correctly for the automatic behaviour. All the
names start with __ (That is two underscore characters).
All custom reports and labels

Field name Field type Description

__MemoCompany Memo Populated with your company name.
__MemoAddress Memo Populated with your company address.
__MemoSystem Memo Populated with system number and description.
__LblProductName Label Populated with "ProMaster Master-Keying 8"
__LblProductNameShor Label Populated with "PM8"
t
__MemoFooterMessag Memo Populated with the footer message defined in the application
e parameters.
__ImageLogo Image Populated with the small company logo. See Company logo for
reports 50

Shipping labels

Field name Field type Description

__MemoLabelAddress DBMemo The field's font will be adjusted when printing to accommodate the
address data without wrapping.

10.3.10 Keyline machine search

The search for Keyline machines displays networks available on your computer.
Select the correct network and click Search.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 314 ProMaster Master Keying

Each machine found that is the correct type is displayed.

Select the machine you want (probably only one will be listed!) and click OK.

10.3.11 Keyline machine disgnostics

These tests communicate with your Keyline machine to check that things are working.
Getting started
From the machine configuration window for any Keyline machine, click Test.

At the top your machine details are shown, so the first thing you should determine is if this information is
correct.
Running a test
To perform a test, first highlight the test that you want, then click the Test button. The results of the test are
displayed at the bottom of the window.
The tests
Resolve host
This test takes the host name and resolves it to an IP Address. If the host name is already an IP Address (e.g.
127.0.0.1) then the Resolve host test will indicate that the host name does not need to be resolved. In all
other cases, the test should resolve the host name to the IP Address of the machine that is hosting the
database. If the name cannot be resolved, first check that the host name is correct, then address the name
resolution issue with your computer network support person.

Ping host
This test attempts to ping the host. While a successful outcome for this test is useful in knowing that
communication is possible.
Open TCP/IP port
This test attempts to open the a socket on the host machine on the communication port.
Read machine status
This test communicate with the machine and asks its status.
Read machine information
This test communicate with the machine and returns information about its configuration.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Version numbers

Part

11
 316 ProMaster Master Keying

11 Version numbers
The following table shows the various file format versions used in each product release version.

Product Database System Export/Import

8.17408.0.0 8042 8000
8.17407.0.0 8041 8000
8.17406.0.0 8041 8000
8.17405.0.0 8041 8000
8.17404.0.0 8041 8000
8.17403.0.0 8040 8000
8.17402.0.0 8040 8000
8.17401.0.0 8040 8000
8.17303.0.0 8040 8000
8.17302.1.0 8040 8000
8.17301.0.0 8040 8000
8.17205.0.0 8040 8000
8.17204.0.0 8040 8000
8.17203.0.0 8040 8000
8.17202.0.0 8040 8000
8.17201.0.0 8040 8000
8.17111.0.0 8040 8000
8.17110.0.0 8040 8000
8.17109.0.0 8040 8000
8.17108.0.0 8039 8000
8.17107.0.0 8039 8000
8.17106.2.0 8039 8000
8.17105.2.0 8039 8000
8.17104.0.0 8039 8000
8.17103.0.0 8039 8000
8.17102.0.0 8038 8000
8.17101.0.0 8037 8000
8.17006.0.0 8037 8000
8.17005.0.0 8037 8000
8.17004.0.0 8037 8000
8.17003.1.0 8037 8000
8.17002.0.0 8036 8000
8.17001.0.0 8036 8000
8.16903.0.0 8035 8000
8.16902.0.0 8034 8000
8.16901.0.0 8033 8000
8.16806.0.0 8033 8000
8.16805.0.0 8033 8000

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Version numbers 317

8.16804.0.0 8033 8000

8.16803.1.0 8032 8000
8.16802.0.0 8031 8000
8.16801.0.0 8030 8000
8.16705.0.0 8029 8000
8.16704.1.0 8028 8000
8.16703.0.0 8028 8000
8.16702.0.0 8028 8000
8.16701.0.0 8028 8000
8.16603.0.0 8028 8000
8.16602.0.0 8028 8000
8.16601.0.0 8027 8000
8.16507.0.0 8027 8000
8.16506.0.0 8027 8000
8.16505.0.0 8027 8000
8.16504.0.0 8027 8000
8.16503.0.0 8027 8000
8.16502.0.0 8026 8000
8.16501.0.0 8026 8000
8.16402.0.0 8026 8000
8.16401.0.0 8026 8000
8.16306.0.0 8026 8000
8.16305.0.0 8026 8000
8.16304.0.0 8026 8000
8.16303.0.0 8026 8000
8.16302.0.0 8026 8000
8.16301.0.0 8026 8000
8.16205.0.0 8026 8000
8.16204.0.0 8026 8000
8.16203.0.0 8026 8000
8.16202.0.0 8026 8000
8.16201.1.0 8025 8000
8.16103.0.0 8025 8000
8.16102.0.0 8025 8000
8.16101.0.0 8024 8000
8.16003.0.0 8024 8000
8.16002.0.0 8024 8000
8.16001.0.0 8024 8000
8.16001.0.0 8024 8000
8.15905.0.0 8023 8000
8.15904.0.0 8023 8000
8.15903.0.0 8023 8000
8.15902.0.0 8023 8000

© 2019 WH Software Limited

318 ProMaster Master Keying

8.15901.0.0 8023 8000

8.15807.0.0 8023 8000
8.15806.0.0 8023 8000
8.15805.0.0 8023 8000
8.15804.0.0 8023 8000
8.15803.0.0 8023 8000
8.15802.3.0 8022 8000
8.15801.0.0 8020 8000
8.15708.0.0 8020 8000
8.15707.0.0 8020 8000
8.15706.0.0 8020 8000
8.15705.1.0 8020 8000
8.15704.0.0 8020 8000
8.15703.0.0 8020 8000
8.15702.0.0 8019 8000
8.15701.0.0 8018 8000
8.15605.0.0 8018 8000
8.15604.0.0 8018 8000
8.15603.0.0 8018 8000
8.15602.0.0 8018 8000
8.15601.0.0 8018 8000
8.15508.0.0 8018 8000
8.15507.0.0 8018 8000
8.15506.0.0 8018 8000
8.15505.0.0 8017 8000
8.15504.0.0 8017 8000
8.15503.0.0 8017 8000
8.15502.0.0 8017 8000
8.15501.0.0 8017 8000
8.15410.0.0 8017 8000
8.15409.0.0 8017 8000
8.15408.0.0 8016 8000
8.15407.0.0 8016 8000
8.15406.0.0 8016 8000
8.15405.0.0 8016 8000
8.15404.0.0 8015 8000
8.15403.0.0 8015 8000
8.15402.0.0 8015 8000
8.15401.0.0 8015 8000
8.15308.1.0 8015 8000
8.15307.0.0 8015 8000
8.15306.0.0 8015 8000
8.15305.0.0 8014 8000

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Version numbers 319

8.15304.0.0 8014 8000

8.15303.0.0 8013 8000
8.15302.0.0 8013 8000
8.15301.0.0 8013 8000
8.15208.0.0 8013 8000
8.15207.1.0 8013 8000
8.15206.0.0 8013 8000
8.15205.0.0 8013 8000
8.15204.0.0 8013 8000
8.15203.0.0 8012 8000
8.15202.0.0 8012 8000
8.15201.0.0 8012 8000
8.15103.0.0 8012 8000
8.15102.0.0 8012 8000
8.15101.0.0 8010 8000
8.15013.0.0 8009 8000
8.15012.0.0 8008 8000
8.15011.0.0 8007 8000
8.15010.0.0 8007 8000
8.15009.0.0 8007 8000
8.15008.0.0 8007 8000
8.15007.0.0 8007 8000
8.15006.0.0 8007 8000
8.15005.0.0 8007 8000
8.15004.0.0 8007 8000
8.15003.0.0 8007 8000
8.15002.0.0 8007 8000
8.15001.2.0 8006 8000
8.14912.4.0 8006 8000
8.14911.1.0 8006 8000
8.14910.0.0 8005 8000
8.14909.0.0 8005 8000
8.14908.0.0 8005 8000
8.14907.0.0 8005 8000
8.14906.0.0 8005 8000
8.14905.0.0 8004 8000
8.14904.0.0 8004 8000
8.14903.0.0 8004 8000
8.14902.0.0 8004 8000
8.14901.0.0 8004 8000
8.14813.0.0 8003 8000
8.14812.0.0 8001 8000
8.14811.0.0 8001 8000

© 2019 WH Software Limited

320 ProMaster Master Keying

8.14810.0.0 8001 8000

8.14809.0.0 8001 8000
8.14808.0.0 8001 8000
8.14807.0.0 8001 8000
8.14806.0.0 8001 8000
8.14805.0.0 8001 8000
8.14804.0.0 8001 8000
8.14803.0.0 8001 8000
8.14802.1.0 8001 8000
8.14801.0.0 8001 8000

© 2019 WH Software Limited

Summary of changes in updates

Part

12
 322 ProMaster Master Keying

12 Summary of changes in updates

Version 8.17408.0.0
Added card 1954.
Version 8.17407.0.0
Export to Key Manager 8 was not possible with doors that had external and internal keying. Fixed.
Version 8.17406.0.0
Mottura Champions improvements to design assistant for construction keyed systems.
Version 8.17405.0.0

Mottura Champions improvements to construction key code checking.

Version 8.17404.0.0
Fixed a problem removing a job in the AA Perk design module when the test keys feature is used.
Version 8.17403.0.0
Added lock and cylinder Item Number to parts required report and XML export.
Mottura Champions improvements to construction key code checking.
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.17402.0.0
Mottura Champions improvements to TMK calculation for construction keyed systems.
Mottura Champions improvements to construction key code checking.
Version 8.17401.0.0
Mottura Champions changes to system type params and magnet positions.
Duplicated doors wizard - increased capacity.

Mottura Champions changes regarding construction keying.

Coding screens - in some design modules it is possible to have a key assigned to a door, but for the door
coding to not be calculated. Menu options Find prior door without pinning and Find next door without
pinning have been added to the popup menu foron the doors list to locate doors that have no pinning
solution. An example of this is in the interchangeable code module, having a door with a control key assigned
but no operating keys.
Version 8.17303.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.17302.1.0
Fixed a minor problem when entering code manually for Kaba Quattro.
Customer specific changes.
Added driver pins for Lockwood MT5/MT5+. S1/S2 driver pins are used in place of 1+ master pins. New core
types are added for cylinders which must be set correctly to get the correct driver pin.
Examples for 29 size cylinder: (a) Z+,1+ => Z+,S19 (b) Z+,1+,1+ => Z+,S29 (c) Z+,1+,1+,1+ =>
Z+,1+,S29
Added ABP/ATP for Lockwood MT5/MT5+

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 323

Version 8.17301.0.0
Customer specific changes.

If the job notes on a system are added or altered and there are job(s) in the Entering status, and the job(s)
do not have notes, you will be asked if the notes should be copied to the job(s).
Version 8.17205.0.0
Fixed an error message when adding signatories.
Version 8.17204.0.0

Add "Find in results" for searching for a key or door in the key and door search windows.
Improved the performance of adding a system type which was sluggish when networks preformance was
poor.
Version 8.17203.0.0
Added "Remove description" as an option when bulk-changing keys.
When opening a system by searching for a signatory name, there is now an option for signatory active
(All/Yes/No) and it defaults to "Yes".
When door signatories is set to "All doors require the system specified number of signatories" and "Number of
signatories required to order doors" is 0 then the check for all mandatory signatories being on the job is now
ignored.
Added an option to the keys report to not show the key category.
Version 8.17202.0.0
Fixed an error message when replacing a key section family and selecting the replacement key section.
Version 8.17201.0.0
Fixed a problem stopping manufacturing XML being written in legacy format.
Version 8.17111.0.0
Faster opening key and door search windows, particularly on systems with a huge number of jobs.

Version 8.17110.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.17109.0.0
Mottura Champions improvements.
Version 8.17108.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.17107.0.0
Changed the output when manufacturing EVVA 3KS/4KS keys on the Silca Protech machine because the
Protech interpretation of the data is not the same as the Protech documentation and the machine was
reversing the depths.
Version 8.17106.2.0
Improvements to design assistant algorithm for selecting rotated constants.
Version 8.17105.2.0
Improvements to colour assignment in Medeco modules.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

324 ProMaster Master Keying

Version 8.17104.0.0
Medeco Biaxial 10 and 60 - fixed progression editor for coding matrix to not add a designation value.

Mottura Champions - added lock systems C17, C27, C55, CP6.

Fixed Kaba Quattro key cutting on Ninja Total machines.
Improved the layout of the code progression editor for Kaba systems.
Version 8.17103.0.0
Added card 1945.

Version 8.17102.0.0
Medeco Biaxial 10 series M4 support added.
Version 8.17101.0.0
Improvements to the database upgrade process from PM7.
Added design module Mottura Champions.
Version 8.17006.0.0
Improvements to the database upgrade process from PM7.
Version 8.17005.0.0
Fixed an issue searching for key sections when there are hundreds of sub sections.
Improvements in the performance of releasing a job to manufacturing when the test keys feature is licensed
and the system has thousands of keys on each door.
Version 8.17004.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Evva DPE module - changes to allow no colour assignment to keys.
Version 8.17003.1.0

Early work for Mottura Champions.

All Kaba design modules - better handling of reports and on-screen pinning when doors have no pinning
information.
Doors report - fixed handling when layout is "non keyed doors" and criteria included keys.
Customer specific changes.
Anti-pick pin calculation for AA KeyUltra design module improved.
Added an XML output from job manufacturing for parts required. Premium and Manufacturer edition only.
Allowed manual entry of bad codes from the coding tree or coding matrix when the "Allow bad codes" option
is checked. Previously bad codes had to be selected from the tree or matrix to respect that option. The
purpose of this change is not to encourage bad code use but to make the manual entry of legacy systems with
bad codes somewhat easier.
Fixed a problem where the TMK generation on the AU Assa design module could get stuck without producing
a solution.
Version 8.17002.0.0
Fixed an issue upgrading 5 pin system types in the Assa Abloy Union design module.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 325

Version 8.17001.0.0
Improvements to download program updates.

Fixed an error message exporting all systems to a client when publishing is not configured.
Added card 1943 (CorbinRusswin).
Version 8.16903.0.0
Key Manager 8 related changes.
Altered card 453 (Yale).

Improved saving of jobs.

Version 8.16902.0.0
Fixed an issue displaying key sections as a tree (e.g. when opening a system) when the key section families
contained invalid data.
Improved the speed saving the keying matrix when there are many thousand changes.
Customer specific changes.
Card 491 (Corbin) changes for assistant.
Version 8.16901.0.0
Customer specific changes.
A new Application parameter under Report\Manufacturing\ALC Bilock allows the Bilock key code to be
split onto 2 lines on the key cutting chart.
Version 8.16806.0.0
On-screen pinning - added ability to print door label.
Version 8.16805.0.0
Released support Key Manager 8.
Version 8.16804.0.0

Fixed an error message when importing Kaba Expert Plus lists.

Altered card 1941 (dormakaba).
Version 8.16803.1.0
Work to support Key Manager 8.
Version 8.16802.0.0
Fixed an incorrect heading on the doors report.
Fixed a rare problem when checking for program updates.
Version 8.16801.0.0
Fixed some publishing error handling messages.
Preliminary work to support Key Manager 8.
Excel import - fixed an error when the client name was too long.
Altered card 1941 (dormakaba) with corrected information from manufacturer.
Version 8.16705.0.0

© 2019 WH Software Limited

326 ProMaster Master Keying

Alerts are shown more prominent.

Added card 1941 (dormakaba).

Version 8.16704.1.0
New "Stamping only" option for Gravograph cylinder marking output.
Updated database engine to version 3.0.7
Version 8.16703.0.0
Signatory and client signatory screen layout changes.

Keying matrix rewording and clarification on propagation settings.

Edit client - information about changing client added when client signatories are in use.
Show client signatories in "Copy signatories to this system from another system".
Added ability to fetch the latest registration in the Change Registration window.
Version 8.16702.0.0
XML manufacturing outputs - added key and door GUIDs to assist in integration applications.
Version 8.16701.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.16603.0.0
"Change constant" for Inline and EVVA DPE would not always be available when it should. Fixed.
Export systems analysis data - added "High Security" column to the exports.
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.16602.0.0
Installer improvements for updates.
Improved system type setup display for inline system types.

System document search shows the size of each document.

Card 315 (Weiser) changes for assistant.
Version 8.16601.0.0
Pinning calculation improvements for new KeyMark X4 cylinder types.
Version 8.16507.0.0
More new cylinder core types for KeyMark X4.
Fixed a problem importing from ProMaster Hardware when also importing keys.
Version 8.16506.0.0
Fixed a problem printing the order form report.
Fixed a problem in jobs when filtering keys by key group.
Version 8.16505.0.0
New cylinder core types for KeyMark X4.
Version 8.16504.0.0

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 327

Added automatic checking for updates. Additionally, download of updates is available on the server.
Fixed an issue importing Key Manager jobs when a snapshot of the system exists.

Version 8.16503.0.0
Improves speed of list selection and management for Abloy Protec, Abloy Novel and Lockwood MT5.
Version 8.16502.0.0
Installer improvements.
Customer specific changes.

Generic key marker, Generic door marker - file name was not always correct when using sales order number.
Version 8.16501.0.0
Resolved an issue importing locks from a CSV file.
Allowed key designation "Control" for Kaba Expert and Kaba Expert Plus. Control key may not be ordered on
the same job as other keys.
Improved job entry to disallow ordering a cylinder re-key quantity greater than previously manufactured. An
exception is made for doors that were never ordered to allow a re-key quantity of 1 so that legacy systems
without door orders can be re-keyed.
Fixed an error when searching for door hardware by description.
Version 8.16402.0.0
Further to the enhancement in version 8.16103.0.0 regarding Abloy Protec pre-cuts, when the key cutting is
sent to the Abloy LT-120, the pre-cut positions are changed to a "0" cut so they are not re-cut.
Door CSV import would not always sort new doors after existing doors. Fixed.
Version 8.16401.0.0
Fixed job display after editing customer order number on released job.
Fixed a rare problem in "Door access for key" where sometimes a door could not be added.

Added some handling for key section family errors when opening the coding screens. This is a rare scenario
from old data imported from other software products that affects very few users. Now the key section
indicates an error rather than generating an repeated error message.
Version 8.16306.0.0
Resolve an issue cutting Kaba Ace keys on the Silca Protech for serial perms.
Version 8.16305.0.0
Resolve an issue cutting Kaba Ace keys on the Silca Protech for serial perms.
Version 8.16304.0.0
Marking output for the gravograph machine - added an option for "Items per line" to support the Gravotrace
software.
Version 8.16303.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Backup email settings storage issue fixed. If you have the ProMaster Master Keying backup program
configured to send email, check the settings for the encryption after installing this update and correct the
encryption method if necessary.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

328 ProMaster Master Keying

Fixed a missing shortcut key press when searching for jobs.

Version 8.16302.0.0

Fixed Kaba ACE list selection - fixed the capacity display for right lists.
Version 8.16301.0.0
Fixed Kaba Gemini cutting on Triax machines.
Version 8.16205.0.0
Publishing - improvements on setting device availability.

A new Application parameter 49 under Coding called Allow coding reports (Key codes, door pinnings)
to be printed. This parameter stops the Key codes report and Door pinnings report from being printed or
saved as a PDF. This parameter has been added to decrease the chance of these reports being printed in
error and entering the production rather than using a job. These two reports are for checking coding ONLY
194
and must never be used for manufacturing. See the warnings in Report: Key codes and Report: Door
195
pinnings . The default behaviour for this setting is to not allow the two coding reports to be printed, and
this will be the correct setting for most users. If you want to print these reports (i.e. Like the previous
behaviour) then change the value of the application parameter mentioned above.
Fixed the status bar link for renewing support and maintenance.
Improvements in list selection for Kaba Expert Plus to seperate master-key perms and serial perms and
improved sorting.
Version 8.16204.0.0
Improvements to Kaba ACE serial permutation management.
Fixed an issue that stopped a key being removed when not ordered but referenced by a job on a door that
had been ordered.
Version 8.16203.0.0
Improvements to Kaba ACE serial permutation management.
Version 8.16202.0.0

Changes to the Kaba ACE design module to support systems that are KD and use multiple serial permutation
sin the same system.
Version 8.16201.1.0
Duplicate system - fixed a minor error when incompatible choices were selected.
Database upgrade from PM7 for ABUS XY14 improved for pre-cut values.
On 2-level DHI systems with the TMK other than "AA", improved the generation of key numbers when adding
keys.
Improvements self-heal connection loss to make it more robust for consecutive multiple failures.
Fixed an issue where replacing a key did not move the signatory authorities onto the new key.
Fixed an issue printing door labels for re-keyed cylinders.
Fixed the factory list in the preferences to exclude inactive factories.
Resolved an issue manufacturing doors that have 29 or more construction keys operating the door (Inline,
LWTwin, AAKeyUltra, AAPerk, AAUnion).
Version 8.16103.0.0

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 329

Kaba ACE - when cutting on the Silca Protech added dummy perm where necessary to make smoother key
operation.

Abloy Protec system types now have the ability for each key section to define which positions are pre-cut on
the blanks. When the key cutting is sent to the Silca Protech, Keyline SigmaPro or Silca UnoCode 399, the
pre-cut positions are changed to a "0" cut so they are not re-cut.
Version 8.16102.0.0
The list of devices when publishing a job was not sorted according to the sort order set when configuring the
devices. Fixed.

Bilock systems - allowed "weak" positions to be up to 6, not limited to the first 4 positions.
Several typo errors corrected.
Added cards 1534, 1066 (Wilka)
Version 8.16101.0.0
Improved "Create a system from Excel" to allow retrying when Excel file has errors (i.e. after you fix the
errors).
Version 8.16003.0.0
Adjustments to cutting Kaba Ace keys on the Silca Protech machine.
Version 8.16002.0.0
Database upgrade from PM7 - fixed a problem that would stop some databases from upgrading.
Added ability to cut Kaba Ace keys on the Silca Protech machine.
Version 8.16001.0.0
ProMaster Mobile publishing service is now available for sending jobs (particularly re-key jobs) to a mobile
phone. See Mobile services 79 and Manufacture: Publish to device
223
.
Version 8.15906.0.0
Improved selection of text when editing doors and keys.

Improvements to self-heal when disconnected from database and systems remain locked.
Version 8.15905.0.0
Job key labels fixed partcode field.
Job XML outputs now include key part codes (if turned on in the application parameters).
Added the job sales order number to the display of the door history and key history windows.
Added the ability to order a "core" for ALC Galaxy jobs.
Version 8.15904.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Key history and door history reports - added sales order field to the reports.
Version 8.15903.0.0
Customer specific changes.
When editing invoice number on completed job, allowed other related fields to be edited.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

330 ProMaster Master Keying

Changed the default value from "No" to "Yes" for the application parameter "In keying matrix, make
manufactured doors read-only by default". This is the safer setting. If you want the original behaviour,
change the value of this parameter to "No".
Added an application parameter to permit saving documents without a description.
Version 8.15902.0.0
Fixed a problem generating test keys on Medeco Biaxial 10 if the test keys feature was licensed.
Version 8.15901.0.0

Enhanced import from ProMaster Hardware (For use with ProMaster Hardware 7.15901 or later).
Version 8.15807.0.0
Improved Silca Protech marking token output.
Version 8.15806.0.0
Added a search for stamping when editing doors on a job.
Added options to the keying matrix to determine how propagation to doors with the same stamping operates.
Added "Customer code" as a search parameter for jobs.
Various search windows - improved the tab order for moving from the result to the bottom buttons.
Version 8.15805.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.15804.0.0
Job list report was not showing the customer order number. Fixed.
Windows 2008/2008 R2 dropped from supported platforms.
Added a variant of the Key History report based on a range of job dates. Check the report documentation
before using because it works a bit different to other key history reports.
Version 8.15803.0.0

Systems with multiple replaced keys could not always be deleted. Fixed.
Evva 4KS system code generation for standard progressions has been enhanced.
Version 8.15802.3.0
Signatory search was not respecting the value for "Active". Fixed.
Email body not always correct when using Windows 7. Fixed.
Cutting Best A2/A4 (Cards 752/754) on Silca UnoCode/UltraCode machines - added option to use tip stop 4.
Silca UnoCode/UltraCode machines - fixed cutting problems on some tip aligned keys.
Adjusted card 1932 for cutting on UnoCode machines.
Fixed a problem downloading keys to the ITL machine.
Version 8.15801.0.0
Improved backwards compatibility of manufacturing XML output of test keys when using legacy output file
format.
Version 8.15708.0.0
Fixed an error message when adding doors/keys with very long numeric key number or door number.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 331

Version 8.15707.0.0
Fixed an issue on some systems with manual code entry on Medeco Biaxial 10 series systems.

Version 8.15706.0.0
On interchangeable core systems when displayed tip to head, and entering a progression by using the mouse
(popup menus) instead of the keyboard then values appeared in the incorrect columns. Fixed.
Version 8.15705.1.0
Improved colour setting during coding on systems that permit two colours and a single colour is being used.

When adding a door and selecting a lock or cylinder, if the user has permissions to alter locks and cylinders
then add/edit/remove are now available.
When coding on Interchangeable Core systems and doors not having a lock/cylinder (not good anyway!), auto
coding was slow. Fixed.
Report subtitle font size adjusted.
Manual code entry on Medeco Biaxial 10 series systems improved to allow easier angle selection.
Version 8.15704.0.0
Fixed an error when importing a Medeco Biaxial 60 system from PM7.
Fixed an error releasing a job on the MT5 design module when the "Test keys" feature is licensed.
Version 8.15703.0.0
Added card 1933.
Version 8.15702.0.0
Added card 1932.
Version 8.15701.0.0
Fixed an error message when copying signatories to other systems if the user had never opened those other
systems.

When acquiring a document from a scanner, then editor maximum size was incorrect.
Added an option to the system signature registration report to not show the system description.
On the order for keys and doors, added a template that may be user defined.
Improved the speed of saving a job on large systems when the "test keys" feature is licensed.
Several job door outputs (Pinning chart, On-screen pinning, XML) showed keys multiple times when key re-
issues were ordered on the job. Fixed.
Version 8.15605.0.0
Backups. When compression a backup (zip), some third party programs (e.g. Carbon Black) can interfere
with the ability to completely read the backup and the zip is incomplete. This version adds checking for
anything keeping hold of the backup file and if the ProMaster Master Keying backup program cannot acquire
exclusive access to the backup for zipping then it reverts to a non zipped backup.
Version 8.15604.0.0
Fixed an error message when creating a job and the client name was more than 50 characters.
Fixed a problem with construction keying being removed prematurely.
Version 8.15603.0.0

© 2019 WH Software Limited

332 ProMaster Master Keying

XML export from manufacturing for Medeco Original 60 series product and sorting by key symbol produced an
error. Fixed.

Customer specific changes.

Version 8.15602.0.0
Tokoz Pro - allowed custom progressions to use all positions.
Design assistant - improved decision making on when to use rotated constants.
Version 8.15601.0.0

XML job manufacturing outputs - various improvements including segment information for Kaba modules.
Version 8.15508.0.0
Door pinning report for the Assa design module - fixed alignment of stamping field.
Key part code - various places fixed to convert the part code to upper case.
Printing door labels sorted by key symbol produced an error message. Fixed.
Importing systems - improved the selection of items to make the process easier.
Version 8.15507.0.0
Improvements in job XML output.
Version 8.15506.0.0
Improvements for downloading Gen6T keys to Keyline machines. December 2019 Keyline update is required
to cut these keys.
Jobs - editing notes for keys and doors works a little better now.
When creating a system from hierarchy quantities, the key part code may be entered if you have this
functionality enabled in the application parameters.
Job XML exports now include the Customer Code on the job.
Job list when searching for doors or keys is now sorted by the job opened time.

Improved stamping progression when entering doors on DHI systems.

Improved editing existing keys and doors so "coding required" is set only for changes that affect coding (e.g.
lock change, keyed internally, non keyed, construction keyed).
Version 8.15505.0.0
Bilock pinning calculation for CQCC cylinders improved to support a lock assigned to a door with only an
internal cylinder defined.
Coding matrix setting "Hide incidental masters" was not being saved. Fixed.
Improved duplicating doors with hardware.
Added support for "Special pinning empty positions" for Medeco Biaxial 10.
When adding keys to a door, the prompt for keys above now lists the masters.
Version 8.15504.0.0
Job key labels were not respecting the application parameter "Show system description". Fixed.
Version 8.15503.0.0
Door number auto progression - improved handling of bad data in door numbers. Trailing space.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 333

Improved colour selection for automatic coding on Bilock.

Fixed coding screen key job graphic not showing.

Version 8.15502.0.0
Abloy Novel - fixed problem with list selection.
Version 8.15501.0.0
Gravograph machine - allowed multiple machines to be configured.
Version 8.15410.0.0

Customer specific changes.

Version 8.15409.0.0
Job door labels were not respecting the setting "Show system description". Fixed.
Display of key parts required (L/R/L+R) was incorrect for Kaba Expert. Fixed.
Added card 1842, KeyMark X4.
Version 8.15408.0.0
Database upgrade from Version 7 - improvements to document processing to minimise database size.
Door search - job list was incomplete in the "Manufactured" field. Fixed.
Version 8.15407.0.0
Minor layout changes to landscape reports to fit better on Letter size paper.
Version 8.15406.0.0
Import from Excel. Automatically convert Door number, Stamping, Key number, Key above and Lock part to
upper case.
Import system extension from Excel - allow "Back" if errors are detected so you can correct in Excel then try
again.
Added a preferences for selecting the key number / door number text when "Save / Add another" is clicked.

Version 8.15405.0.0
Fixed error when double clicking to manufacture a job.
Fixed an anomaly when adding a door from whilst adding a key then adding a second door to the same key.
Door number progression was not logical.
Added functionality for converting EVVA DPE/DPS/EPS systems from the Inline module to the EVVA DPE
module.
Version 8.15404.0.0
Improved weak key options for Abloy Protec and ALC Bilock.
Version 8.15403.0.0
Medeco Biaxial 10 series - added ability to create a TMK with single cuts only.
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.15402.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.15401.0.0

© 2019 WH Software Limited

334 ProMaster Master Keying

ASSA USA module - improvements.

Resolved an issue where a job in "Coding" status could not be returned to data entry status.

Fixed an error when open a system by system description and search option "a + b".
Job test keys feature - fixed an error that could happen on some systems using control keys.
Version 8.15308.1.0
ASSA USA module - improvements.
Version 8.15307.0.0

Added door and key preferences for how the quantity to order is set.
ASSA USA module - added support for directional and limited rotation cylinders.
Version 8.15306.0.0
Fixed an error while exporting Kaba Expert job door assembly to XML.
Improved error checking during coding when a code is assigned to a key that operated no doors.
Preliminary support for ASSA USA locking products.
Jobs, changed maximum number of each key ordered on each job from 999 to 9999. Same change for doors.
Added an Application Parameter turn on the display of the system creator when searching for systems.
New system from hierarchy quantities when using DHI numbering. When making a level 3 system and adding
a second master node it was not named correctly.
Fixed an occasional access violation error when releasing a job to manufacturing.
Version 8.15305.0.0
Compatibility improvements for importing older PM7 system files.
Fixed key colour search when setting up key colours was not always working.
Version 8.15304.0.0

Added card 1925.

Improved system number generation when importing systems with the same system number as an existing
system.
Version 8.15303.0.0
MT5 pinning output for some solutions was not displaying correctly.
Version 8.15302.0.0
Improved error checking for construction keyed systems with custom progressions and construction position
specified in the custom progression.
Added an Application Parameter to control on job pinning reports if the door number is shown "white on
black" or if the stamping is shown that way instead.
Keying matrix now has a feature to make manufactured doors read-only. The default value for this is supplied
by a new Application Parameter .
Version 8.15301.0.0
Opening system - more options in the "Job number" search.
Added a preference for the check-box sensitivity in the keying matrix.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 335

Customer specific changes.

Version 8.15208.0.0

Improved the logic for printing "(Copy)" on manufacturing reports when reprinted.
Job manufacturing reports - include system stamping in the report title when it has been set.
Key and door history issue numbers were displaying incorrect on some items. Fixed.
Lowered CPU usage during database backup.
Job search - fixed issue with date selection.

Job search for manufacturing - fixed issue with date selection, removed nonsensical options for the "Look in"
selection.
Version 8.15207.1.0
Job manufacturing. Fixed an error message closing a job if the PM8 user had never previously opened the
system or worked on it in any way.
Emailing system reports. Improved the handling of email addresses when emailing system reports.
Job manufacturing reports - new application parameter to permit large text identifier in the top right corner
(e.g. Invoice, Sales Order etc) to assist in collating paperwork in factories.
Adjusted some XML manufacturing outputs to be compatible with PM7 when using the legacy export mode.
Affects Union and KeyUltra design modules as well as Inline lock systems B8B10, CLCS, CounterR.
Version 8.15206.0.0
Job signatories - improved logic for checking signatories so that keys and doors work completely
independently.
Version 8.15205.0.0
Job administration summary report was not using the selected factory parameter.
Creating a new system from an existing systems - improved key and door sorting.
Interchangeable core (A2, A4 etc) - fixed and error message when control key was the only key assigned a
code.
Construction keyed systems (Inline LW Twin, AA Perk, AA Union, AA KeyUltra) did not display construction
keying information correctly when manufacturing a job without having the system open.
Version 8.15204.0.0
Minor visual improvements in job window.
Customer specific changes.
Job search screens added Customer Code to the display.
Interchangeable Code - new lock systems for Kaba Peaks.
Version 8.15203.0.0
Fixed an error when cutting Abloy Protec keys on a Silca UnoCode 399.
Version 8.15202.0.0
Interchangeable core module - allowed empty position use in special pinning A2/A3/A4 systems.
Version 8.15201.0.0
Customer specific changes.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

336 ProMaster Master Keying

Version 8.15103.0.0
Abloy Protec and Abloy Novel, added support for cutting keys on Keyline Sigma Pro machine.

Fixed an error importing systems from older versions of PM7.

Coding tree, when Assign branch is clicked and a choice of key sections is available then you are asked which
key section to use for the branch rather than assuming the key section of the currently selected master key.
Job entry, when using "Copy quantity to next" for doors it could produce an incorrect quantity on the parts
required report. Fixed.

Version 8.15102.0.0
Fixed an error that could happen when turning on key head colours after creating the design.
Tidied up some warning messages to make them more concise.
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.15101.0.0
Silca Protech output - more options for T02 marking data.
Improved the order that doors and keys are added.
Silca Protech output - added support for Abloy Sentry short keys.
Silca Protech output - added support for EVVA 3KS+ and 4KS.
Resolved a problem cutting Abloy Protec keys on the Silca UnoCode 399.
Performance improvement opening coding matrix on Bilock systems with all positions progressed.
Jobs key cutting report now has font size choice.
Customer specific changes.
Added card 799.
Version 8.15013.0.0
Minor visual adjustments.

Faster opening jobs for a system.

Adjusted several cards (1547, 1548, 1885).
More pinning and error check big performance enhancements on huge systems - Kaba design modules.
Version 8.15012.0.0
Fixed wording error on the system import window.
Pinning and error check big performance enhancements on huge systems - Kaba design modules.
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.15011.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.15010.0.0
Added parameters to Abloy Protec and Abloy Disklock/Novel system types to allow the suppression of the tip
"0" profile cut on printouts. This is suppressed by default.
Door bulk change was not saving changes to notes or pinning notes. Fixed.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 337

Fixed an error message when generating a TMK for Sargent 6300 systems.
Coding now reports an error on Bilock CQCC doors that do not have a control key assigned (I.e. an impossible
situation).
Version 8.15009.0.0
Improved speed when creating system from hierarchy quantities.
Improved speed when creating system from Excel.
Version 8.15008.0.0

Main window, refined the signatory names display.

Pinning and error check minor performance enhancements on huge systems - most design modules.
Improved coding window opening time on large systems.
Version 8.15007.0.0
Added a definition for creating a system from the old PM7 excel files. This should be used for transitional
purposes only and all new work should be done in the PM8 Excel format. Manufacturer and premium edition.
Added numerous application parameters to allow you to make each of the client fields mandatory when
creating a client for a new system.
Pinning and error check big performance enhancements on huge systems - most design modules.
Fixed a problem that could stop end user defined label layouts from being removed.
Version 8.15006.0.0
Improved wording of some items.
Improved handling on some design modules when coloured hey heads are turned on or off.
Coding windows - allowed resizing of key section / colour controls.
Version 8.15005.0.0
Customer specific changes.

Version 8.15004.0.0
Customer specific changes.
Version 8.15003.0.0
Improved the way the next system number is generated.
Fixed the default parameters for signatory requirements when creating a new system.
Version 8.15002.0.0
Card 401 parameter improvements.
Version 8.15001.2.0
XML job output - enhanced output for Interchangeable Core module to repect the system type setting for
presentation direction and also output a flag indicating the direction.
General speed enhancements.
Added generic key marker to manufacturer and premium edition.
Added generic cylinder marker to manufacturer and premium edition.
Version 8.14912.4.0

© 2019 WH Software Limited

338 ProMaster Master Keying

Construction keyed systems - fixed a problem when printing pinning reports when the construction ball was
specified on a custom progression.

Import system from another PM8 user - improved performance.

Import system from another PM8 user - important fix to importing key above.
Auto assign codes - fixed problem assigning codes to selective keys.
Fixed an error when removing a lock and replacing it with another lock.
Improvements to entering construction ball depths on custom progressions.

Fixed a variety of system import/export issues.

Version 8.14911.1.0
Fixed a problem with deleting the design for Abloy Protec systems.
Fixed an error message when importing lists for Abloy Protec or Lockwood MT5 when the keys section did not
exist.
Version 8.14910.0.0
Reduced CPU usage when idle with a system open.
Adding a door when adding a key - improved functionality to make it faster to add keys and doors at the same
time.
Version 8.14909.0.0
Fixed PM7 export for key and door groups.
Fixed coding screens where keys appeared to be on a job when even after the job is returned to data entry.
Bulk change (Keys, doors, locks). Various improvements.
Job door pinning report and on-screen pinning - the part type was not showing for "all cylinders" or "re-key".
New system from hierarchy quantities. Many improvements. Simplified windows for DHI systems. For
international systems the window has been simplified, rearranged and remembers settings. Drop down list
for lock selection. Option to produce a single master with the name specified (i.e. not generated). Overall
the changes make it much easier to enter non-symmetrical systems.
Kaba Expert, ExpertPlus, Quattro improved the manual entry of codes.
Auto coding performance improvements - much faster on huge systems.
Version 8.14908.0.0
Fixed 2 door preferences that were not saved.
On the key search window improved information refresh when a master key is removed.
Fixed PM7 export for Abloy Protec.
Version 8.14907.0.0
Job door filter on stamping fixed.
Corrected wording on window for removing a job.
Added support for old CYA format.
Version 8.14906.0.0
Adjustments to card 1919.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

 Summary of changes in updates 339

Version 8.14905.0.0
Fixed anomalies in key marking output for GravoGraph and EngraveIT Pro machines.

Version 8.14904.0.0
Improved the search for systems by customer order number.
Kaba ACE enhancements.
Version 8.14903.0.0
In the database upgrade from PM7 to PM8, fixed the import of Bilock dealer cut definitions.

Import from version 7 - added support for some earlier import files.
Kaba ACE enhancements.
Version 8.14902.0.0
Fixed an error duplicating door areas.
Increased default text size for rich text fields.
When exporting to ProMaster Key Manager, the email address of the system contact 1 is added to the email
recipient list.
Version 8.14901.0.0
Kaba ACE enhancements.
Various small corrections.
Improved speed opening coding tree or coding matrix over slow connection.
Fixed problem deleting a system if the client had client signatories.
In the database upgrade from PM7 to PM8, accommodates some unusual key section data.
Adjustments to cards 38, 1754, 1755, 1756.
Added cards 1920, 1921.

Fixed an error duplicating door areas.

Fixed an error exporting to Key Manager if the client version had not been selected.
Door label printouts for jobs - added "Brand" and "Finish" as fields that can be used for your own label
layouts.
Version 8.14813.0.0
Preliminary support for Kaba ACE.
Preliminary support for CYA machine in manufacturer edition.
All Kaba modules, resolved an error when printing pinning charts for un-coded doors.
Doors search - added graphic for keys and jobs.
Added an application parameter that affects pinning reports and keying matrix reports. Normally reports are
"2 pass" for a variety or reasons. On these reports, the "2 pass" has only the benefit of showing the page
count. You can change this application parameter to make these reports render faster and consequently not
show the page count.
Import from version 7 - added support for some earlier import files.
Improved functionality of New system from hierarchy quantities.

© 2019 WH Software Limited

340 ProMaster Master Keying

Added some inline cards.

Version 8.14812.0.0

Added ability to print door pinning report in coding screens from (a) a door phantom and (b) from the doors
list.
Improved handling of special pinning with empty positions.
Version 8.14811.0.0
Improved system import of key section families.

Version 8.14810.0.0
Changed the default value for some application parameters to better fit the requirements of most users.
Fixed a problem importing systems with driver pins specified on the cylinder.
Version 8.14809.0.0
Job On-screen pinning and job XML outputs - added handling when lock data used by job missing from lock
database.
Version 8.14808.0.0
When creating users, allowed user to be created using windows domain login rather than creating user first
then changing to windows domain login.
Version 8.14807.0.0
Various cosmetic fixes and tidying up of error messages when saving data.
In the database upgrade from PM7 to PM8, speed improvements.
Job door pinning report - added handling for lock data used by job missing from lock database.
Version 8.14806.0.0
Open job for manufacturing - improved performance.
AL Bilock CQCC systems - fixed incorrect phantom report on some keys.

Version 8.14805.0.0
Various cosmetic fixes.
Version 8.14804.0.0
When creating users, disallowed upper case in the login name.
Version 8.14803.0.0
In the database upgrade from PM7 to PM8, made changes to reduce memory consumption during the
upgrade.
Version 8.14802.1.0
In the database upgrade from PM7 to PM8, handling has been added for key numbers and door numbers
duplicated in a system.
Version 8.14801.0.0
Initial release of ProMaster Master Keying 8.

© 2019 WH Software Limited